 | The text below this notice was generated by a computer, it still needs to be checked for errors and corrected. If you would like to help, view the original document by clicking the PDF scans along the right side of the page. Click the edit button at the top of this page (notepad and pencil icon) or press Alt+Shift+E to begin making changes. When you are done press "Save changes" at the bottom of the page. |
484 THE Bahá’í WORLD
II
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. BAHA’U’LLAH’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS
Alváḥ—i-Laylatu’l-Quds. A§l-i—Kullu’l-Qayr. Az-Bégh-i-Iléhi. Béz—AVTu-Bidih-Jémi. Bishérét (Glad Tidings). gihér-Védi (Four Valleys). Haft-Védi (Seven Valleys). Halih-Halih—Yé-Biflérét. Hfir-i-‘Ujéb. Hurt’lfét-i-‘Allin.
IfIráqét (Splendours).
Kalimét-i-Firdawsiyyih (Words of Paradise).
Kalimét-i-Makm’lnih (Hidden Words). Kitáb-i—‘Ahd (Book of Covenant). Kitáb-i-Aqdas (Most Holy Book). Kitáb-i-Badi‘.
Kitáb-i—iqén (Book of Certitude). Lawh-i-‘Abdu’l-‘AZiz—Va-Vukalé. Lawh-i-‘Abdu’l—Vahhéb. Lawh-i-‘Abdu’r-Razzéq. Lawh-i-Ahbéb.
Lawh-i-Ahmad (Tablet of Ahmad). Lawh-i-Amvéj.
Lawh-i-Anta’l-Kéfi.
Lawh-i-Aqdas.
Lawh-i-Aflraf. Lawh-i-‘Afliq-va-Ma‘ghfiq. Lawh-i—Ayiy-i—Nfir.
Lawh-i-Bahá.
Lawh-i-Baqé. Lawh-i-Basitatu’l-Haqiqih. Lawh—i-Bismilih. Lawh-i-Bulbulu’l-Firéq. Lawh—i-Burhén.
Lawh-i-Dunyé (Tablet of the World). Lawh—i-Fitnih. Lawh-i-fllulému’l-Ehuld. Lawh-i-Habl’b. Lawh—i-Haft-Pursifl.
Lawh—i—Hajj.
Lawh-i-Hawdaj.
Lawh-i-Hikmat (Tablet of Wisdom). Lawh—i—Hirtfk.
Lawh-i-Hfin’yyih.
Lawh-i-Husayn.
Lawh-i-Ibn-i-th’b (Epistle to the Son of the Wolf).
Lawh-i-Ittihéd.
Lawh—i-Jamél.
Lawh-i-Karim.
Lawh-i—Karmil.
Lawh-i-Kullu’t-Ta‘ém.
Lawh-i-Malikih (Tablet to Queen Victoria).
Lawh-i—Malik-i-Rfis (Tablet to the Czar of Russia).
Lawh-i-MalléHu’l-Quds (Tablet Of the Holy Mariner).
Lawh—i—Ménikjf—Séhib.
Lawh—i-Maqsfld.
Lawh-i-Maryam.
Lawh—i-Mawlfid.
Lawh-i-Mubéhilih.
Lawh-i—Népulyfin (First Tablet to Napoleon III).
Lawh-i-Népulyl’m 11 (Second Tablet to Napoleon III).
Lawh-i-Négir.
Lawh—i-Nuqtih.
Lawh-i-Pép (Tablet to the Pope).
Lawh-i-Pisar—‘Amm.
Lawh-i-Qiné‘.
Lawh-i-Quds.
Lawh-i-Raff‘.
Lawh-i-Ra’is (Tablet to Ra’is).
Lawh-i-Raqflé.
Lawh-i-Rasfil.
Lawh-i-Rfih.
Lawh-i-Ru’yé.
Lawh-i-Sahéb.
Lawh—i-Salmén I.
Lawh-i-Salmén II.
Lawh-i-Sémsfin.
Lawh-i-Sayyz’ih.
Lawh-i-flmyth-Fém’.
Lawh-i-Sultén.
Lawh-i-Tawhl’d.
Lawh-i-Tibb.
Lawh-i-Tuqé.
[Page 485]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Lawh-i-Yfisuf. Lawh-i-Zaynu’l-Muqarrabin. Lawh-i—Zl’yérih. Madinatu’r-Ricjé. Madinatu’t-Tawhid. Magnavi. Munéjéthéy-i-Sl’yém. Qad-Ihtaraqua’l-Mufllisfin. Qasidy-i-Varqé’l’yyih. Rth-i—‘Amé. Riḍvánu’l-‘Adl. Riḍvánu’l-Iqrér. Sahifiy-i-flagfiyyih. Salét-i-Mayyit (Prayer for the Dead). Séqf-Az-glayb-i—Baqé. flikkar—glikan-flavand. Subhéna-Rabbl’ya’l-A‘lé. Subhénaka-Yé-Hfi. Sfiratu’lláh.
Sfiriy-i-Ahzén. Sfiriy—i-Amin.
Sfiriy-i-Amr.
Sfiriy—i-A‘réb. Sfiriy-i-Ashéb. Sfiriy-i-Asmá’. Sfiriy-i-Bayén. Sliriy-i-Damm. Sfiriy-i-l_3_hab1’h. Sfiriy-i-fllibh. SL’lriy-i-gikr.
Sfiriy-i-Fadl.
Sfiriy-i-Fath.
Sfiriy-i-Fu’éd. Sfiriy-i-Cflusn (Tablet of the Branch). Sfiriy-i-Hajj I.
485
Sfiriy—i-Hajj II. Sfiriy-i-Haykal.
SL’lriy-i-Hifz.
Sfiriy-i-Hijr.
Sfiriy-i-‘Ibéd.
Sfiriy—i-Ism. Sfiriy-i—Ismuna’l-Mursil. Sfiriy-i-Javéd.
Sfiriy-i-Lhigéb. Sfiriy-i—Ma‘ém’.
Sfiriy—i-Man‘.
Sfiriy-i-Mulfik.
Sfiriy-i-Nidé.
Sfiriy-i-Nush.
Sfiriy-i—Qadir.
Sfiriy-i-Qahl’r.
Sfiriy-i-Qalam.
Sfiriy—i-Qamis.
Sfiriy-i-Sabr.
Sfiriy-i-Sulgén.
Sfiriy-i-Vafé.
Sfiriy-i—Ziyérih. Sfiriy-i-Zabur.
Sfiriy-i-Zuhfir.
Tafsir-i-HL’I. Tafsir-i-Hurfifét—i-Muqagga‘ih. Tafsx’r-i—Sfiriy-i-Va’_sh-Shams. Tajalliyét (Effulgences). Tarézét (Ornaments). Ziyérat-Némih (The Tablet of Visitation). Ziyérat-Némiy-i—Awll’yé. Ziyérat-Némiy-i-Bábu’l-Báb va Quddfis. Ziyérat-Némiy-i-Bayt. Ziyérat-Némiy-i-Maryam. Ziyérat-Némiy-i-Siyyidu’fl-Sluhadé.
(Note: the works of Bahá’u’lláh, translated into English by Shoghi Effendi, are listed on p. 488.
under the subheading, ‘Translations’.)
COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH
Tablets Of Bahá’u’lláh revealed after the Kitáb-i-Aqdas
2. THE BAB’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS
The Arabic Bayén.
Commentary on the Sfirih of Kawt_har.
Commentary on the Sfirih of Va’l-‘Asr.
Dalé’il-i-Sab‘ih.
Epistles to Muhammad fléh and Hájí Mfrzé Áqásí.
fiasé’il-i-Sab‘ih. Kitáb-i-Asmá’. Kitáb-i-Panj-fla’n. Kitábu’r-Rfih. Lawh-i-Hurfifét. The Persian Bayén.
[Page 486]
486
Qayyfimu’l-Asmá’. Riséliy-i-‘Adh’yyih. Riséliy—i—Bahabl’yyih. Riséliy-i-Fiqhiyyih. Riséliy-i-Furfi‘~i-‘Adh’yyih. Sahifatu’l—Ḥaramayn.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Sahify-i-Ja‘farl’yyih. Sahifiy-i-Maflzfinih. Sahifiy-i-Radaviyyih. SL’lriy—i-Tawhfd. Tafsir-i~Nubuvvat—i-Qéssih. Ziyérat-i-ghéh-‘Abdu’l-‘Azfm.
(Note: The Báb Himself states in one passage of the Persian Bayén that His writings comprise no
less than 500,000 verses.)
COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH
Selections from the Writings Ofthe Báb
3. ‘ABDU’L-BAHA’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS
IN PERSIAN AND ARABIC
Ad‘fyyih va Munéjét. Alváḥ-i-Tablighi-i-Imriké. Alváḥ—i-Vaséy—a
_K_hitébét dar Urfipé va Imn’ké. Lawh-i-Afiékiyyih.
Lawh-i-‘Ahd va Mitfléq (Imn’ké). Lawh-i-‘Ammih.
Lawh-i—Ayét. Lawh—i-Du-Nidéy-i-Faléh va Najéh. Lawh—i—Dr. Forel.
Lawh-i—Haft fiam‘. Lawh—i—Hizér Baytf. Lawh-i-K_hurésén.
Lawh—i-Léhih. Lawti-Mahfil-i-flawr.
Lawh-i-Muhabbat‘
Lawh-i-Tanzih va Taqdis. Lawh—i-Tarbiyat.
Madanl’yyih. Makétib-i—‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Maqéliy—i-Sayyéh.
Mufévadét. fiarh-i-Fass-i-Nigin-i-Ism-i-A‘zam. fiarh-i-fluhadéy—i-Yazd va Isfahén. Sfyésiyyih.
Taghkiratu’l-Vafé. Tafsir-i-Bismi’lláhi’r-Rahmz’mi’r-Rahl’m. Tafsir-i-Kuntu Kanzan Maflfl’yyan. Ziyérat Némih.
IN ENGLISH
The Secret of Divine Civilization. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette Illinois, 1957. Originally published by Cope & Fenwick, London, 1910, under the title The Mysterious Forces of Civilization. Subsequently published by Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1918.
Some Answered Questions. First printed by Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trubner and Co. Ltd., London, 1908. Subsequently published by Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1918, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Tablet t0 the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, the Hague. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1930.
Tabletto Dr. Fore]. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1930.
Tablets Of the Divine Plan. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1959.
A Traveller’s Narrative. Translated into English by Edward Granville Browne under the title A Traveller’s Narrative written to illustrate The Episode of the Báb. Cambridge University Press, 1891. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York. 1930.
Will and Testament. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1925, 1935. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944, 1968, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Memorials of the Faithfitl. Translated from the original Persian and annotated by Marzieh Gail. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1971.
[Page 487]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
487
COMPILATIONS IN ENGLISH
Foundations ()fWorlzl Unily; a selection of letters and public addresses. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1945.
Paris Talks; a compilation of His addresses in Paris. G. Bell and Son Ltd., London, 1923. Subsequently published by Bahá’í Publishing Trust. London. 10th edition 1961;and in the United States under the title The Wisdom of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd; Brentano’s. New York, 1924.
The Promulgation of Universal Peace, vols. I, II; a compilation of His addresses in Canada
and the United States in 1912. Bahá’í Publishing Society, Chicago, 1922 and '1925.
Selections from the Writings of‘Abdu’l-Bahá; compiled from His correspondence with individual believers, groups and Assemblies of the East and West. World Centre Publications, 1978.
Tablets of‘Abdu’l-Bahá, vols. I, II, III; a compilation of His letters to individual believers in America. Bahá’í Publishing Society. Chicago, 1909,1915, 1916.
4. SOME COMPILATIONS FROM THE WRITINGS ’OF BAHA’U’LLAH, THE BAB AND ‘ABDU’L-BAHA
The Bahá’z’ Revelation. Trust, London, 1955. B(Ihd’t’ World Faith. Bahá’í Publishing Com mittee, Wilmette, Illinois. 1943, 1956.
The Covenant ofBahci’u’ulhih. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 1950; revised, 1963. The Divine Art of Living. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944;
revised. 1960.
Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lltih. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939, 1952, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Bahá’í Publishing
Prayers and Meditations by Bahd’u'lla’h. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938, 1954, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
The Reality of Man. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1931; revised, 1962.
Selecrions from the Writings of the Báb. World Centre Publications, 1976.
Tablets Of Bahci’u’lláh revealed after the Kitáb-i-Aqdas. World Centre Publications; 1978.
(Note: A large number of Prayer Books compiled of prayers revealed by Bahá’u’lláh, the Báb and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá has been published by Bahá’í Publishing Trusts and National Spiritual
Assemblies throughout the world.)
5. SHOGHI EFFENDI’S BEST-KNOWN WORKS
The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh. February, 1929.
The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, Further Considerations. March, 1930.
The Goal ofa New World Order. November, 1931.
The Golden Age of the Cause of Bahá’u’lláh. March, 1932.
America and the Most Great Peace. April, 1933.
The Dispensation Of Bahá’u’lláh. February, 1934.
The Unfoldmem‘ of World Civilization. March, 1936.
(Note: The above seven essays have been published in one volume entitled The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938. Revised edition, 1955;
second printing, 1965.)
The Advent of Divine Justice. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939. The Promised Day is Come. Bahá’í Publishing
Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1941. God Passes By. Bahá’í’l’ Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944.
[Page 488]
488
THE Bahá’í WORLD
TRANSLATIONS (see note p. 485).
The Dawn-Breakers, by Muhammad-i-Zarandi, surnamed Nabt’l-i-A‘zam. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1932, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1941, 1953, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Gleanings from the Writings of B(Ihé’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1939, 1952, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
The Hidden Words ofBahti’u’Iléh (Arabic and Persian). Bahá’í Publishing Committee, New York, 1924. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, London, 1932, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Kitdb-i-iqén, by Bahá’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1931, 1950, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Prayers and Meditations by Bahti’u’lláh. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1938, 1962, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Tablet t0 the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, The Hague, by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, dated December 17, 1919. Published as a leaflet by Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London.
Tablet to Dr. Fore], by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Published in Star of the West, vol. XIV, no. 4, July 1923, p. 101. Subsequently published as a leaflet by various Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
Tablet Of the Holy Mariner, by Bahá’u’lláh. Published in Star of the West, vol. xm, no. 4, May 1922, p. 75. Subsequently published in Prayer Books and other compilations.
The Willand Testament of‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Bahá’í’ Publishing Committee, New York, 1925, 1935. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1944, 1968, and other Bahá’í Publishing Trusts.
SOME COMPILATIONS FROM HIS WRITINGS
Bahá’í Administration. Bahá’í Publishing Committee, Wilmette, Illinois, 1928, 1960.
Messages to America (1932—1946). Bahá’í’ Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1947.
Messages to the Bahá’í World (1950—1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1958.
Principles of Bahá’í Administration. Bahá’í’ Publishing Trust, England, 1950.
Guidance for Today and Tomorrow. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, London, 1953.
Citadel of Faith (Messages to America 1947-1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, Wilmette, Illinois, 1965.
Messages to Canada. National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Canada, 1965. Letters from the Guardian to Australia and New Zealand (1923—1957). National Spiritual
Assembly of Australia, 1970.
Dawn of a New Day—Messages to India (1923—1957). Bahá’í Publishing Trust, New Delhi, 1970.
Directives fi‘om the Guardian. Bahá’í Publishing Trust, New Delhi, 1970.
High Endeavours: Messages to Alaska. National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Alaska, 1976.
Call to the Nations. World Centre Publications, 1977.
[Page 489]
BAHA‘lBIBLIOGRAPHY 489
6. LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE ACHIEVEMENTS OF THE FIVE YEAR PLAN
Riḍván 1974—Riḍván 1979
PREVI 0 US volumes of The Bahá’z’ World list more than 5501anguages,major dialects and scripts into which the Sacred Writings and other literature of the Bahá’í Faith have been translated. The promotion of such translations has been an important objective of the international teaching plans conducted by the Bahá’í world community over the years, with the purpose of making available to the believers in many lands the Scriptures of their faith in their own tongues. Information about the languages in which Bahá’í literature is currently available may be obtained from the Bahá’í World Centre, PO. Box 155, 31 001 Haifa, Israel.
Listed below, by continent, are the languages and dialects into which translations of Bahá’í literature were first made, and those in which literature has been added, during the period between Riḍván 1974 and Riḍván 1979. These accomplishments include translations, publications and recordings on tape, although not all have been achieved in each of the languages listed.
The usage and spelling chosen for primary listings and indication of dialect relationships follow, where possible, C. F. and F. M. Voegelin, Classification and Index of the World’s Languages.‘ It is recognized by the compilers of this list that these designations sometimes do not reflect the name by which a particular language or dialect is best known, or the designation preferred by its speakers. Some variant names and spellings, including variants previously reported, appear in parentheses.
The major countries, islands or territories where the languages are spoken are shown in italics. Where no such entry is given, the places where the language is spoken are so numerous and so widely scattered that to list them would be unwieldy; many of these languages are found world-wide.
A. AFRICA
Newly Translated:
1. Anyi: Baule (Baoulé) dialect (Ivory 16. Diola: Kasa (Casa) dialect (The Gam Coast) bia) 2 Asu (Pare; Kipare) (Tanzania) 17. Ewe: Watyi (Ouatchi; Waci) dialect 3 Awing (Cameroons) (Benin; Togo) 4. Bambara (Mali; Sénégal; Upper Volta) 18. Frafra (Ghana) 5 Bamoun (Cameroons) 19. Gurma (Gourma; Gourmantche) (To6 Bargu (Bargou; Bariba) (Benin; Togo; g0; Upper Volta) Nigeria) 20. Herero (Namibia/South West Afiica) 7. Bassa (Gbasa) (Liberia) 21. Ijo (Ijaw) (Nigeria) 8. Te—Beembe (Kibembe) (Zaire) 22. Kaba (Sara Kaba) (Central African 9. Berba (Benin) Empire; Chad) 10. Bete (Ivory Coast) 23. Kasem (Kasseme; Kasena; Kassena) 11. Bini (Edo) (Nigeria) (Ghana; Upper Volta)
12. TBulu (Boulou) (Cameroons 0r Gabon) 24. Kefa (Kaffa; Kaffigna) (Ethiopia) 13. Busoong (Kuba; Bakuba; Bushong) 25. ra-Kpa (Bafia) (Cameroons)
(Zaire) 26. Krio (West A frica)
14. Chiripon-Lete-Anum (Cherepong; 27. Kusal (Kusaal) (Ghana; Upper Volta) Guan) (Ghana) 28. Kwakum (Bakoum) (Cameroons)
15. Dan (Gio; Guere; Yacouba) (Ivory 29. Kweni (Gouro) (Ivory Coast) Coast; Liberia) 30. Maka (Makaa) (Cameroons)
‘ Foundations of Linguistics Series; Elsevier, New York and Amsterdam; 1977. TEfforts to obtain exact identification continue.
[Page 490]
490
31. 32. 33.
34. 35.
36.
37.
38.
H
WM“
5"?
PPWS?‘
11. 12. 13. 14.
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
22.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Mano (Guinea; Liberia)
Moba (Ghana; Togo; Upper Volta) Nankanse (Nankani) (Ghana; Upper Volta)
Riff (Tarifit) (Algeria; Morocco) Sara: Sara-Majingai dialect (Central African Empire; Chad)
Somba: Niende (Gniandé) dialect (Benin; Togo)
Songhai (Sonrai): Dendi dialect (Upper West Africa)
Songhai (Sonrai): Songhai dialect (Upper West A frica)
39.
40. 41.
42.
43.
44.
Tamazight (Algeria; Libya; Mali; Morocco; Nigeria)
Tiv (Nigeria) TTobote (Busari; Bassar) (Ghana; Togo)
ci-Tonga, Malawian (Kitonga; Siska) (Malawi) Tupuri Chad) Wescos (Cameroonian Pidgin) (West Africa)
(Toupouri) (Cameroons;
Insufficient Information (Further identification is needed to determine whether the following represent new accomplishments or enrichment of existing literature):
TBatua (Lutua-Bambote) (Reported from Zaire)
2. 3.
Mendez Kpa dialect (Sierra Leone) T Yaouré (Yahore) (Reported from Ivory Coast)
Literature Enriched:
Adangme (Ghana) Afrikaans (South Africa)
Akan: Asante (Ashanti) dialect (Ghana) Akan: Fante (Fanti) dialect (Ghana) Akan: Twi (Akwapem) dialect (Ghana)
Akoli (Acholi) (Sudan; Uganda) Amharic (Amarigna) (Ethiopia) Bassa (Koko; Mvele) (Cameroons)
ici-Bemba (Wemba) (Zaire; Zambia)
Creole, Indian Ocean (Mauritian Creole) (Mauritius; Réunion; Seychelles) Dagbani (Dagbane) (Ghana; Togo)
T Dinka (Sudan) Diola (Jola) (Upper West Africa) Diola (Jola): Fogny (Jéola Féofii) dialect (The Gambia; Guinea; Sénégal) Duala (Douala) (Cameroons) Efik (Cameroons; Nigeria) Ekoi; Ejagham dialect (Cameroons; Nigeria) Ewe (Benin; Ghana; Togo) Ewe: Adja dialect (Benin) Ewe: Gé (Mina) dialect (Benin; Niger; Togo) Ewe: Gfi (Goun) dialect (Benin; Ghana; Togo) F6 (Fon; Dahoméen) (Benin)
T Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
23.
24. 25.
26
28
30. 31. 32. 33. 34.
35.
36. 37.
38. 39. 40. 41. 42.
43.
Ful (Fula; Fulani; Peulh; Toucouleur) (West Africa)
Ga (Ga) (Ghana)
Gambai (Sara-Gambai; Ngambaye; Gombaye) (Chad)
. olu-Ganda (Luganda) (Uganda) 27.
Gbaya (Baya) (Central Empire; Cameroons; Congo)
A frican
.eke-Gusii (Kisii) (Kenya) 29.
Hausa Central
Africa) Igbo (Ibo; Igho) (Nigeria)
(Haoussa) (West
ke-Kamba (Kikamba) (Kenya)
Kanuri (Chad; Niger; Nigeria) Kikuyu (Kenya) Kongo (Kikongo) (Angola; Cabinda; Congo; Zaire) Kongo: Laadi (Lari; Balari; Kilari) dialect (Gabon; Congo) erlle (Guinea; Liberia) Logooli (Luragoli; Maragoli; Ragoli) (Kenya) Losengo: Mangala (Lingala) dialect (Zaire)
si-Lozi (Zambia)
ki-Luba—Katanga (Shaba) (Zaire)
Luba-Lulua (Tshiluba; Ciluba) (Zaire) Luba-Lulua: Luba-Kasai dialect (Tshiluba Of Kasai) (Zaire)
Luhya: lu-Tiriki dialect (Kenya)
[Page 491]
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56.
57.
58.
59
60. 61. 62. 63.
64 65
67.
UIAUJNo—t
9‘
T
shi-Ronga
”>090.“
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ci-Lunda (Angola; Zai're; Zambia) ci—Lunda: Ndembo dialect (Zai're) Luo (Kenya; Tanzania) Lwo (Uganda) ci-Makonde (Shimakonde) (Mozambique; Tanzania) Malagasy (Madagascar) Masa (Massa) (Chad; Cameroons) Masaba: ulu-Bukusu (Lubukusu) dialect (Kenya; Uganda) Mashi (Zaire; Zambia)
ke-Mero (Kimeru; Meru) (Kenya)
More (Mossi) (Ghana; Togo; Upper Volta)
isi-Ndebele (Sindebele) (ZimbabweRhodesia) Nguni: isi-Swati (SiSwati; Swazi)
dialect (Swaziland; South A frica) Nguni: isi-Xhosa (!Xhosa; Kaffir) dialect (Botswana; Transkei, South A frica)
Nguni: Zulu dialect (South Africa)
.eke-Nyakyusa: Ngonde (Konde) dialect
(Malawi; Tanzania)
ki-Nyamwesi (Nyamwezi) (Tanzania)
Nyang (Kenyang) (Cameroons) ci-Nyanja (Malawi; Zambia) ci-Nyanja: ci-Cewa (Chichewa) dialect (Malawi; Zambia)
.olu—Nyole (Lunyore; Lunyole) (Kenya) . oru-Nyoro (Runyoro-Rutoro) (Uganda) 66.
Oromigna (Galla; Galligna) (Ethiopia; Kenya)
(Shironga) South A frica)
(Mozambique;
491
68. Ruanda (Kinyarwanda; Runyarwanda) (Rwanda)
69. iki—Rundi (Kirundi) (Burundi)
70. Sango (Central African Empire,Chad; Congo)
71. Sara: Sara Ngama dialect (Central A frican Empire; Chad)
72. Serer (Serére) (The Gambia; Sénégal)
73. Shilha (Algeria; Morocco)
74. Shilluk (Sholuk) (Ethiopia; Sudan)
75. Shona (Mozambique; ZimbabweRhodesia)
76. Sidamo (Sidamigna) (Ethiopia)
77. Iu-Songe (Kisonge) (Zaire)
78. Songhai: Zarma (Djerma) dialect (Niger; Nigeria)
79. Sotho, Southern (se-Sotho; Sesotho) (Lesotho; South A frica)
80. Swahili (Kiswahili) (East Central A frica)
81. Temen (Themne, Temne) (Sierra Leone)
82. Teso (Ateso) (Kenya; Uganda)
83. Tigrinya (Ethiopia)
84. ci-Tonga, Zambian (Plateau Tonga) (Zambia)
85. se-Tswana (Botswana; ZimbabweRhodesia; South A frica)
86. Tumbuka (ci-Tumbuka; Timbuka) (Malawi; Tanzania; Zambia)
87. Wolof (Jolof; Oulof) (The Gambia; Mauritania; Sénégal)
88. ci—Yao (Chiyao) (Malawi; Mozambique;
89.
Tanzania) Yoruba (Benin; Nigeria)
90. olu-Ziba (olu-Haya) (Tanzania)
B. THE AMERICAS
Newly Translated:
Alacaluf (Chile) Amuesha (Peru) Campa (Peru)
T Catio (Colombia; Panama)
T Chinantec: Chinalteco de Tuxlepec (Mexico)
T Chinantec: Chinalteco de la Sierra (Mexico)
T Chiquitano (Bolivia) Conibo: Shipibo dialect (Peru) Cubeo (Brazil; Colombia)
ffons to obtain exact identification continue.
10.
11. 12.
13. 14.
15. 16.
Lokono (Arawak, Continental) (French Guiana; Guyana; Surinam)
T Macu (Maco) (Venezuela) Masco: Huachipairi (Amaracaeri) dialect (Peru) Mascoy: Lengua dialect (Paraguay) Maya: Mopan dialect (Belize; Guatemala) Mazatec (Mexico) Mbaya-Guaicurfi: Payagué (Lengua) dialect (Toba Lengua) (Paraguay, Bolivia, Brazil)
[Page 492]
492
17. 18. 19.
20. 21. 22. 23. 24.
8.09:5?”
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
20. 21.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Menomini (United States)
Mixtec (Mexico)
Ojibwa (Chippewa): Mississagi dialect (Canada)
Paez (Colombia)
Piaroa (Venezuela)
Piro (Peru)
Tanaina: Kenai dialect (Alaska) Tucuna (Ticuna) (Brazil; Colombia; Peru)
25. 26. 27.
28. 29.
30.
Tupi: GuarayL’l dialect (Bolivia) Tzeltal (Mexico) Uapichana (Wapishanna) Guyana) Yagua (Brazil; Colombia; Peru) Yupik, Central Alaskan: Yuk dialect (Alaska)
1' Zamucoan, Northern Ayoréo) (Bolivia; Paraguay)
(Brazil;
(Ayoré.
Insufficient Information (Further identification is needed to determine which of the following represent new accomplishments and which enrichment of existing literature):
Zapotec: Zapoteco del Istmo (Mexico)
2.
T Zapotec: Zapoteco de la Sierra (Mexico)
Literature En riched.‘
Aleut (Aleutian & Pribiloff Islands; Alaska; U.S.S.R.)
Ashushlay (Chulupi; Tapiete) (Paraguay)
Aymaré (Bolivia; Peru)
Blackfoot (Canada; United States) Bribri (Costa Rica; Panama) Cakchiquel (Guatemala) Carib (Brazil; Guyana; Guiana; Surinam)
Carib: Galibi (Carifia; Karinja) dialect (Brazil; French Guiana; Guyana; Surinam; Venezuela)
Carib, Island (Garifuna) (Belize; Guatemala; Honduras)
Cayapa (Ecuador)
Creole, Haitian (Haiti)
Cuna (Kuna) (Colombia; San Blas Islands, Panama)
Dakota (Sioux) (Canada; States)
Epera, Northern (Chocoe; Embera) (Colombia; Panama)
Goajiro (Guajiro) (Colombia; Venezuela)
Guahibo (Colombia; Venezuela) Guaymi (Panama)
Haida (Alaska; Canada)
Inuit (Inupiaq): Kobuk (Kotzebue) dialect (Alaska)
Jicaque (Xicaque) (Honduras) Kekchi (Ketchi) (Belize; Guatemala)
F ren ch
United
T Efforts to obtain exact identificafion continue.
22. 23.
24. 25.
26.
27. 28. 29. 30.
31.
32.
33. 34. 35.
36.
37. 38. 39. 40. 41.
42. 43. 44.
Koyukon (Alaska) Kuchin (Kutchin; Fort Loucheux) (Alaska; Canada) Machiguenga (Peru) Mapuche (Araucanian) (Argentina; Chile) Mataco (Argentina; Bolivia; guay) Maya (Belize; Guatemala; Mexico) Miskito (Honduras; Nicaragua) Otomi (Mexico) Paiute, Southern: Ute dialect (United States) Papiamento Curacao)
T Quechua (Argentina; Bolivia; Chile; Colombia; Ecuador; Peru) Quiché (Guatemala; Mexico) Shuara (Jivaro) (Ecuador; Peru) Shuara (Jivaro): Aguaruna dialect (Ecuador; Peru) Sranan (Sranan Tongo; Surinamese; Taki-Taki) (Surinam) Sumo (Honduras; Nicaragua) Tanana: Tanacross dialect (Alaska) Tlingit (Alaska; Canada) Toba (Argentina) Tupi: Guarani Brazil; Paraguay) Yaqui (Mexico; United States) Yaruro (Venezuela) Yukpa (Colombia; Venezuela)
Yukon;
Para Bonaire;
(A ruba;
dialect (A rgentina;
[Page 493]
UJN
U”:
.o‘
11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
16. 17.
18. 19. 20. 21.
22.
53.‘053°.\I
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
C. ASIA
493
Newly Translated:
Azerbaijani (Aflfirbéyjém’; Azeri) (irdn; Soviet Aflirbdyjdn) Bisaya (Sarawak; Borneo; Brunei)
T Dangi (India) Dayak, Land (Bidayuh): Jagoi (Biratak) dialect (Borneo; Sarawak) Japanese, Katakana script (new script) Kazakh: Cyrillic script (Kazakh S.S. R.; China) Kazakh: Latin script (Kazakh S.S.R.; China)
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
13.
Maldivian (Divehi Bas): Divehi script (Maldives; Minicoy Island)
Maldivian (Divehi Bas): Latin script (Maldives; Minicoy Island)
Melanau: Oya/Dalat dialect (Sarawak) Palawanon (Philippine Islands) Rajasthani: Gujuri (Gujari) dialect (India; Pakistan)
Sanskrit
Insufficient Information (Further identification is needed to determine whether the following represent new accomplishments 0r enrichment of existing literature):
T Agta (Philippine Islands) Murut, Sarawak (Malaysia, Indonesia)
3.
‘Dialect Of the Montagnards’ (Vietnam)
Literature Enriched:
Arabic
Armenian
Balochi (Baluchi) (Afghanislan; Arabian Peninsula; India; irdn; Pakistan; Turkmen S.S.R.)
Bengali (Bangladesh; India)
Bengali: Assamese dialect (Northeastern India)
Bengali: Tripuri (Kok—Borok) dialect (India)
Bikol (Bicol) (Philippine Islands) Burmese (Burma; Bangladesh) Chinese
Dayak, Land (Bidayuh): Bukar Sadong (Tebakang) dialect (Borneo; Sarawak)
Dayak, Sea (Iban) (Borneo; Sarawak) Gondi (India)
Gujarati (India)
Hanunéo (Philippine Islands)
Hindi (India; Africa; Fiji Islands; Guianas; Surinam)
Ilocano (Philippine Islands)
Ilonggo (Hiligaynon) (Philippine Islands)
Japanese
Kannada (Kanarese) (India) Kashmiri (India; Pakistan)
Khmer (Cambodian) (Kampuchea; Thailand; Vietnam)
Korean (Korea; China; Japan)
1‘ Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
23.
24. 25.
26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.
35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41.
42. 43.
44. 45.
46.
Kurdish (A fghanistan; Armenian S.S.R.; irdn; ‘Irziq; Syria; Turkey) Lao (Laotian) (Laos; Thailand) Malayalam (India, including Laccadive Islands)
Marathi (India)
Melanau: Mukah dialect (Sarawak) Nepali (Nepalese) (Nepal)
Oriya (Orija) (India)
Oriya: Halbi (Halabi) dialect (India) Pangasinan (Philippine Islands) Panjabi (Punjabi) (India; Pakistan) Persian (Farsi) Sebuano (Cebuano) Islands)
Sindhi (India; Pakistan) Sinhalese (Sri Lanka) Tagalog (Filipino) (Philippine Islands) Tamil
Telugu (India)
Thai (Thailand)
(Philippine
Tibetan, Central (Bhégifi): Lhasa (Dbus) dialect (India, Tibet)
Turkish
Turkmen (Turkoman) (Turkmen
S.S.R.; irdn; Afghanistan)
Urdu (India; Pakistan)
Vietnamese (Vietnam; Kampuchea; Laos; Thailand)
Waray (Waraywaray; Samar-Leyte; Samarefio) (Philippine Islands)
[Page 494]
494
ww 99‘.“
5”
99°39
11.
12. 13. 14.
15. 16.
17. 18. 19. 20.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
D. AUSTRALASIA AND THE PACIFIC ISLANDS
New] y Translated:
Akei (Navaka) (New Hebrides) Carolinean (Caroline Islands; Saipan) ‘Fiji Hindi’ (Fiji Islands) Gao (Solomon Islands) Kara (Papua New Guinea)
T Kombe (Papua New Guinea)
7.
8.
9.
Mele: Fila dialect (Fila & Efate Islands, New Hebrides)
Rennellese: Bellona dialect (Solomon Islands‘)
Tanna: Lenakel dialect (New Hebrides)
Literature Enriched:
Palauan (Palau) (Caroline Islands; Guam)
Pidgin, Fijian (Fiji Islands)
Pidgin, New Hebrides (Bislama) (New Hebrides)
Pidgin, Papuan (Neo-Melanesian) (Papua New Guinea, including Admiralty Islands)
Pidgin. Solomon Islands (Solomon Islands)
Ponapean (Eastern Caroline Islands) Roviana (Solomon Islands)
Samoan (Samoa; New Zealand; United
States) Tahitian (Society Islands; Tuamotu A rchipelago; M arquexas Islan ds;
Gambier & Austral Islands)
Tongan (Tonga Islands; Uvéa (Wallix) Island, Loyalty Islands)
Trukese (Caroline Islands)
Tuvaluan (Ellicean) (Tuvalu; Nauru;
Tokelau Islands; New Zealand; Hawaiian Islands; Swain’s Island, Samoa)
Yapese (Caroline Islands)
Areare (Solomon Islands) 21. Baining (New Britain Island, Papua New Guinea) 22. Bogutu (Solomon Islands) 23. Chamorro (Guam and other Mariana Islands) 24. Easter Island (Pascuense) (Easter Island) Efate (Efatese) (New Hebrides) 25. Efate: Erakor dialect (New Hebrides) Fijian (Fiji Islands) 26. Gilbertese (Kiribati; Nauru; Ocean 27. Island) 28. Hawaiian (Hawaiian Islands) Kosraean (Kusaiean) (Caroline 29. Islands) KwaraVae (Solomon Islands) Langalanga (Solomon Islands) 30. Lau (Solomon Islands) Lifu (Lifouan) (Loyalty Islands) 31. Maori, Cook Islands (Rarotongan) 32. (Cook Islands) Maori. New Zealand (New 'Zealana') Marshallese (Marshall Ls‘lands) Motu, Hiri (Papua New Guinea) 33. Nengone (Maréen) (Loyalry Islands)
E. EUROPE
Newly Translated:
B reton (Northwestern France)
Italian: Logodurese dialect (Sardinia)
Ladin (Italian & Swiss Tyrol)
1‘ Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
4. 5.
Latin Romany: Sinto dialect (Northern Italy)
[Page 495]
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. 15.
16.
17. 18.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
495
Literature Enriched:
Albanian (Albania; Bulgaria; Italy; Greece; United States; Turkey; Yugo Slavia)
Arabic: Maltese dialect (Malta) Basque (France, Spain, North America)
Bielorussian (White Russian) (Bielorussian S.S.R.; Poland; Lithuania)
Bulgarian (Bulgaria; Greece;
Rumania; U.S.S.R.; Yugoslavia) Croatian (Serbocroatian, Latin script) (Yugoslavia; Austria; Czechoslovakia; Hungary; Italy; Rumania) Czech (Czechoslovakia; United States)
Danish (Denmark; Germany; United States)
Dutch
English
Estonian
Faroese (Faroe Islands)
Finnish (Finland; Estonia; Sweden; United States. U.S.S.R.)
French
Frisian (Frisian Islands; Germany; The Netherlands)
Gaelic, Irish (Erse; Irish) (Ireland; United Kingdom)
Poland;
19.
20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.
34.
35.
Greek, Modern (Greece; Cyprus; Egypt; Italy; Balkans; Western Europe; Africa; North & South America; Australia; Turkey)
Hungarian
Icelandic (Iceland, United States) Italian
Lettish (Latvian) (Larvia)
Lithuanian
Norwegian: Riksmél (Bokmél) (Norway, United States)
Polish (Poland; Czechoslovakia;
Canada; Germany; Rumania; United States; U.S.S.R.)
Portuguese
Romansch: Sursilvan dialect (Switzerland)
Rumanian (Rumania; Albania; Balkans; Canada; United States; U.S.S.R.) Russian
Serbian (Serbocroatian, Cyrillic script) (Yugoslavia; Austria; Czechoslovakia; Hungary; Italy; Rumania) Slovak (Czechoslovakia; Yugoslavia)
Slovene (Yugoslavia; Austria; Italy; Hungary; United States)
Spanish (Spain; Africa; Caribbean; Central America; Philippine Islands; South America; United States) Swedish (Sweden; Canada; Estonia; Finland; United States)
Hungary;
F. INVENTED LANGUAGES
G. TOTAL BY CONTINENTS
German German: Luxembourgian dialect (Luxembourg) Esperanto Newly Translated Africa 44 The Americas 30 Asia 13 Australasia and the Pacific Islands 9 Europe 5 Invented languages 101
Needing
Further Literature Identification Enriched
3 90
2 44
3 46
— 33
—— 35
—— 1
8 249
[Page 496]
496
THE BAHA‘I’ WORLD
7. THE SHORT OBLIGATORY PRAYER
IN 391 LANGUAGES, DIALECTS OR SCRIPTS
._'W.I---O
‘0"..‘:"0.’0.0.0’.‘0.0.0'.‘O'.‘0.0.0I0, . , . . . .
A
. . u
' I u
. ‘..' -0- ' -0. ' .0.' ‘0. ' 4'
I - - .
I
.7 V.'- V.’ .
mtwigrtm wflwtfvénb“ W‘ $1508) JWJJJULL;
("1‘ . 3‘
9 I . . .
.. . . ... AA.
~>~v--r~«9090’09091
l
s ' O
I bear witness, O my God, that Thou hast created me to know Thee and to worship Thee. l testify, at this moment, to my powerlessness and to Thy might, to my poverty and to Thy wealth.
There is none other God but Thee, the Help in Peril, the Self-Subsisting.
5Of
". “f
. .. v ‘ V ~.y'w.' l
I . I~ . .
_ .4.
| v I I I I 1 ' . _'_..IO'J'O..."O‘O‘,O‘_I,I.O‘. o"‘.o.:.‘
Short Daily Obligatory Prayer in Arabic and English.
ABOVE is the original Arabic and its translation into English of one of the prayers revealed by Bahá’u’lláh and prescribed for fulfilment of the daily obligatory prayer. It is known as the Short Obligatory Prayer, and when used is recited once in twenty-four hours, at noon.
Following are translations of this prayer in 389 additional languages, dialects 0r scripts listed according to the continents to which those languages are indigenous. Included are some recent translations which are not reflected in the preceding statistical listing.
The usage and spelling chosen for primary listings, and indication of dialect relationships, follow, where possible, C. F. and F. M. Voegelin, Classification and Index of the World’s Languages. It is recognized by the compilers of this list that these designations, therefore, sometimes do not reflect the name by which a particular language or dialect is best known, or the designation preferred by those who speak it. Some variant names and spellings, including variants previously reported, appear in parentheses.
Exceptions to Voegelin & Voegelin’s usage have been made in a few cases: where the name of a language has been officially changed in the country in which it is spoken; where Voegelin & Voegelin’s primary listing is known to be considered pejorative by speakers of the language or dialect; and in a few other instances. Also, certain of the European dialects of Scandinavian and Netherlandic-German have been listed as separate languages, on the basis of their long separate histories as literary languages.
[Page 497]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Where identification in terms of this standard reference has not yet been completed, the nomenclature reported to the World Centre by the National Spiritual Assembly responsible for the accomplishment has been used, and such translations are indicated by a dagger. An asterisk denotes an improved translation made available for this volume in a language which has appeared in earlier volumes.
The major countries, islands or territories where the languages are spoken are shown in italics; where no such entry is given, the places where the language is spoken are so numerous and so widely scattered that to list them would be unwieldy: many of these languages are found worldwide.
Totals for each continent are: Africa, 129; the Americas, 89; Asia, 90; Australasia and the Pacific Islands, 31; Europe, 49; Invented languages, 2; Braille, 1. The total number of translations and transliterations is 391.
A. AFRICA
497
- Denotes revised translations.
ADANGME (Ghana)
00 Tsaatsa Mawu i yea he odase kaa 0 b3 mi kons ma le Mo n8 ma ja Mo. Pio hu i ngs he odase yee kaa i be he wami k0; Moji he wamitse, ohiafo ji mi se Mo Les niatss ji Mo Nge Ose o Mawu k0 be hu. Moji wa yemi ks bualo nge haomi mi n8 haa wo wami.
AFRIKAANS" (South A frica)
Ek getuig, O my God, dat U my geskape het 0m U te ken en U te aanbid. Ek betuig 0p hierdie oomblik my magteloosheid en U mag, my armoede en U rykdom.
Daar is geen ander God buiten U nie, die Hulp in Gevaar, die Self—Bestaande.
AKAN: Asante (Ashanti) dialect (Ghana)
0 me Nyame, medi adanses se Woabo me SE menhu W0 na mensom Wo. Medi adansee seesei se menni ahooden biara na Wo des Woye
1‘ Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
Otumfoo, medi hia buroburo na Woye odefoo. Onyame foforo biara nni ho ka W0 ho, ohaw mu Boafoo, Wo na wote W0 ho ne W’ase.
AKAN: Fante dialect (Ghana)
0, m’Ewuradze, midzi dase de 3wo abo me d8 munhu Wo na monsom Wo. Midzi dase sesei d8 mennyi ahoodzen biara na Dwodze Eye Otumfo, midzi hia neminemi na Dwo Eye odzefo.
Ewuradze, obiara nnyi ho k5 wo ho, ohaw mu Dboafo, Dwo a 3woara Etse W’ase.
AKAN: Twi (Akwapem) dialect (Ghana)
0 me Nyankopon. Midi Adanse 58 W0 na Woabo me 52 min hu Wo na mensom W0, Midi adanse wosaa don yi mu 55 me de memfra na wo na Wows tumi, meye ohiani na W0 na W0 ye Odefo.
O Nyame bi nni baabi 58 W0 nkutoo Kore Ahohia mu Boafo ne Onyame aonnan obi.
AMHARIC (AMARIGNA: AMARINYA) (Ethiopia)
M'Mh. um! m-H mama’q Mommy" u'm- 70.9. meh"; ?\m’nhd‘nl" h'H- pa nmmcm- mw-"i" 1.”. 92') thr’r'.‘ 5’74"} ?.?A'I-‘l-H’m wnhm-i-s‘ 31+“; 'Mm-m-ihdp‘lfllnu- u h'H‘ 0.0.9 1.". az-‘i- hw’r‘mr'law.‘ n-m mug" h9°"t-‘f¢ar twat: nn+4>c M 0.9%.}: mm
AWING (Cameroon Republic)
Mbi Nsi-meh pah-aneh tsunkene me ngeh ngonke—yeh.
Nji yanengeh mangleh nwu te meteneh, Nsih peh nchi ne metiem eh chemeh, mangleh
nfomeh, nsi peh mbeh tsu yi mbe chiki nfoh.
Nsi yi tsih Iangna yoh koh tchipo 1e tsoyoh mbo-oh kwalemeh mbo ngeh, mbo-oh wa me—meh.
[Page 498]
498
BAMBARA (Mali. Sé/zégal, Upper Volta)
Mbi shereya, E Alla, ka don ko e de ye nda k0 nki’don, ki’batu. N’tikéra’ka ka’don k0 se té ne ye. setiki de ye e ye. fén nté ne fé. fén tiki de ye 6 ye.
Alla wéré shi’té f0 ekelen, E min bé 56 ka mbgf) démén ka b6 géléyala, E min ma da fén fé.
BAMOUN (Cameroon Republic)
0 nyinyia me na kuot nta mi U ka puoma mi njiU mbe kfiepth. Nji na mi Upua’ Fossku mbe ffieke’t, mbuil mbflre 11 pe Fon yamyum.
Mo‘ Nyinyi ndi’ a li na vou, U pué nga yi ngamii til ngfie’, U pira’ Nkake.
BASSA (GBASA) (Liberia)
M NW Zése o NfGeo/é/péb kabé m ”7?, I73 bi ”7 £6 ”7 O/y/ dywb 3 ké bé I77 Ké m blé L1,”? Zaé L-Voosn bo kéém de’ NI, k/Jéé dyl' hwé l’It’Ué Q [(6 dé Ni kpe bédé bede’ mac 0/6 M93 dyé dyé mu 3 ké O(é Ni ba b5 /7/Mé.Gédep55 k3 k0 dc} Se n13 sé n3; dbbm m5) mbé Nygjr} gbo kpé Nyo o/é dt sée’n mua, ke’ m séagbo kind” Nyo‘ mo‘ k5,,
BATUA (LUTUA-BAMBOTE)1L (submitted from Zaire)
MAKUYIMBANGA WOBENTSHAMBE WAMI WANGUANGILA BUA MEME KUKUYIBA MA KUKUNEMEKELA MIYIBANGA DIOMBANTSHI. BUNTALADI BUAMI NGOLOSHABE, MUTANDA WAMI KUDIYI BUABE. KAKU TSHAMBE WIKA YELELE MULIOBE MUKUIDIDI WAMBANA MUENGU ULI OBENKE.
ici-BEMBA (WEMBA) (Zui're, Zambia)
Ndesininkisha, Mwe Lesa wandi, ukuti Nimwe Mwa nengele uku Mwishaba ku Mpuepa. Nde sumina, pa kashita aka, kulubulwa amaka yandi nakubukulu Bwenu, kubupabi bwandi naku bukankala Bwenu.
Takuli Lesa umbi kanofye Imwe, Kafwa mu Buchushi, Mwe Baikalila Mweka.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
BERBA (Benin)
N‘fare natwagam alahén liyorriptu adwosé banaars mma mantem’mafaa. Swamswam n'nyé n‘yagasi nem pwatam n'nwam a biga. Tuwo kpa be katawé. a we bégaw a pwase hirbe u nwan hira ntinwé hira n'fusu u hiiml BULU1L (BOULOU) Cameroon Republic)
(submitted from
Me ne nga a Zambe wom, na Onga té ma na yeme W0 a kafi fe W0. Ma mem éyofi ji na. Ngul jam éno momo ve enjoé nje éné. na me me azoé ve W0 One Kum; Zambe mfe anji b0 ve W0 étam, Nyf) a volé éyon ya njuk, Nyé a vee be emien.
BUSOONG(KUBA,BAKUBA,BUSHONG) (Zaire)
NANAYEPE NTSHIAMIEME, WAMPUANGIDI ADIOYO DIAYEPE A DIA TSHINI. NANAYEPE A ITENIKUYL BUOLO BUEME. BUKUOKOYO BUAWA, NTANA MUEME. A BUDIYI BUAWA. KUA NTSHIAMA YEKE A MUNA WENE. ANAMANA BAMUENGU. OLOKATUONO WENE MIETE.
CHIRIPON-LETE-ANUM (CHEREPONG. GUAN) (Ghana)
0! Me Onyankopon; megyi adanse 38 W0 abo me 58 me babe hu W0 ne me si Wo. Megyi adanse kaake mo 58 me mma ayule akoa ne wole W0 de ayule mmoodahws. Megyi ehia buburo ne woles W0 de sika mmoodahwe.
Onyankopan akoa bats ka W0 50. W0 ne W0 hu sne mmabo b0 sne amanehunu ts. W0 ne W0 sfs yi W0 yo so.
CIOKWE (CHOKWE) (Angola, Zaire)
Yami nguli chela Che, O Yihova, Zambi yami wangutangile mumu ngukuningike ni ngukuhalise. Ngunatawiza ha shimbu line, kulela chami ni tachije, ushwale wami ni upichi we. Kushi Zambi mukwongwe yene, Yoze wa kupulula atu mu lamba lia ufwe, ni Yoze uli ni mwono wa mutolo muIi iye mwene.
CREOLE, INDIAN OCEAN (Mauritius Island, Reunion, Seychelles)
Mo témoigné, Bon Dié, qui to fine creé moi pour conne toi et adore Ioi. M0 confessé maintenant mo impuissance divan to puissance et m0 pauvreté divan t0 richesse.
Na péna éne lote Bon Dié qui toi, celui qui aide dans danger et existé par 1i méme.
[Page 499]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
DAGBANI (DAGBANE) (Ghana, Togo)
Nti, ti Duma Nawuni yeda, kaman nyini n Nam ma, ni n mi Nawuni, ka dzemdi nuni Na titam lana. N ti yeda punpno, kaman Naa n kani n pahi nuni Na ti tam lana; nun tiri nira fara ni buni.
Sheli kam n kani n pahi la nuni Nawuni Nati tam lana; nuni yihiri mira fukunsi ni, kao nam saxinrla 0 k0.
DIOLA (JOLA) (Upper West Africa)
Fetan fet, aw Atty Jamet, mate aw tepan min emanji de pop ne kobe. Kabajati oum sembe ku fetanfet nyemi momay, de sambaye yourley yamakaye, kabajatiyoum waff de fu bajafoley famakafu.
Bajut Atty Jamet ake a wujumi aw, aranbay nawu de bu gall aw akum fangs.
DIOLA (JOLA): Fogny (Jéola Féofii) dialect (The Gambia, Guinea, Sénégal)
Fiitanfiit, Jamit I Mati aw u tuukaam man i manji, ni saafi. Tan emmi igje let waaf, aw u qoolenum wanoosan. ni magmaq mati inje asfikateen, aw u kaanum en’mbaan.
Bajut emit yaakeen leejaataw, apakenem di katékasak, aw awbom di fukéi.
DUALA (DOUALA) (Cameroon Republic)
Ne mbor'l, a loba lam na 0 weki mba o bia 0a na 0 sesa 03. Na dubg tatan bgbg 1am ngifiangg, tue lam mbwafi mgngg.
Loba dipgpg di titi buka t9 0a mgng m9 mongwanedi 0 ndutu nu nye na mgmgng.
EFIK: Ibibio dialect (Nigeria)
Ami medi ntiense O! Abasi mi, me ke Afo okobot mi, man ndiono Fi, nyun nkpono Fi. Ami metin iko ntiense kemi ndiwut unana odudu mi, ye odudu F0, nyun nwut nko ubuene mi ye inyene F0.
Abasi efen iduhe ke ebede Fi, Andinyana kini nanenyin, Akama idem ikpon.
EKOI: Ejagham dialect (Cameroon Republic, Nigeria)
Njimé ntiesé Atta Obasi, bré Wéh oturéme sé nding Wah na nyubé Wah.
Méh nwoh otti kah njgimé nyih, kah ogong ohomé na kah ikonm Effah, kah okpagk ohomé nah kah effonome Obah.
499
erh Obasi ettat Chang bréh Wéh, nyoh anyangané erkpe nah Nfonéh arringeh Bejih Ebéh.
EMBUNT (submitted from Zai're)
Mwenzem, me lengyuy: Nze oweng me ongir eyu, ongir eboyi, Lalé owu kapah, me ngy eyu obets onze, ngol anze, ompur ome, obwel onze.
Nze mur kabé fan, kadzé Nzem asa né N26, N26 okolume bar engots, Nze oye kabewang.
EWE* (Benin, Ghana, Togo)
Medi dase, O nye Mawu, be Ewom be manya WE) eye masubo wé. Mecli dase le yeyiyi sia me 1e nye ljusémanagu kple W6) gényenye rJuti, le nye hia kple wé kesinonuwo guti.
Mawua deke megali wu W6 0, erqeguto le Xaxame. Amesi le agbe le edokui si.
EWE: Gé (Mina) dialect (Benin, Togo)
Mougni dassé, 0 gné Mawu, Odom bé madjessigné eyé massomonyé. Mougnan Ouélébé kéa apé housin mado. Coudo apo hounsin dodo apé aya coudo opo tchikpokpo.
Noudékpé mougbadé ouwo, amé ké hona na améo be afocoumé amékélé édokesia.
EWE: Watyi (Ouatchi, Waci) dialect (Benin, Togo)
Me qu Qase, o Mawuyen, be ye qéwun né mé jesiye eye né mé sumoye. Le gayame a, me ya’m wunsenmadpyen ku wunsenQOQoo, ayayen kú dokuo. Mawu onpo me gba lei tévo neo, kcheamewuntito 1e Xaxame, Ame ke su edokoi 11 a.
PO (FON, DAHOMEEN) (Benin)
Ijeri n9 Mahu ché, d9 yéwé dami d0 gbémé b9 wa tu.
Mahu ché unt d6 té nou houé d6 houi wé sé mi d6 bé mé b6 ni na (16 tun houé b6 ma non sin houé. Unt d6 gbé gni nou troué wé d6 hon lonhon lon ché $6 nou dé a gna ché kpo do dokou mi ton kpo.
Nou dé bou so dé b0 hou houégna houi rné dé é non houin lin gbé gan b6 ka non sous sous hoyé nou mé houin dé sous non.
[Page 500]
500
FUL (FULA, FULANI, FULFULDE, PEUL, TOUCOULEUR) (Wes! Africa)
Mohal berde di labbinta ha dir berde an Allah an, a kesuna kala ku mi wadata dir herde an, wala wadowo b0 sai an m0 hisintammi. Der berde ma di labbinde a usatan k0 dume ha berde am, ya an m0 yidiyam hedi labbinde mangol ma, a holliyam gidol ma, de mi an on timitorde ku’a yidi. Defte warol ma di vonnatako waddi beldum ha dir berde an, an m0 timminta be be yokkowo do yukkol.
FUL: Torado dialect (Sénégal)
Mi sedi, Ala, a’tagi lang mi andu mi julane. Mijabi heh wasude dole ang de heh mountinare ma, heh wasude am heh kebal ma ang.
Wode Ala godo sina mada, walo wo fowu darani do hore mung. (O’do julde foti halade nyarol ma wo nyarolma.)
GA: Accra dialect (Ghana, Togo)
Miiye odase, Oo mi—Nyorjma, aka Obo mi ni male Bo ni madza O. Miyeo he odase gmsletswaa 1188. Miiye migbodzomo 15 k8 Ohewals 18. mihia k5 Oninamo 18 he odase.
Nyorjmo kroko k0 be 0588 Dza Bo. Bualo ye fimo beiag ks m3 ni ye ha La-dizntse ehe.
GAMBAI (Chad)
Ei Allah lem, mam’too jee naige tarée, I ya ram kam geri lem mba kam mosso kul noin’g lem. Mayan missi noin’g basiné, ma m’to nje rem I too jé singa mon’g, ma m’to njé ndoo I too njé né kinga. Allah I ya ge kari ba, Iya too jé la ge dojé 10 g toobel g I ya too deou doroi.
(NGAMBAI, NGAMBAYE)
olu-GANDA (LUGANDA) (Uganda)
Nina obujjulizi, Ai Katonda wange, nti wantonda okukumanya n’okukusinza. Nkakkasa mu kiseera kino obutesobola bwange, n’olwobuyinza bwo, mu bwaavu bwange, 116 mu bugagga bwo.
Tewali Katonda muIala okugyako, Ggwe, Omuyambi mu kabi, Eyemalirira.
THEBAI—IA’IWORLD
GBAYA (BAYA) (Central African Empire, Cameroon Republic, Congo)
Mi ne sadako, i Sf) ko’m, Me dée am ha’m me ding—Me in me gasi Me. Mi t0 kinii gaa ko’m in ngai ko—Me, talaka ko’m in pkamo k0~Me.
Ma 86 bona, Kaa me Me, Wan ne gbak mo, sai fio, Wan ne duk ne Ie—A ne te—A.
GOUNT (Benin)
Yin wé yi kpajjlé, oklu non ton, dé da na d9 yon in b9 na d9 sin4 Yin wlé t9 wénin nou d6 ma d6 gan tché kpg houhlon t9 we kpg wa mon non gni gni tché p9 adé koun t9 wé kpg.
Yé d6 ka non wé gni ji wé yé wé, yé mé non dé mé son ahou fiéssa mé, yé dé k9 gni nou da hg na dé wé.
GURMA (GOURMA, GOURMANTCHE) (Togolese translation)
N’tié Sééda O ntiénou, kaata gume, Ke min banda Ke ya déna—m’band molané m’bame yén ayabam, N’tan larem yén aya piam. Fum bare n’ba yaka tién Kiyé Kébé guna tipo ti tuo mbire. Wan yé bin loucoul.
GURMA (GOURMA, GOURMANTCHE) (Upper Volta translation)
11 tie siedi, 00 n tienu, k’a tagin ni ke min band’a, gi g0 ya jand’a
n tuo moala moala ne ke n bani ke n tadi gaa pia paalu, gi g0 tuo ke n bani k’a pia upaalu, gi go tuo ke II Inc, k’a pia
Tien t0 gii ye kaa tie fin bebe yua n fa bidi gi nyandi fala ciamun ni.
yua n fidii ye 0 yuli p0.
HAUSA (Nigerian dialect)1L (Chad, Niger, Nigeria)
Na shaida, Ya Allah na cewa ka halicce ne domin in yi maka sujada. Ina furci a wannan lokacin cewa ni mara iko ne ta wajen ikon ka domin patara ta ta wurin yalwarka. Babu wani Allah sai kai domin ka yi taimako cikin wahala. Kai da kake mai riko.
HERERO (Namibia/South West Afi'ica)
Ami meri hatoi Jehova kutja ove uendji utira odu kutjiua noku ku kumbira. Ami moruveze nekui meyeta okuhinomasa kuandje
[Page 501]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
momasa uoye, ousyona uandje momautumbe uoye.
Kapena Mukuru uarue pendje naove omuvatere uo momauzeu nomurikuramene.
HéAT (Botswana)
M5 CE. ”Jim §i Ile‘imu bit. '11 E'éé “El mfi n |né ma CT ‘1‘: Ti ké n Iné Si Eé‘S-Hj ‘fi. Mz‘l qhziTcé. ki Ihé‘e ha k‘I. ki ‘i1m§i kT— |gb‘oa k‘l ‘ixu-‘éi ké TI §I‘ kTillié. ki ‘ilm §T ki- lgb‘ou ki |lki1‘aqék'é’fi EikT-jfm.
Y2: |gb‘oa lle‘ima 0km ha yil n |h66 hi
- 5 ‘a. Ki-[nui OX‘bE. M ki Hie
HUA (!XO)T (Botswana)
N| e Ku—ie, ma H’ha ka ngqon |i te: |nga [ldi [nga i- |ga. Ma ||’ha cen kona ||‘a: te: Inga ih H‘ha ka kona |i te: Inga, m [l’hé cen |a t’hani |ui te: [nga ih H’ha ka [a t’hani H’ali te: |nga.
Ku-ie te’e r_1||’a ka |e !‘an ti, ah’a: kam |gubi uhis, ah’a: !ngoa ka tam.
IGBO (1B0, IGHO) (Nigeria)
A bum onye aka-ebe, O Chinekem na ikerem kam mara Gi n’etokwa Gi. E kwuputawo kwe m, n’oge di ugbua, adighi ike m ma Gi Onwe Gi di ike; A di m 0gbeye ma Gi Onwe Gi bara uba Odighi Chineke 929 ma ewezuga Gi. Onye iye aka na mgbe nmekpa aru, Onye Nwe Onwe ya.
KABA (SARA KABA) (Central African Empire, Chad)
Alama! Ma mi-gi ta kundoy ma, ta ki gi m-ai, ta koso ma kur kajama nui. Ta yo ton, m-ob han ma ma te togon ngé, bi I a te togon b0, ma ma te ndon, bi I a te nan ndeyn.
Ala nge kumboi ndete. I ha i nge kajadé, I ha i nge ngom roi te njoi.
KANURI (Chad, Niger, Nigeria)
Wuye shadang¢na, Ya Ala. nyiga not¢ga aban¢ga garo wuga alakkamro. Wuye sa allan tabatk¢sk¢na nem duno banyiga duno n¢mgaro n¢m denyiga n¢m qwowa n¢m garo.
Nyilan nguron Ala gade ba, banama yim banna‘be, kend¢ga k¢la n¢mbelan kargam.
501
KASEM (KASSEME, KASENA, KASSENA) (Ghana, Upper Volta)
A yi kashetu, 0 21 k0 we, ni mu mu yi teru, mun kia a mu. si a ta she m0.
Lele kun to a ye a bwane, mu yi dan mama tu an yi yiniga (11, mi yi 1300 mama tu.
We di don da tera. ko na da mu, we din dijon tim. we dim di kati wure tim.
e-KELE (LOKELE) (Zaire)
O Mungu wami, isoene mbo okelimi eoka iluweke 1a iinelek’Ae. Iswimela nda eye mbileye bowandu wami la bofoka w’Ae; iuw’ami la lifoka liag.
Angosns Mungu wasi sakoloko A8, oyo atosungaka nda mbile ya tale, oyo ayali laya laya.
KIKUYU (GIKUYU) (Kenya)
Ndi muira Ngai ati niwanyumbire niguo ngumenye na ngugocage wee Mwathani Ngai. Ninjui kahinda-ini gaka ni wa unini wakwa hari Wee na uthini wakwa ni undu wa utonga waku.
Gutiri Ngai ungi thengia Niwe hari uteithio waku mathina-ini na Uhoti Waku.
KIMPIN (KIPINDI)T (Zaire)
Kierek, é Nzém ami, N26 16 mandoen umuin mukukuyebanga ti mukukufukiminanga. Tan alié, ekis bumol ba mi ti bungol ba Nze, busui ba mi ti bunvam ba Nze. Kukitene, lo kufuyini ti Nzém ambén, kaka Nze mbwes Nzém, u useresa band mu bigonz, u uzing a mumpil e nzién mbwes.
KONGO (KIKONGO): ki-Tuba (Kituba) dialect (Angola, Congo Republic, Zai're)
Ngienina mbangi, o Nzambi ame, vo wanvanga mu kuzaya ye mu kufukamena. Yisungamena mu ntangu yayi kiwayi kiame ye kimfumu kiaku, ki sukami kiame ye kimvuama kiaku.
Ngeye mosi kaka i Nzambi, Ngeye wusadisanga muna sumbula, Ngeye wuzinganga muna Ngeye masi.
KONGO: Kimanianga dialectT (Zai're)
Ntele kimbangi, é Nzambi ami, i Ngeye wa mvanga mpasi v0 yakuzaya ye kuzitisanga mpe. Ye buabu, ngieti zaya vo lebakana kuami i lulendo luaku, bumputu buami i kimvuama kiaku.
[Page 502]
502
Kakuena Nzambi ya nkaka ko, ye mu ntangu a mpasi Ngeye wusadisanga, kadi Ngeye wena mu Ngeye kibeni.
KONGO: ki-Ntaandu (Kintandu) dialect (Zaire) O Nzambi ame, ngina mbangi bonso
unganga mu kuzaya ye mu kuzitisa. Yi kuzeyi bungangi mu ngolo zaku ye bumolo bumunu, mu kimvuama kiaku ye kimputu kiamu. Ga nkatu Mfumu nkaka bonso Ngeye, Yu ukunkatula mu kigonsa, Mfumu yani mosi ukiganga.
KONGO: ki-Zombo (Angola, Zai're)
(Kizombo) dialect
E Nzambi ‘ama, nsidi ‘e kimbangi vo Ngeye wa mpanga mukuzaya ye kukunda. Ewau ntambuluidi ‘e nbovok ‘ama ye ngolo zaku, kimputu kiama ye kimvuama kiaku.
Kavena Nzambi ‘e nkaka ko v0 ka Ngeye k0, Ona unanga usadisi muna sumbula, Ona unanga muna Yani kibeni.
KPELLE (Guinea, Liberia)
Ija I maa seri faa kg. 0 13a Falai, a gas ya gbsté na kolor] r151 I fsli. Ija faa ma kpono ni 13a fii kpse su da I wala laa da kolo laa da I too laai, Fala da kponi fe na fee no yé tone, I kpon maai kukula msni kpulu su, I katsi I kpin kponéi,
KRIO (West Africa)
God, ah know say you make me for know you, en pray to you. Ah day tell you new wit all me heart say ah can’t do nattin without you becoss you power pass all, en nar you han all tin day. Nor order God nor day pass you: nar you day ep way trouble can en day keep life together.
KUSAL (KUSAAL) (Ghana, Upper Volta)
Mam nil] Fu kaseta, O mam Winam, ye Fu mal mam ye mbani Fu ka dol-Ii Fu. Mam nil) yada nanna 1’18 mam na bu mot pana n8 Fu I18 mot pan; nsmam n8 mot non r18 Fu n8 mot naam.
Winam ksi gar) Fu; Fu son it kys beene; Fu pan kysi beene.
KWAKUM Republic)
(BAKOUM) (Cameroon
Ndji mo chenle o Chambofi wémbé, gwé chi mé kwé mbé, n’na mben chenIo. Nyi nko tchimio nyi nkéche tching noné, nyi mbék ne
THE BAHA‘I WORLD
koul ne koul m6 Gwo, ne louko m6 gwémbo, ne ikoum mo Gwé.
Ché feté ne Chambofi fokou chimio, M6 kamlché 0 bécho, M6 ndénch nyoutché djé tchitché.
OCi-KWANYAMA (KUANJAMA, KUANYAMA) (Angola, Namibia/South West Africa)
Ondi sisi, Kalunga kange, no ku tia ove ua sitange ndi ku sive, ndi ku Iinjongamene. Oha ndi, hokoloIa, pe fimbo eli, mo ku hena enono kuange ndelene mo Iu enono Doje, moluhepo Iange no mo luo upuna Uoje.
Kapena nande Okalunga va mue ndelene Ove, Omukuafi, uopoupatekedi, Ou mu Ove Muene.
IKW11L (Botswana)
Tse x0 sa khe khoa [I ha, ”Kama kha khi di be, kha tsae qxo khe a ts’ao ta tsa a kha, ta tsa tsaoama kha. Khe khoa dikum nlngi [kam, khi kha tsaa sa tsa kha khedi 36 he, khi kha |xo m xa tas kha khobe 56 he.
”Kama hka [kL’l be ha be tsa |kwi‘e, xwe kxam tsa se‘ua, qx’oe kha tsa |kwidi s kha.
LOGO (LOGOTI) (Sudan, Zai're)
O Djuka, miba ta ma ami nizo mpe amiakumbamelizo. Andro konidi, mali mivo amitada ma ngufwa yo, ami ngufu lavu lavu ama tiza mpe ami mosoro.
Djuka azia yo paka mi, api mondia alunguli ta mabi a, api adrile ise.
LOSENGO: Mangala dialect
(Zaire)
Nazali nzeneneke, o Nzambe wa ngai, ’ta okeli ngai mp0 nayeba Yo mpe natondo Yo; nakondima bebe na bolembo bwa ngai mpe bokasi bwa Y0, na bobola bwa ngai mpe bokumi bwa Yo.
Nzambe mosusu lokola Yo azaIi te, ozali oyo akosalisa otango ya mpasi, oyo akotikala se Ye moko.
(Lingala)
si-LOZI (Zambia)
Kina paki mulena mulimu waka. uni bupezi kuli ni kuzibe hape ni ku lapele. Na lumela ka nako ye kuli niya fokola wena ki wena ya mata, na mi shebile we na ufumile. Akuma mulimu usili kwanda ahao, kiwena mutusi mwamanyando aluna, upila katato yahao.
[Page 503]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ki-LUBA-KATANGA (KILUBA) (Zaire)
Nakwabija, 6 Leza wani, wampangile mwanda wa kukuyuka ne kukutota. Pa kifuko kino, nfisama kyakanwa kyami, kukulombola bunkomo-nkomo bobe, kulandapala kwami, ne buipeta bobe.
I Kutupu Leza mukwabo enka abe, witabanga mu bya malwa, kudi yewa ukulupie mudi aye mwine.
LUBA-LULUA (TSHILUBA, CILUBA) (Zaire)
Ndi njadika, Wewe Mvidi-Mukulu wanyi, ne wakamfuta bua kukumanya ne bua kukutendelela. Ndi njadika mu tshitupa tshihi emu, bufuba buanyi ne bukole Buebe, bupele buanyi ne bubanji Buebe.
Kakuena Muidi-Mukulu mukuabo bu Wewe, M-Muambuluishi wa mu Dikenga, Nyeye udi wikalaku anu Yeye—Nkayende.
ci-LUNDA (Angola, Zaire, Zambia)
Eyi Nzambi yami, eyi inkeni wanker‘leli kulonda nikiwluki kulonda nikulombeleli. Nacheseki, hampinji yinu, ha kubula inovu jami, mukulema kweyi muwuzweni wami muku heta kweyi.
Kosi Nzambi ji Kwawu ja chefiiku china eyi hohu. Eyi inkwashi inhembi wayuma yejima.
ci—LUNDA: Ndembo dialect (Zaire)
Nidi kanbaji keyi O Nzambi yami, netu yeyi wanlefieli mulofia wakukwiluka ni kuku hameka. Nashimuni chalala lelu dinu kuzeya kwami ni fiovu jeyi, uzwer‘li wami ni kfiheta kweyi.
Kosi Nzambi mukwau china yeyi hohu, ona wakulafia mu malwa, ona wahaya nyaka kudi eyi aweni.
LUO (Kenya, Tanzania)
An Janeno Nyasacha ni ichweya mondo ang’eyi kendo apaki. Awacho sani kuom nyawona kendo kuom ekoni kuom dhier na kendo kuo mmwanduni. Onge Nyasaye machielo ngang’ mak mana in, Jakony e ndalo mag chandruok, Nyasaye manyalo duto.
ki-LUUWA (KILUWA) (Zaire)
Nakumbula ha mesu matshu akhima eni ayi Nzambi wonguhangidi mu sambu die kukwizika ni kukufukimina. Kikitsudi eki, nezika
503
eni ami nidiku ni ngolu, Ayi Nzambi Pungu, ami nidi musuyi, Ayi mvwama.
Nzambi Pungu mweka kadiku, Ayi wokutsusadisanga mu yigonsa, Ayi Fumu wodifuka.
LWO (Uganda)
Ai Lubanga, aye ni ln icweya me ngeno In ki me were In. Anyutu kombedi ni tekona pe ento diti tye, ni an lacan In lalonyo.
Pe tye dok Lubanga mukene kono In, Lakony ican, dok Ikwo giri keni.
ci-MAKONDE (SHIMAKONDE) (Mozambique, Tanzania)
Ninkukupa utestamunya, wako Nnungu wangu, kuchi doni Wako uningumba nangu mwaha nikumanya na nikujugwe. Ninkulyaula, mu yola ai Kupola kwangu na dimongo dyako, umachikini wangu na utajuli Wako.
Pachanya Pakoapali Nnungu unji, Wakupochela mu chijoidyo, ulikuluysila wako.
i-MAKUA (MAKHUWA)T (Mozambique, Malawi)
Kinniwerelani namona, Kho Mulukwaka, wera wi Nyuwo Mokipatusha wi miyo Nyuwo Kosuweleni ni wokokhorani Kinnilapa mwa chuhu yela ethu yohiwereya mene ikuru sanyu, muthonyero aka ni muhakhwanya.
Khavovo Muluku Mukina opwaha Ny'uwo, okikhunela mu sawopiha yowo onikhala Mwa yowo Mekhaiye.
MALAGASY (Malagasy Republic)
Toviko, Andriamanitro 6, fa Ianao no namorona ahy, mba hahaléla Anao sy ho tia Anao. Tsaroako amin’ izao fotoana izao ny fahalemeko miolotra amin’ny herinao, sy ny fahantrako manoloana ny harenao. Tsy misy Andriamanitra afa—tsy Ianao, dia Ilay miaro amin’ny loza, Ilay misy tokoa amin’ny mahaAndriamanitra Azy.
MANDINKA (MANDINGO) (Upper West Africa)
N’sedeya, n’mari k0 I’ye n’da 16 kc I’Iong aning ka I’batu.
N’sonta n’na sembeng tang ya la aning 1’“: la bungba ya, N’fua re ya anina I’la bana ya. Ala koteng mang soto f0 I’te, I’dembari Ia, I’meng ye I‘fang tarandi.
[Page 504]
504
MASA Republic)
(MASSA) (Chad,
Cameroon
Nan wi touanou nan sama souloukna Launa vanou nang la nou, 5 nan wangou grivangou.
Wili ni: nan wala toutga vanou ti denota vangou, haouta vanou nan tia tangou.
Lau mara meidi kouta kan nangou samara ma soua meidi.
MASABA: ulu-Bukusu (Lubukusu) dialect (Kenya, Uganda)
Esendi ne bung’ali, O, Wele wase, sikila Ewe wanonga khumanye ne khu khusikamila Ewe. Nga ndola luno luri, khu mani kase kamakekhe khu bunyali Bwowo, khu butambi bwase, khu buhinda Bwowo.
Saliho Wele okundi nokhali Ewe, Omuyeti mubutinyu, Oliyo yeng’ene.
MASHI (Zaire, Zambia)
Neci Yagirwa Nnamahanga, manyirire oku wandemire mpu nkumanye na nkuharamye. Bunola nyemire obuzamba bwani n’Obuhashe bwawe, obukenyi bwani n’Obugale bwawe. Wéne Nnamahanga nta wundi, we burhabale omu mbaka, we Nnamubaho.
ki—MBUNDU (KIMBUNDU)T (Angola)
Ngabana umbangi uami u Nzambi iami, mukonda eié ua ngi bange pala ku kuijia ni kukubeza.
Ngadifisala mu kitangana kiki 0 kubuila kuami ne kutena kué, uadiama uami ni unvuama ué. Kanaku Nzambi iengi kikale Eie ngé, u Mubuludi bu i bidi, u Lenda-dié lenda.
MENDE: Kpa dialect (Liberia, Sierra Leone)
Selimo lo a nge. O nya Yewoi ks Bia mia Bi nya gbateni koo ngi Bi goo ngi yaa a has Bi ma. Nyaa gayema kiahuna, ks kpaya gbi ii nya ws, k8 leke Bia kpaya Maha Wai a Bie; nya veelingae, ks leke Bia Kpatai gbi i Bi yeya.
Ngewo weka gbi ii na aa wie kia Bi na.
Bia mia Ba gbo mu ma kpunde gbi hu. Bia yakpe mia Ndavui i Bi hu kunafo va.
MORE (MOSSI) (Ghana, Togo, Upper Volta)
Mam yaa kaset soaba, O mam Wénnam, ti yémb néana ma ti m bfinge la waoge Yémba.
Mam wilga Yfimba mam pfin-komsem morsé, la Yamb pénga; mam naéngo la Yémb aezegse.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Wénnam ato ka lebé n bee, kal Yémb bala, Yémb yaa asoaba ninga sAn féngda sé 11 data féngere, Yémb yaa asoaba ninga 56 n bee né a meng pénga.
NAMA: Damara dialect (Namibia/South West Africa)
TI TA GE RA iGOM IKHUB !NA, T51 ”13 A GURU AO !KAI SA ”1 BA TA NI iAN TSI IGORE II SE. TI iKAWU-SA SIB TSI “IB IGAIB, TI IGASA SIB TSI “1B !KHUSUB, !KHU I XARE I HA TAMA HA [|IB OSE, HUIB TSU IGAB DIB, TSI iOBAN HOAN INA.
oru-NDANDI (KINANDE) (Zaire)
Indi kyimisho, O Nyamuhanga waghe Ngoko wanyihangika okwikuminya n’okwikwanza n’olwanzo lunene Ngaminya okondambi’eno ovolo vwaghe n’ovutoki vwaghe Ovusama vwaghe n’ovungi vwaghu.
Sihali wundi Nyamuhanga oyuti’iwe Oyukasavula omonavi, oyuliho okwiye musa.
isi-NDEBELE (SINDEBELE) (ZimbabweRhodesia)
Ngiyafakasa, O Nkulunkuly wami, ukuthi wangidala ukuthi ngikwazi, njalo ngikukhonze. Ngiyufakaza kathesinje, ngingelamandla kuwe OMkhulu, ebumpofini bami lekunothemi kwakho.
Akakho omunye UNkulunkulu ngaphandle kwakho. UnguMgcini eziNgozini Ungo Ncedayo.
ci-NDONDE (KIMAWANDA, KONDE)T (Tanzania)
Nilikumanya, wako Nungu wangu, doni undingumba nikumanye nikupambedye Wako. Niku-kumanyia kwa wakati hau, kudidimanga kwangu na chakulula Chako, na umasikini wangu na uhumu Wako.
Apali Nungu junji ni Wako, Wakupwazela Mu-mauvilo Muwikala Umwene wa uti.
oci-NDONGA (AMBO, OCHINDONGA) (Namibia /South West A frica)
Gena okutumbulwa lumwe mootundi Omilongo mbali na ne, Omutenya.
Ongame otandi hempulula Kalunga Kandje, kutya ongoye wa shiti ndje ndi ku tseye ngame ndi ku longele nokukugalikana. Otandi hem pulula mpaka uunjengwi wandje moonkondo
[Page 505]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
dhoye noluhepo Iwandje mUuyamba woye. Kakuna Kalunga gulwe ponto yoye, Ongoy Omukwathi mUudhigu, Ongoye Omuyapuki.
NGUNI: isi-Swati (SiSwati, Swazi) dialect (Swaziland, South Africa)
Ngiyafakaza, Maye Nkulunkulu Wami, kutsi ungidalele kwekuba ngikwati ngikukhonte. Ngiyafakaza, manje, kutsi anginawo emandla
Wena unemandla lesabekako, ngimphofu Wena ucebile. Akekho lomunye Nkulunkulu nguWe
kuphela, uMsiti etiNgotini, Wena IotiPhilela ngeKwakho.
NGUNI: isi-Xhosa (!Xhosa, Kaffir) dialect (Botswana, Transkei, South A frica)
Ndiyangqina O Thixo wan ukuba undidalele ukuba ndikwazi ndikunqule. Ngako oko ndiyangqinisisa ngalo eli thuba ngokungabinamandla kwam, nobungangamsha Bakho, ngobuglwenpu barn, nangobutyebi Bakho. Akukho Thixo ngaphandle kwakho Oluncedo emngciphekweni Ozimele ngokukokwakhe.
NGUNI: Zulu dialect (South Africa)
Ngi yafakaza, Nkulunkulu wami ukuthi ungidalele ukuba ngi kwazi nokuba ngi Ku konze. Ngi ya qinisa, kulo mzuzu, ukuthi angi namandla wena u namandla onke, nokuthi ngimpofu mina u cebilc Wena.
Amukho omnye u Nkulunkulu ngaphandle Kwakho, U wu Msizi e ngozini, U zimele ngo Kwakho.
eke-NYAKYUSA: Ngonde (Konde) dialect (Malawi, Tanzania)
Nguyagha nketi wako, E! Kyala wangu, ukuti walimbelile une ukuti ngumanye, nukukwiputa yuyuwe. Ngwitikisya akabililo aka, nensita maka, kangi Mmaka ghako amakulumba, mbutolwe bwangu na mbukabi Bwako.
Akayako Kyala uyungi loli yuyuwe popapo, We ntuli mbutolwe, Uliko kubumi wi Mwene.
505 ki-NYAMWESI (NYAMWEZI) (Tanzania)
Ndisanizya, Guku Mulungu wane ati wambumba kigele nkumanye na kukwisenga B’eb’e. Ndizumilizya, henaha ku vugayiwa nguzu kwane na kuvusondo wako, kubapina wane na kuvusavi wako.
Kuduhu Mulungu ungi sumbwa B’eb’e wakisa mumaluduko na wa kuhola kuhanya.
NYANG (KENYANG) (Cameroon Republic)
Ntei ntisé o ta Mandem, be me kewoke W6, ndu bering§ W0 ne besepti W0, ntei ntisé tete ne, ndu bepab ebah ne betang Ebe, bdu nchep eya ne kefor Eke, Mandem achek apu ane acha Wo, Mpeme ndu esongeri ane atei chi ndu metyi.
ci—NYANJA (CHINYANJA) (Malawi, Zambia)
Ndicitila umboni, O Ambuye, Mulungu wanga, kuti munandilenga kuziwa Inu ndi kukondani Inu. Ndibvomela panthawi ino kulefuka kwanga ndi kukula kwa mphamvu zanu, kusauka kwanga ndi kulemela kwanu.
Kulibenso Mulungu wina koma Inu nokha Muchinjilizi, Mwini zonse.
ci-NYANJA: ci-Cewa (Chichewa) dialect (Malawi, Zambia)
Ndicitira umboni, O! Mulungu wanga, kuti munandirenga ine kuti ndikudziweni ndi kukupembedzani. Nditsimikiza pa nthawi ino, kufooka kwanga ndi kukula kwa mphamvu Zanu, kusauka kwanga ndi kulemera Kwanu
Palibe Mulungu wina koma Inu nokha, Wothandiza pa tsoka, Wodzithandiza Nokha.
oru-NYORO (Uganda)
(RUNYORO-RUTORO)
Nimpayo obukaiso, Ai Ruhanga wange, ngu niwe wampangire nkuramye kandi nkumanye, nindanga omukasumi kanu, mu bugara bwange kandi mu buguuda bwawe.
Busaho Ruhanga ondi, Kwihaho iwe wenka, Omukonyezi omukabi, Anyakwomeera.
[Page 506]
506
THE Bahá’í WORLD
OROMIGNA (GALLA, GALLIGNA, GALLINYA) (Ethiopia, Kenya)
?‘l'fl'h hinnJLh'J. hh’MAMJ. n‘hmwh. Hm ‘.")m-mm n
?r‘.’ h'r-l: M. flkfl-I'MI M: th" Hm. MI‘LV-zmhzhhMumhm. 'I’Hl'"! n
M: w. (JL‘I h"? 'H.'.'Hifi 'Infiifl' M/HM :mmlm" M")? ?dfl.&< Mn?“ 'I'HIJI u
PHIKAHNI’F (submitted from Mozambique)
Ndzi maha a fakazi, oh Xikuembu xa mina. Lefiuaku hambi |e§ui u ndzi Wumbeke aku ku tiva ni kuku khizamela. Ndzi maha fakazi hi xikhati xai §uo§ui. Agomeni la mina, mintanwini ya Wena. Aussiwanini la mina awumpfundzini la wena.
Akuna Xikuembu xinwana handlhe ka wena mumpfuni wa tinkarhato ni nwinhi Wamintamu.
RIFF (TARIFIT) (Algeria, Morocco)
_/ 9 / . , v; / ' /2 :195’ ”‘5 “LJ‘U/. L/"a-'Prov“; ‘5 o '-/ n59 } r / v , a ,v a ’2 ./ i:""~ “ ‘1”;9 7,1,2;
shi-RONGA (SHIRONGA) (Mozambique, South Africa)
Ni hamba bumboni Oh! Sikwembu §anga. Leéaku nambi le§i uni bumbiki akuku tiba niku ku nkhinsamela, ni yentéa bumboni hi nkama wa §o§i agomeni danga ami ntanwini yaku, abusiwanini bya nga abu pfundini byaku.
Akuna Sikwembu §imbe handle kwaku, mupfuni wa ntikarato nwinyi wa mintamu.
RUANDA (KINYARWANDA, RUN YARWANDA) (Rwanda)
Ndemera Mungu wanjye, ko wandemeye kukumenya no kugusenga. Muli aka kanya, nemeye amagara make yanjye n’ubushobozi Bwawe, ubukene bwanjye n’ubukungu Bwawe. Ntayind’lmana ibaho itali wowe, Umufasha mu byago, Ubaho kubwe wenyine.
[Page 507]
BAHA'I’ BIBLIOGRAPHY
iki-RUNDI (KIRUNDI) (Burundi)
Ndi icabone, 0 Mana yanje, k0 Wandemye ngo nkumenye kandi ngo nkusenge. Ndemeje murak’ akanya ubuto bwanje n’ubushobozi bwawe, ubworo bwanje n’itunga ryawe.
Ntayind’lmana iriho atari Wewe, Utabara mungorane, Uwibeshejeho.
SANGO (SANGHO) (Central Empire, Chad, Congo Republic)
A frican
Mbi yéké témoin, O Nzapa ti mbi, biani Mo sala mbi, si mbi Iingbi ti hinga Mo, ti vuro Mo, mbi fa sioni ti mbi na ngoi’ so na gbélé Mo, passi ti mbi na ndoyé ti Mo.
Mbéni Nzapa ndé ayéké pépé, gui Mo oko Mo Jo ti bata ajo na ya ti ngangou, Mo yéké lakoué lakoué.
SARA: Sara-Majingai (Madingaye) dialect (Central African Empire, Chad)
M’Guergo Nuba yam, kade oubum, m’Gueri o, m’ndoi 0. M’Guer rokum, ngolan’to Togum goto, yi Tog yai', Rondo yam ke yén kinga yai'.
Nuba ke rang ke toi' goto, ngue kordje kem yam ke madjalgue te, ngue tog.
SARA: Sara Ngama dialect (Central African Empire, Chad)
Me guer go Allah yam, Kad yi rém Kad m’guério m’doi o. M’guer go rotam, tam ri wa
507
togoum goto ngang Yai o, ndé yam o i yan kingué Yai.
Allah krang ki toi goto, Yi ngué korjiko kem yah ki madjal guetio, Yi kba tel roi yi Allah.
SHONA (Mozambique, Zimbab we-Rhodesia)
Ndinopupura, O Mwari wangu, kuti makandisika kuti ndimuzivei nokukunamatai. Ndine umboo panguva ino, mukushaya simba kwangu nesimba Renyu, kuurombo hwangu nekuupfumi Hwenyu.
Hakuna mumwe Mwari kunze Kwenyu Muhatsiri mumatambudziko, Uyo asingade rubatsiro.
SHONA: Kalanga dialectT (Botswana, Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)
Ndo pa malebeswa, mu Ndizmu, kuti makandi eta kuti ndi mu zibe ne ku Mu shingila. Ndo tendeka mu tjibaka i tjetji, kuti shaya masimba kwangu ne simba Lenyu, Bushayi gwangu ne fumwa Yenyu. A kuna mwe Ndzimu kuzhe Kwenyu. thidzi mu magwadzi, ntjili muli Moga.
SHUA (SHUAKHWE) (Botswana)
Tse hu 56 re 0 ké ta k6, ti Téra to, tsa ta ‘a se nya aha, ti tsa ‘a ‘51 na tsa ‘a hyaé ma tia. Ta ke é lkam a n H’éu, ta ci 0 |hoa tsa kéri [hoa ta ye 0 |hoa tsa ll’ai |hoa.
Téra ka nyze h :5 tsém se, Th6 ke hu ‘a kwéra kwe, |kfii se hk’bé kwe.
SIDAMO(SIDAM1GNA, SIDAMINYA) (Ethiopia)
"71".“! 111: 11.127“? 4.7.2.4“?- 191. il’ltf’fl'hu-Zé.
"74‘16?" :1
hi; AF. mfAé-"Z’P m.fi-L‘ "I 'L‘ 5"? hi PAt‘L’lL'Y‘u' h'l'
Wit"? 3 hi. "1&1:me
id: 8.6"? h'm‘l" u
M.- M 5": MM-Y- M‘w-z‘.‘ "mm 2M “‘L'Jt [an Pm
”7-7 7. 83’ n
[Page 508]
508
SOMALI Ethiopia)
(Sonmlia, Djibouti, Kenya,
Waxaan marag ka ahay, Eebbow, inaad ii abuurtay aqoonsigaaga iyo caabudidaada. Waxaan hadderba marag ka ahay tabardarridayda iyo karitaankaaga, cayrnimadayda iyo hodanimadaada.
Eebbow, Ilaah kale majiro adiga mooyee, dhibkabixiye, weligijire.
1u-SONGE(KISONGE) (Zai're)
Nankumina shi, Obe Yaya Efile Mukulu ngi bampangile bua kukuiuka na kukuuma. Kano kapindji nambuela bobofule buande na bukome buobe, bulanda buande na bulolo buobe.
Takui mungi Efile bu Obe ni nya, anka Obe apasana ku masaku, Obe namene shi mukitshibue na mungi.
SONGHAI: Zarma (Djerma) dialect (Niger, Nigeria)
Ai' Koy-Béro! Ai' ga sai’da ni nai‘ taka ai' mi ni bay—sé, a'i mi ni bérey di mo.
Ai' tabatandi ai‘ hinabana-ga dini gabo-ga, ai‘ tabatandi-mo ai' djang-a dini dura-ga.
Koy-si kan nin daru, nin kan tchi faba-ko, nin kan nini bon taka.
SOTHO, NORTHERN (se—PEDI) (South Africa)
Xore e rapelwe xa tee ka moraxo za masome a mabedi le mentso e mene ya di Iri, Xoba mosexare o moxolo.
Ke nea bohlatse, O Modimo waka, xobane O mpopile xore ke xo tsebe, Ke xo 0 khunamele. Ke ineela mo nakong e, bofokodi byaka maatleng a Xaxo, bohumanexing byaka Khumong ya Xaxo. Xaxo Modimo e mong xa e se Wena. Mothusi melekong, Wena E o tiileng.
SOTHO, SOUTHERN (se-SOTHO, SESOTHO) (Lesotho, South Africa)
Ke paki, U Molimo 0a ka, Uena U mpopetseng hore ke be 1e tseho ea Hau, ’me ke U khumamele.
Kea itlhatlhoba, motsotsong ona, ho hlokeng matla hoaka ho Ea matla ’ohle, bofumeng ba ka ho ea ruileng tsohle.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Ha ho Molimo 0 mong hape haese Uena, Mothusi litlokotsing, Ea iphelisang—kaBoeena.
ki-SUKUMA (Tanzania)
Nalinzunya, Bebe Mulugu wane, giki ukanisumba nakumane Bebe na kukulemilija. szunya ung’wi ikanza ili, ubusunduhazu bone na kunzu jako, mubihabi bone na usabi boko Bebe.
Hatiho Mulugu ugi hambunu Bebe Nduhu Ng’wambilija wa Mayaga, Uyokikalaga Muweyi Ng’wenikili.
SWAHILI (Central and East Africa)
Nashuhudia, Ewe Mungu Wangu, kwamba Wewe Umeniumba mimi kukujua Wewe na kukuabudu Wewe. Nahakikisha, katika wakati huu, juu ya unyonge wangu na uwezo Wako, juu ya umasikini wangu na utajiri Wako.
Hakuna Mungu mwingine ila Wewe, Msaada katika Mashaka, Aliyepo-Mwenyewe.
SWAHILI: Mashingoli dialect’r (Somalia)
NA SHAHIDHI MNUNGU YUANGU KAMA WEYE KUNUMBA NI KUMAGNE NA IBADHA YAKO NA SH AHIDHI KAMA JERO KUA UZIVU NA NGUVUZAKO NA BILLA NGUVU NA GUDURA YAKO NA UFAGHIRI UANGU NA UTAGIRI UAKO HAKUNA MNUNGU MTUHU ILLA NI UEYE NA HUKUMU YAKO UEYE.
TEMEN (TEMNE, THEMNE): Northern (Sanda) dialect (Guinea, Sierra Leone)
I sag maseri OKuru kami. munm] p0 bempa mi tak tara mu; yi ksbatho mu rams 10mpi. I lane ka aloko age. I Ieba ayethe mi ka munog kaba afoso: ka among mami yi munor] ka rayola ramu. Ukuru ulom oyi ysso thambe munal]. Ka mar mi ka masibo. munog I yi gbora takbatho.
TESO (ATESO) (Kenya, Uganda)
Arai eog ikajenan, Wu Ekadeke, ebe Ijo ibu kosub cog aijen Ijo kakukonokin Ijo. Etogogogit kapak kana, akalogwau ka agogong Kon, ikabakor ka amio Kon.
Emamei bobo Edeke ece dimarai Ijo, Ekesigalikinan kotoma Amudiaro, elopetAijar.
[Page 509]
BAHAWBIBUOGRAPHY
TIGRINYA (Eritrea)
9 hwdfiamdmm nmfim: hPH&anI hPfihC hhfi::
hflH h‘H'Hh hh: MW?“ mm 51: nhnm ‘lnNT‘l M315" {11H nnn mm mm» Chnfi M mt: mmfi nah mh‘ em :: TIV* (Nigeria)
M0 mngugh shiada, Aondo wam, mfa U gbam wer mfaugh man shi mchivir We. Me fatyo u oron hen shighen ne mer, mo yo mngn a agee ga kpaa ka We tseegh u 111 a Tahav ye, shi mngu a kwagh mom mom ga kpaa ka We tseegh u In a hanma kwagh ye.
Ma Aondo ugen je ngu ga saa We, We 11 lu Iwasen yam hen sghighen u kwagh atserem kpaa ye, man ka we stsegh u lu Ityongh you mtswen ye.
TOBOTE (BUSARI, BASSAR)T (Ghana, Togo)
N’sah sédah danh, 6 N’botou, yi Ahsah woun’ naméh yi m’bésseh kn’gnonkisseh.
N’dakah n’yountinéh n’wofiyi ah ponhou n’sori ah gadjatih.
N’botih oubo catibi ki kouti Apouh, Oun’djoh im’ koumnéh, Oune’dibih Oubahpouéh.
Ci-TONGA, MALAWIAN SISKA) (Malawi)
(KITONGA,
Ndichitiya ukaboni, O Chiuta wango, kuti mukundilenga kuti ndikuziweni ndikumusopani Imwe. Ndikhozga, panyengu yinu, kufowka kwangu ndikukuwa kwanthazi zinu, kusawuka kwangu ndikulemera kwinu. Palivi Chiuta munyaki kweni Imwi-pe, wakovya pasoka, wambura kusowa kanthu.
ci-TONGA, ZAMBIAN TONGA) (Zambia)
(PLATEAU
Ndime kamboni mwami Lela wangu, kuti wakandilengela kuti nkuzibe alimwi nkukombe. Ndazumina cino ciindi kuti ndimuteteete webo ndiwe singuzu, mebo ndimucete pele webo ulimuvubi.
Kunyina umbi Leza zunze kwako ndiwe mugwasyi mumapenzi esu, ulapona mukuyanda kwako.
509
se-TSWANA (CHUANA) (Botswana, South Africa, Zimbabwe-Rhodesia)
Ke supa bopaki, O MOdimo wa me, gore ke Wena yo 0 ntlhodileng go Go itse 16 go Go direla. Ke paka, mo motsotsong o”, bokowa ba me go matleng a Gago, khumanego ya me go khumong ya Gago.
Ga gona ope 0 mongwe Modimo ga ese Wena, Mothusi mo Botlhokong. Motshidi ka Esi ba Gagwe.
TUMBUKA (TIMBUKA, CHITUMBUKA) (Malawi, Tanzania, Zambia)
Nkucita wukaboni, A! Ciuta wane, kuti muli kundilenga ine kuti ndimumanyani imwe, na kumusopani imwe. Nkupanikizga panyengo iyi, kwambula nkongono kwane na kwa nkongono zinu zikuru, ku wukavu wane na kuwusambazi Winu.
Kulive Ciuta munyakhe kweni ndinwe pera, Muvwiri muvisuzgo, Muliko bamoyo Mwekha.
WOLOF* (JOLOF, OULOF) (The Gambia, Mauritania, Sénégal)
Seedenaa ne, yow suma yéla ne dangama sos ngir ma xam 1a,jaamu Ia, Seedenaa Ci jamano ci suma fiék katan ak ci sa mégaay, ci suma mbaadola ak sa am-am.
Beneen yéle amul ku moy yow, ndimba] gi Ci musiba, ki dul daanu.
ci—YAO (CHIYAO) (Malawi, Mozambique, Tanzania)
Nguwichila umboni O Mlungu jwangu! Kuti Mwanenjile une, kuti nim’manyilile nikumpopela. Ngwitichisya pa-je ndawi jino, kulembuka kwangu niukulu wa machili Genu, kulaga kwangu nikupuka Kwenu.
Pangali Mlungu jwine akawe M’mwe Jikape, Wakamusya muyakogoya.
YAOURE (YAHORE) T (supplied from Ivory Coast)
Bie na yé. E Bali, Bie man gnain ambolah, Biandré yémité gnenmipan. Bian pah lah nah goo.
Bié plehble 16 main pleublé. Kah é kiand ahngna ya leh tehzan, gnien bré ki fé yezan Bali péh kah lénah blé. Ouizoude oui péhnon yéh qui guir re yahe evleeah.
[Page 510]
510
YORUBA (Benin, Nigeria)
M0 $e ijégrii si i, qu QlQrun mi, pe IWQ da mi lati mg) C) ati lati sin Q M0 jgwg ni akoko yi niti ailagbara mi, atiniti agbara R¢,11itiainiati niti Ola Rq
K0 si QlQrun miran bi k0 $6 IWQ Oluranlgwq nigba isoro, Eni ti ki i ku, Eni ti 0 16 da duro.
ZANDE (Central African Empire, Congo Republic, Sudan, Zaire)
Mi ni gamu b010, ai Mboli, wa ma vungule tipa hinolo, tipa hilisolo. Mi idi, ti ku logobo 1e gimi nangala na gamu ngulu, gimi lungo na gamu hiliso.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Meinongo kula Mboli balo ‘te, Kuko na hundo a bolo lo lungo yo, Kuko nala na a gala nitiko.
olu—ZIBA (olu-HAYA) (Tanzania)
Ninjuliza Iwe Katonda wange, okwo Niwe wantonzile Inye kukumanya kandi noukuabudu Iwe. Ninjuliza akanya aka, ombujege bwange kandi nomumani Gawe, no omubunaku bwange kandi nomubutungi Bwawe.
Taliyo Katonda ondijo Shana Iwe, Omujuni omunaku, Nyakubaho.
B. THE AMERICAS
- Denotes revised translation.
ALACALUF (Chile)
Chao quijéna, O Arka K’séles chewe. Chao illatana chi quijena, chi afsaksta. Chao quijena laf, Che keép.
Chao chechal-eché, che keép, Chao akiai. Chao tarso ak’senes, Chao ala’ai. Che asér. Chao ak’senes.
ALEUT: Eastern dialect (Cyrillic characters) (Alaska, Aleutian Islands, Siberia)
/
HMHHE AH‘AAX‘THX’Z) AKK__ KFIHA ?Irflrgénz. AFAHL THHZ AI'HHAX AK erxnnz, Tums AKATAAHXZ KAWXA Hmmm KAMI‘AKHNZ‘, gnu. mcuMz. H_ Mm; com.xz 'TH‘ngbJ'ACAHth Méxz‘ AKA'rMQéKHHZ Kwoxz KA HMHH‘A owgnaxz AHAHz H HZ anéfinwucukéknuz Karoxz TgKngHAHZ“
Eqéummfiniz‘ Hrérékg (mum. z muKHMRHZx MI;
(>qu 5M0. MMI'KKAHAHK. 2m a mum; 'I‘HMHHZ CH, C nKfixz AAAKAXA.
AMUESHA (Peru)
NA’ PA NECHMETENEP’ YOS PACA NEYECHCATE.
ANEQUEP OCH NECHMETAP NAMA OCH NESHERWIAP.
NEPARESTSS
TEfforts to obtain exact identification continue.
AMACH, ES’NE’PIO, TARANA PEHUAMEN NANA AMA ES NE’CHENO. PA ATAR PE’ CHEQUEM AMA” ENALLE POPON YOMPOR ENE PIA NET YEYENPUENE ERA PIAREN YE’SEN NET ENALLETETSA NOT.
APACHE: Mescalero dialect (United States) Bik'eguindan nc na sha; Bik'eguindan nibika’ nshini’tj, negusij, ashi ni ch itedishdflii binka. Dakugu adishdi. shi shin dzifleyaedi. Ndi ni dzilegulj, shi Ie‘nsjine‘ aku ndi yat'a diyi dike niZ shi jash. Na'shi duhan kaI'C) bik'egu dahindada. dandina nik'egu dahinda, naich’udanne. Ha‘a duguzhuda a agut’egu dandi nik'eguinda.
ARAUCANT (submitted from Panama)
Testigo nankue
Nas Kakaravico,
Manan hizana
Yuesanguasi nagasanangfiasi.
Iva testigo name maguasiri avinaskavi mare némasina guneri,
Ayua Zakaravico cuni maimani.
Be maseingunamase gacaca
Berna nenén avuankin.
ARHUACOT (Colombia)
Matuni gukui naji Ghalaghwasha ma naghwamalé mé natunanamighzeja (y adorarte) matuni gukwa ghaika gwésu nituku, mé ghamamekwa yé daznada nashi dazna ghéwia,
[Page 511]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ayzc nadaki yé Ghalaghwasha yénagholija niashi yénghwapa.
AYMARA (Bolivia, Peru)
Nayajja ufijtwa Dius Tatay, jumawa lurista nayaru jumaru ufit’afiataki, yupaychafiataki, nayajja ufijtwa anchhicha uruna jani ch’amanita ukama; juma ch’amanitama, nayajja ufijaraktwa anchhicha uruna jani kunanita ukama, juma taqe kunanitama, janiwa yaqha Dius Awkijja utjkiti. Juma spakitawa, jumawa yanapt’iritajja taqe jan walinakansa, jumawa utjta juma pachapata.
BAURE (Bolivia)
Di reshitéu, t0 vekiyir, piti kem shokévi kesko vichipti ash vekiyichip. Di reshiréu nerekike, doka nasé rején ash piti asérokon, di pohour ash piti kétirén.
Do kat kapénpéu ponshohué piti. Piti as inkorébi ash chapchévi doka kansérpou tikuer t1.
BRIBRI (Costa Rica, Panama)
YERUR BEBIKETSU BERO YE SIBU ECUEKY BETUYEYU EDIRIRSU EBIKETSU YE WASCHEN Y YERURETA YE QUE DIRIRCHETA, BERCHE TAIE YE SIORARA BE BURU TAIE ER KIO QUE SIBU SCATU BE IMEKE YISCATU YEI SKIMENE ISURUETA IERBI IBUBRABA IEBUSCO IBUBRABA.
CAKCHIQUEL (Guatemala)
Yin nibij riyeht, nu Dios, yin aquiytisan ri chi nuguatamaj aguach y gantiguajé.
Yin nibij ri jun ti rato ré ri nu ban y riyalan ri aguachuka, ri nu mebahil y ri abellomal.
Majun chik jun Dios mas que regui riyet, ri gatohon Cheré ru queyebal, ri xa ban riret mismo.
C AMPA (Peru)
Naka cantacotiriri, nashi nowabani abirota’ qui ovettzikaquena, oncantcha niyotantaiymiri
nancanenpi. Nocantaco timpi irofiaca te noshinttzitage pishinttzincaqui Noca nashinonca. Abiroka pashararo. Tekattzi
pashini pawa. Abiroka pamitacotana ocavencati, abiroka afiincari.
511
CARIB: Galibi (Carifia, Karinja) dialect (Brazil, French Guiana, Guyana, Surinam, Venezuela)
AOU SOUGOUCA TAMOUCHI, TWUE GASSER O OIR DIR A YOU OUCOUTOMER MENGAR 0 SE OIRTIOMER.
AOU SOUGOUCA ET LOU MELO, AOU PALIPEOIR A YOU ABOROT MENGAR QUADAMADOR A YOU OIR BOROT RICHEMINS.
A MOEIR OUR TE LA PASMENT TAMOUCHI A OIR LA NO COLAT DANDER DA A YOU PANPAMANOLANT, MANCOLOT COMOMINPOENT OA ASSEQUERO.
CARIB: Moreno dialect’r (submitted from Honduras)
Au pu’uneauwa. O Lloso kura, amoro puascanenpo amoro mana adupu’ustoome érome éseguachoome. Au pu’uneauwa co’ollene éropo, au piorésmaba érome amoro ta paripiin, au poreauwa érome amoro ta caballero.
Lla’aba Lloso amu bétuman abifioscopore, abapune llapiopunta adasta, améntoto aseque tu cugfientarumue.
CARIB, ISLAND (CARIBENL (submitted from Honduras)
Lun nasfianeyaa lidaa ven gaadeirei daan lidas dimii amiidi lan maniguaty munilla vaanibey b0 ubabey.
! Bungui neigeichy. Bfigiellaa agfireajaavadinaa.
Sun nazfibfi dirl’mibiefi. Sun biciendeiu: nugulaa bobabey lindao danlee luagu beere suma billariafiaa.
Luguli luma Birizi.
Uvaaty amfi Bfingifi.
Bubedigisa 1e Hidajabey Iidaan Hinavariny Luagu. Burigfiana ru.
CATiOT (Colombia)
Bétru mua asia Béra caira cawabamanea Béra zhi biara jaraita. Méa jaraya jémaéa Bé ne éaba méa 0 be éa. Béra wérinu obeya. Mfira zhi supuriata Béra shi wai bua bara buta.
Béra Caragabia tewara ne éa. Shi dai ne cazhirua cawade ni mi bum ewate Bé tru careba baa Béra to aba bua tewara wai éa bu ea.
[Page 512]
512
CHEROKEE (United States) L L/U/q JL VPJBVJ
91w LLAVq DLVP$VJ a2 TGGAJ DLVPQVJ b8 fRT. TS DCTGBflT.
DB hSW, hZP, hfl $IAWOB, gwqo DB he EfiPy TCPQVJé, DJ hB EQLVPQLAJé.
DB Eth hEA, th, AB DPPRT. DB OIBhEEG PRT, he CEhEE ehEL. DJ Dyejr he were PR ehEL.
152 QLJ OAWOB éY, he cnec ayaspgy D6 @yCLway hSIT DJ hAeqT.
11/9 CU DPSLSPQY.
CHIPAYA (PUKINA) (Bolivia)
Wertre Yooz distike amchuaweke pachamke paj zapa, amkin Mayziz zapa, anzchiruktra tee urake, wuer am azizaricha, wer anachullchica, amke thapa chulltakchichmcha, mazek yakha Yooz zallzzie, yanapt’icha anawalinakista, amzestra personkistra.
CHIQUITANOWL (Bolivia)
Y quiococa hoy baistuparré tagfi na hay samuté para suputaru y anauno. Chusa quisn napanaucu chacusivica taya acheca. Chanapfi tiatarrs bacher un tafié naqui baiytuparrs bayuré ifio untafias ugge chusé quirrs
CHOCO, COLOMBIANT (Colombia)
Mi marchi, en beré, ma criabué ma criamé tachi afuni. Mi marchi empera muena, quema quinupineabua mu trué, paratani quinfi empera patabarabia. Tachi sese audubua, care facia pea bodota tachi sese ituba bua.
CHOCO, PANAMANIANT (Panama)
Mfiira testigua tayhi Ancoré bedea devena bfiia odévera injésita biii cavavai carea y biii carea triabaya.
Mfiira testigua nahua enda fuerza nee bfiimina y bfiira necua bi‘u’mina, pobre bfiimina y biiira nejomé iri biiimina, Dayhi Ancorera abébfiiri bfii fimera neea, Tayhi care bévarira porque bfiiébira pueébiri jomé mana bfiibera.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
CONIBO: Shipibo dialect (Peru)
Enra mia onanque nocon Dios, min ca jonia iqui mia onanti itan rabite, Enra ohuiquen ramabicon yosma betan min coshi, ea jahuequioma itan mia jahuequiya
Yamaraque huetsa Dios mia quesca, jan noa aquinti onsanconia, mia iqui minbish ja.
CREOLE, HAITIAN (Haiti)
Moin temoin, 0 mon Dieu, que ou cree um pou moin reconnait ou, pou moin Adore ou, moin gin conscience ya de impuissance moin avec pouvoir, grandeur ou et richesse ou tou.
Pa gin lot bon Dieu cancou ou, ce ou qui secouri nan tout mauvais moment (:6 Cu qui fort passe tout.
CUNA (KUNA) (Colombia, Panama)
Be nuga an nudakedi, Be an Baba, Pe pinsadi anudakégala. Pe purba anualicégwa, perguinanmala an bendake. Pe purba anse ogfiaegala, neitirpimékar abdaibugua. Pe d0 di napiraguad tule tumad, percuable per carmadi.
DAKOTA (SIOUX): Lakota dialect (Canada, United States)
Wakan Tonka mitawa slol ceye na ceyo onihau kta ca maya gage.
Mahon ke sni na neye ni waski, onma si he na naye nejinca, lel owape hin e1 epin kte.
Okokipe na ni som onyanki yapi, Wakan Tonka ni some towa wi sin.
DIEGUENO (KUM-YiY) (Mexico, United States)
Néé mat-é-kénép, o Myhé, Néa-péw wé—éw Whe_e éch-pi'e Whfia. Néé mét-é-kénép néé-pe‘él spTr-méuw MS/hé quéw-u’e, ti-pflil Sh‘fn néé wfi que_en‘é—w7l'ch quéw-tfe.
Néé mé-eye néé mftch té-pé méuw Myhé Shin, Myhé na-ik Niumbé néé wfi Mé-Ife mé-téy-yém, Yike né Mitch-péshéw. GOAJIRO (GUAJIRO) (Colombia, Venezuela)
Tatuja auch, pié Maléiwaa, piain ainjin taya zupfila terréjuin pié ma aijachin tapula pié Tatuja auch jolucho, marchin tayé ma piainja katchin, mulieshtayé pumé piainja washirin.
Néjoish wané maléiwa makaika pié, ja makai jumt’lin ekai mojfiin mukuwaipa, chi ekai numfiinwa.
[Page 513]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
GUAHIBO (GUAJIBO) (Colombia, Venezuela)
Jjénu ténaju, Oh téja Dios, nejjéname cayaputajitsiétsi pinijiyému. Jjénu ténuju ajéna conojjée ténuju paepéinajn, jjéma
asaubéjema; jjénu bijyébunu y jjému acébecobuyeimu. Apoejanéimu itsé Dios pecatojjéntsinu,
bajaré-poné necayayénena ecarépeju pom; piyeséutja.
piayéi-cujl’ro,
GUAYMi (Panama)
Ti es géde, Oh Nfibtl tigiie! Méigués ti migé ni tfibé Mfidrugai géde ti-e. Bfité tigfié es métaréde. Ti-e géde mé_nguére. Ti til brai rhétfi cribidéi. Ti tébre riqueza méhfié bfité.
Nfibfi mfidé fiécarr.
Miibe itibé mii éra dé migéga méi éra ni nobé bidiga.
HAIDA (Alaska, Canada)
Hlaa, weiyat suus uu dii dung Tl'aahlaany; eihl uu saa dungeng dii guudengaan. Uhl giisluu wy'aat tlii dii xaagaas k'an uu, is siis dii g'ungisgdygaas k’ang tlii dung iitlaa gadaas. Dung squun nuueitl dung klaaiidunggung. Dung kil Eihl ging gets sqwaagu saang.
INUIT (INUPIAQ): Barren Grounds dialect (Canada)
Uvanga qauyititsivunga tapsuma Gutip sanala ursimamanga imminik qauyimaqupluni tugsiavigiqublunilu. Tukisititsivungalu manamit pitguniqanginimnik tapsuma pitguniqaninganut, akslunimnutlu aksluinirnut.
Asingnik Gutitaqangilaq igvit kisiuit, ikayuqtauyargiaqaniptinit ilingnit ayugaqangitumit.
INUIT (INUPIAQ): Barrow (North Slope) dialect (Alaska)
Ilisimaraururja GOdiiI], Ilirjnun savagatilaamnik Ilisimatquvlutin suli nangaquvlutin. Quliaqtuagigiga akkupak suaqgataififiiga suli ilvich suarmatiqpaifi, uvaga iliappauniga suli ilvich umialgunigifi.
Allamik Godaitchuq ilvich ikayuillarutin siggagniugnami aqalatchumifiaiql'uni iliruni.
avatikkun, suli ilimik
513
INUIT (INUPIAQ): Keewatin dialect (Canada)
.Dbr’<16<l>b JnL Ho.c.>-. LL bWLdJL DfidAf‘dJJ a__3do_L L‘O_,/\Jo’bf‘o_L AJJdDLA‘ <l<LL <<Lbf‘aA «o— Jncbr‘l. AA Pm Ab" <nz>bA JnDLA.
INUIT (INUPIAQ): dialect (Alaska)
Kobuk (Kotzebue)
Ookauheieah, aungayootmang, eilvich einiktaheima eilichoheilotin sooli pikhaheitcoplotin. Ookauheieach ahkoovuk syaktoiliah sungeepnune; nohleiliah oomalholiknune. Autlamik aungayotachuke ahvatipcoon, ekahyokti nuvaynami, engmik pityi.
INUIT (INUPIAQ): South Baffin Island dialect (Eastern Arctic Syllabics) (Canada)
DHLDL, JnL‘, HmLDLAL bb>L5>49n D<p~ )HqAden D<J“ Lac PHC>L D<L HrrrJ, fira'39nc, HJ>LC )r’qa-d ALPDLA~ <Hr JanrL<EA<¢)(bc<‘ AD:H<)J¢>0 QLJ Arc“ ADC A>¢J¢339n JICAQUE (XICAQUE) (Honduras)
- 0 Dios Mand! An timnon ni na mayé, si
suanda was ten iga. P0 qui noi es sun. Dios, te qua 1a ti way, na polra monse sa a ti qui Dios pa ha 1i cum. Fan 11 hay Dios, in 0y le Dios, un ving baten Dios.
KALISPEL (SALISH): Flathead dialect
(United States)
Quin Kolinstuten, lu til Anawee U k0 kolintwhu lu que ks soohum U que ks putenem. Ku yes konkonstinum yetilwha lu ye til eas s.hopt U jasyoyit, U ye til eas konquint U jas s.koyoleewhu.
Tat suewet wes olkosheetums oopen es olkosheetwhu lu es yapastenee. Lu ta epl chinaks Kolinstuten, e.chimish Anawee.
KOYUKON* (Alaska)
Ego ninh nit’odeetaagham’aa’ ts’a nits’a hadeenaaghasdaak ts’a haghanee go ninh kkokk’a neeseeneenhaanh ts’a isee huyif asiniyh. Sinh niti’il eent’aanh dahoon see hal'
[Page 514]
514
eelstl"ilaa. Doyonh eenlaanh dahoon saahaa k’its’ohadeeh’aa ts’a eesee koon hayi¥asinihy.
Ninh yaan’ adit’o deenlit’aa ts’a ninh yaan’ Dinaahuto’ eenlaanh.
KUCHIN (KUTCHIN) (A lasku)
Nawandak shi’ij, shiVit’eegwijyaahcy’aa shqghtsgij naahashandaii ts’a’ nats’a’ khagihihjyaa geenjit. Juk geegwaldak shat’aii kwaa, nat’aii nitsii shigehdan t’oonchy’aa nidehtee gwintsii.
Neeghaii ’faa K’eegwaadhat gwanlij kwaa gogwggjat dgi’ gwits’iinyaa. Khik gwandaii gin1’11.
KUCHIN (KUTCHIN): Fort Yukon dialect (Alaska)
Osi vittekueichanchyo, netitinihsha, Nit tsut. Kititihchya tenitenitutula Kenjit, kuikit sidhatsei Choog. Tzut-nikueinidhut. Sut lei, Kkuea ei tzut. Sinersitkwichachyo, nitsi, nichile Kitinichi. Nekhe, vittekwichanchyo Koolikkua, nunrzi, kookontrhi. Tei, kwutsut thitihndul. Kokwadhun.
KUCHIN: Loucheux dialect (Canada)
Sit ve tte kwut cha chyoo nya le sen dei ako nit tsut ki 16 ti chya choog. Kwe tha zit te let ti nja. Sit tei kkwa, kwit zit nun nit chi tei, sit ne rsil kwit cha chyoo kwi zit. Ako nit kwit chilee chi zyoo kkwa nun zi.
Vitte kwit cha chyoo kouko nyoo, kwut tsut tri chi ili.
LOKONO (CONTINENTAL ARAWAK) (Guyana, French Guiana, Surinam)
A baa bekotoi gia ka de Wathinathie bie wa maritana da de dei thien bia be goe nang da sika da-ka-ke-wa gowe babong. Tataa-go damong ka sjoko dja rong, bee wa tataa abona, matho damoeneka dja ko mahto baboewa djako. Abathie go sabona, Adajaali bie rong kie, bie rong kie boeroewata na ma da de damoeneka Ioko de bie rong kie.
MACHIGUENGA (Peru)
Naro noncamantaqueteria, Aparioshi, camictitaqeria Viro pitomidékena narunocama téqueri narotéqui noneaquitémbira y nungamagitaquémbira Viro. Pineaqué THE Bahá’í WORLD
nari oca maicca teranagz’lbe pagabeéquena teranonsanmaite Viro pashe.
Mameri pashiniacpariéshi payoyabisaquiViro irl’rori ymectacutéqueri nolsaroganéque, iriori ictimira por irirori.
MAPUCHE (ARAUCANIAN) (A rgentina, Chile)
Ng illatun ragifi antfi men.
Ifiche waldogun, Eimi Nganechen. Eimi Iremijmen tami kimafiel tafiigillatuael. [fiche weldagun feula tami newegen, ifiche yaffirjeléln; tami filmengen, ifiche weshacherjen. Ngelai ka Nganechen Eimi maten, kellukelu kufiin men, kishu mogelnieulu.
MAPUCHE: Chilean dialecflL (Chile)
Feipiael, filkantuael, rafii antfile zeuma.
Will zufiun ta inche, Awem Nfinechen, eimi mi tremumol, tami kimafiel, tami poienael. Mupifi, feula tafii wezakonafien, ka tami newen fien, tar'li kufiifall fien ka tami ulmen fien. Eka fielai Nfinechen Eimi mfiten, Kellukelu ta kufiiu meo, Kizu Mofien fielu.
MASCO: Huachipairi (Amaracaeri) dialect (Peru)
Do a Waadic apagapi, pecuite Diosta wacnopunwate, yadpaunwate wanopunwate wabuanda wayoro queri paida iue un dicnanda inupuene catembet iene nunda apag ewe ue ununin wambachiwapuere, dacue eete joaeri.
MASCOY: Lengua dialect (Paraguay)
Acyasamco coo Dios Sivaninquiscama alhta lhip yuyan oyicpilcojo quinjan opayicsojo. Acyasamco coo Dios janjay apyimatemlhip acma apquilatam paj poc Dios apasmom najan ayasomquilha avanquilhip Dios emyoc.
MATACO (Argentina, Bolivia, Paraguay)
Ohap okalethtayajwo, oka Dios, Ta Am ta enekno yamlek otajwueth amej wet ochaame. Ohap okelethtayajwo hapet atana ta tek okajfiayaj ihi wet Am akajnayaj, hap opathtseyaj wet Am aniyatyaj.
Tsi tek iche eth Dios thamet Am, o-eth ta lchote ta owitay ihinya, o—eth Tek latunjwuaihi.
[Page 515]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
MAYA (Belize, Guatemala. Mexico)
Ten ilé, ch. in Jajal—Dios, tech dzaen yolal in kajoltquech yolal kulquech. Ten ilzie ti junzutéj, minaan in muk, teché yan é muk, otzilen; teche ayiklech yetel yacunail. Minaan u laak Jajal-Dios, Chen tech, tech ca antaj can anac baa] kaz, cu cuxtal Chen leti.
MICMAC (Canada)
Oeligtjitjito, O NISGAM, Gil gisiitepotjit gisi nenolin a gepmitelmolim. Oelnimito, enge asma, nin mnagétim 21g Gil migignétim, nineolegeagnin ag Gil milsotim. Mo eimog piloei Nisgam pasig Gil tan Apognimasoti metoegigtog ag Gil Iaptjoei.
MISKITO Nicaragua)
(MOSKITO) (Honduras,
Yang witnisna O God man yangra paskatma man kaikaia bara man mayunaia. Yang nan witnisna naha pyua sip apia kapri bara man karnikamra; yang umpira lakasna bara man ailalka.
Bahara God apusa bamansma. Help Patra, ba mita witin Selp rayasa.
MOHAWK (Canada, United States)
Wa-geh-ni-wha-gwa-risi, Ook Niyo, Neh Ihse dé-ké-dis-son ne é-gon-yen-dé—rih-hok ta-non dé—gon-non-wha-ra-don-sek. wé-gehri-wha-ni-rot, nook-non-wa. ji-niah—teh-gehsuts—teh ta-non Ihse, ji-ni-seh-sots-tens-sehro-waneh, ji—ni-wé-ki-den ta-non ji-ni-sahgwe-nya-tsa-ro-wa-nen. Ihya-gonega oya ne niyo néok Ihse, ne-gah—yeh-na-wa-tséré nehyo-da—ri-hok, ne-ihse sa-ri-wha-gwa-noh.
MOTILON (Venezuela)
Aue cutr_é Papachi yupune, amo sanuta tacomena céntopo yopone, aue cutgé amicha yarsna i muquepe, aue camisique i amo apenyéntaca. Guéneque conipa Papachi, cumagco Papachi agfiéyabo a’n’tace am’pape guéneque yéntaca.
MOXO: Trinitarios dialect (Bolivia, Brazil, Paraguay)
Nfiti néchoyére, oh Viy_a, piti pepy_akné’i tay_é’é nimotviraviy_re éne nj_iruchviy_re. Nechovéy_re té fuiti naripu tahina ntumayvina. Ene piti
515
tfimevijch’é, nfiti pévréno éne piti ricovi’i.
Nahfna ponéna Viya pkévorichu piti, p’éyudachvokéwi té’ t6 vyétahibéno, éma maké-vorichu kjéwrikéwri. _
NAVAJO (United States)
Diyin Shitaa’ Ninilini Shir beehozin éx’ a’rhinéhodiilzjjh biniighé éshfinlaa éédéé Niji’ sodiizin d0. T‘éé k’ad bee haszii’, héélé shich’j’ nahwii’né éédéé Ni t’éiyé Nidziil,té’é’1’shidaah ndahkai éédéc’) Ni t’éiyé t’zié attsoni Ni holé‘
T’éé Ni t’éiyé Aléadi Diyin nihf héélé nihich‘i’ nahwifl’né’igfi t’aa’ finifisin, Hool’éégéé Honilé.
OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Mississagi dialect (Canada)
Gi windimon, Nimin Dom geget Geen ogee ozhi yun odji kenmin nan gaie odji Anamie ton Nan.
N windima gae nongoom, ezhi bedjee wee yan Geen dush epeecheeweeyun, Nigidimagiziwin pee dush Geen gwandiziwin. Kawin waia bikan Manido Geen eta, Widokazwin Sinagaziwining, Mindjimnaman Bimadziwin.
OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Salteaux (Saulteaux) dialect (Canada, United States)
Gee Kayne dah mah zon, Ke shay Manito, Che ke kayn me me nan, Shegwah che mah wim we to nan, Che mean 6 go e 26 yan. Che ke kayne me me nan ke kaye da ma zon ke long 6 ze win she quah neen aye pee chee nay sou e 26 yan, shegwa ka 3 pe chee we note 6 ze yun. She gwah neen apee chee ke tee mak e 26 anne.
Keen aye ta g0 ka Manito win, ka we Che tas so win, Apee saig e 26 an, kah ke kay kah ah ya ym.
OJIBWA (CHIPPEWA): Woodlands dialect (Canada, United States)
Neen dibaindaun kikaindamowin O neend Gitche Manitou, tchi keen ge gezhetod neend tchiway kikaindjigay keen gahyay tchiway aunamiaytahwah keen, Neen megiway debaudjimowin, tchigayi mahndan ningopassangwaubiwin, tchiway neen kawween gashkiyaywisiwin gahyay tchiway ke mashkauwisiwin, tchiway neend kitimaugisiwin gahyay tchiway ke dauniwin. Eemahgay kauwsen bahkaun Gitche Manitou, anishaydask keen, widokaugaywin pindje bapinisiwaugan, tebinahway aupidanisiwin yegibimadis.
[Page 516]
516
OTOMi (Mexico)
Ji testigueska, 0h juchiti taté diosi, eskarini t’u kueraska parakini ml’tini ka k’eri ambé arhinguini. Ji testigueska ia iasi. juchiti jukapérhakueri ka chiti uirjépikueri para iémindu ambé uni, juchiti komu jéggueri ka n0 ma jatsikuarhikueri ka Chiti kénikua jakapérhakueri jimbokari iémindu ambé jatsiska.
No jarhasti méteru taté diosi qua sénderu k’erika eska cha, emagga jarhéajpka egga kénikua uétarhijka, emagga jarhajka mentku is-i néjkiru no nemé jarhéataka.
PAPIAMENTO (Aruba, Bonaire, Curagao)
Mi ta doena testimonio, 0 mi Dios, coe Bo a cria mi pa mi conoce Bo y pa mi adora Bo. Mi ta testigo na 6 momento aki di mi fiaqueza y di B0 poder, di mi pobreza y di Bo rikeza.
No tin ningun otro Dios, sino B0, 6 auxilio den Peliger, Esun coe ta subsisti di su mesA
PIRO (Peru)
Gita testigo goyakalo pixa gira uturu petashatanru nunanu gita gi ixchcota gika gike wanciru, pixa waneru ponikolu maleshnu satu goyakalu. Pixa satu pupxakan nukyo wikolni pixa pagoone tengogne
QUECHUA: Bolivian dialectT (Bolivia)
Noqa rikuni, Aa Apu Yaya Diusniy, Qan rikhurichiwasqaykita rejsisunaypaj, yupaychasunaypaj. Cheqamanta yachani kunanpacha mana atiyniyoj kasqayta, Qan Manchay Jatun atiyniyoj kasqaykita, mana imayoj kasqayta jinataj Qan Qhapaj Kasqaykita. Mana Waj Apu Yaya Dius kanchu Qanmanta astawan, Pichus mana allimpi yanapakuj, Pichus Kaj Payllamanta.
QUECHUA: Cuzquefio dialect (Peru)
Noqan yachani, Diosniy, qampaq kanawaskayquita recsinaypaq, yupaychanaypac. Yachanitaqui kunan pachapi, nana atiyniyoq qqaskayta, qampaq jatun atiyniyoq kaskayta, waqcha kaskayt, kcapaq cayniquita.
Manan joc Diosniy kanchu qanmanta astawan nana allinkunamanta yanapaqniykun, qqanllan Diosniy kausanqui qqanllamanta.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
QUECHUA: Ecuadorian dialectT (Ecuador)
Nuca dius tistigu cani fiucaman vifiachiscangui Canman sirvingapa alabaringapa. Tistigu cani cay ratuta fiuca, mana ushay cani, Canmi tucuy ushay Cangui. fiuca pubri cani Quiquin Chari cangui Mana Tianpash shug Dius ashta yali hurmana huraspi yanapangui Canmandallatami causangui.
QUICHE (Mexico, Guatemala)
In xin wilé, oh nu Dios, chi ri at xinaq’uisaj rech quin weta’maj awach y quin lok’ok’ej awach Weta’am quin ri camic ri’ na c’o ta ri nu chok’ab y ru, nimal ak’ij ri at, ri nu meba’li in ri ak’inomal ri at.
Maj jun chi Dios xew ri at, at ri cat tob pa ri jun c’ax, y ri ca c’aslic chi rilic rib.
SALISI—I, PUGET SOUND (United States)
”aslefiildx“ 59d, Kg si"ah. datid de'aI k“i t(u)§_shuyuc dxMal k“i g“9dsas(h)ayduw. gwal °9$k“adicut k“i g“9ds’tiwi+ dx“°al d_ag“_i“’. lacut 69d 0al ti"9" ”al Ii x“i° gwadsqwid“ "i I(i) a_dsg“a° a_dsqwidw. dxw°al li°9(") dsss"u§9bubdx“il ”i t(i) zfisg“? °i+qah. x“'i"’ k“i balali° §iq si"_ab dxmal Q31”, gflkwaxvfixw ”al siaXil, k“i "a ci<waqid ”95°1519.
SHOSHONI (SHOSHONE) (United States)
NEE oo-Koo TI SOOM BADUGH UPEH SOOK DA-MEH UH NU-MEH NiP-H UMEH DA~MEH SOOM BA-DO-H KHANDO-H UMEH DA-MEH OIYOS NA-NEH SHOON-Di KHAN-DOH. NEH UGH SOOKA DA-GWATS, NEH Wl-H GA HEENA MA-BA-Ni-wi—H UNEH WI-H DA-MEH GOO-PANDH, WI-HU DA-MEH DIH TIH HAUNC UMEH WI-HU DA-MEH OYOI-DEH-WHUP. UNEH WI-HU DA-MEH UPEH GA—DEAS OO-AH NEESH DA-MEH UPEH Bi—H UNEH WI-DU DA-MEH BOONIH UPEH, DA-MEH DEH-MA-ZI-DH DIH TIH DA-MEH NA KHANC OIYO-GOOS HE-INH GOO-PAS NANA—SOO-WOO GINDH.
SHUARA (JIVARO): (Peru)
WIRJAi ETSEGNUNUK, MINA APUJU, EMEMATJITI WAITUKTUSAM NAJATUAWAITAN DUWI.
Aguaruna dialect
[Page 517]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
wiTJAI CHICHAGKAGTINUK YA BAISHKAM, AME SENCHIJUM SUGUSBAWA DUWI YABAIK AGKAN PUJAJAI.
TIKICHIK AMEA IBAUK ATSAWAI, ISHAMAINUMVAIJATMAINUK, AMEKETNIE PUJUT SUKAGTINMEX.
SIRIONC) (Bolivia)
EBii aba chéé dau chéé. Sé dau abatu chéé, ima-chéé chiian Sande imachéé chian Sande. Yasu tata a. De-aygue de-quiran cuantuchii mbia chii. Tendam fiandeiiti taua de-aygue chéé chaura nyebe eirachéé rache-equia déjera deningue Dios-ra.
De-aygeu chéé dea-catura.
SRANAN (SRANAN-TONGO, SURINAMESE, TAKI-TAKI) (Surinam)
Mie e kotoigie—o mie Gado—datie Joe mekie mie foe sabie en aanbedjie Joe. Mie e kotoigie na tapoe na momenti diesie, mic zwatjie en Joe maktie, mie potiefasie en Joe goedoe. No wang tra Gado no de lekie Joe, na Helpiemang ini notoe, na Wang—Die-De-NaHing-Srevie.
SUMO: Nicaragua)
Musawas dialect‘r (Honduras,
Yang witninis yang Papahnki yang yamus naman yang matilik man kul makulnini. Akaminit yang witninis yang sip awas sai yangki man paun makaupak sipki, yang minikun yangkat man yankli mankat.
Papahn ukdiska man waliki, patkaupa ilk maiatéman, witin silp sanka litki.
SUMO: Twahka dialect (Nicaragua)
Yang witnis yang, yang Godki Man yabinaman Man ma talyang anik. Yang warakat laik yultayang yang paraski Man parasnikira Man. God has lapki, Man Kamank ki, ya paras taman dutni Man Kau, A las Sawonki.
TACANAT (Bolivia, Peru)
He marda mi que testigé, 0h mia dada Diushfi, mia dada ve peitia Diushfi eshenapa pujf. He marda mi que testigé ye orashfi mi que poder mi que impotencia, que ma pun’ que ma mi que riqueza. Hay ma ve pia Diushfi, mi dabai ejejefia, mi dabai Diushfi ejejefia.
517 TANANA (A laska)
Senoghl’k’okhoodelet, see Bet’odeeh’a, see dheehseen nal’ esdeney, nek’okhoochedhet. Senoghellk’okhoodelet, k’odeeyeet, seteeya’ kula, eentl’eth. Tajoo nosoditlt’a, doyon eenlan.
Nen yan’ Bet’odee/h’a eenlan. neeneenneek, dek’onadheelton.
Soghun
TANANA: Tanacross dialect (Alaska)
Maghhihhey, Sht’oxt’iht’eh, shihtsj, me’ishdaey, paghhe§nuhdet Maghnihhel, k’ah du’ t’eyfi sht’aey k0], Nt’eay xuntlgh. Shelzaz’ kol, Nelzaz’ zuntl§h.
Wut’oxt’iht’eh wukaedh k0]. Ts’axunt’eh neghanitandaek. Wut’oxt’iht’eh k’aa nits’axandaeg’.
TEWA: Santa Clara Pueblo dialect (United States)
Naa o toh ne (Nave Taa jo sii) (HaY ti) UU Ti Te PAA Na wi TAAE UU He-ta wi Jo sii a mi tee (naa o TUUNI) (Naa b0) Navi Ka bi ni gati He ta UUVE (Kaa-in ga ta) Nave CHE Biin in gata He ta uuvi CHE IN GATA wiaa wi na aan pi wi Taa jo sii UUTAH; KHA GA TE Di Khun WO DA TE Wi boh gi moi.
TLINGIT (Alaska, Canada)
XAT YEEKAXNEEK AX DIKEE ANKOW YOO XATYEEKLEEYETK EE KASAKOOWOO EE YA SCHKAKAWK. XAT YEEKAXNEEK YA YEEDAT KLETH XAT OOTSEEN KA YEE KLITHSEENA, KA XAT KANISHKEEDEI, KA YEE ANKAW.
WE EE CHEEKLEINAK DIKEE ANKAW YEE SITEE KA YEE YEDASHEE, KA CHEEWEAH-SKEEDANEEK.
TOBA (A rgentina)
Ayem naq’taxananeq, oh yalamxat’ Dios, ye ’am ayem ad’onataq savotaique da ’am savat’ton qataq’ shioqhen. Saq’taxan vetoigui nagui da iqalaxa qataq’ da ad’afixaq’, Yachoqyic qataq’ da ad’sallxé.
Qaica ca 151a Dios napacaleq’ ’am, Nimaye detaunaxan da souqapoigui ca lchic, Nimaye qaica ca iben’a.
[Page 518]
518
TUCUNA (TICUNA) (Brazil. Colombia.
Peru)
Llumaen pora tocuchigan
Choma curi guhen. Cuma pa chori tupana tacufa choun cu na goen fiima na cha cuhan fii né cugo na chan’ inin.
Ehohin na curi guhen fiomar gunengo chori tura y curi pora, chori tahunma curi guhinma.
Tauma a nay a tupana, curin poraqui, toin ri
guhenqui fiima chienfa, fiima por aqui nichatahan. TUPI: Chiriguano (Chahuanco) dialect
(Argenlina, Bolivia)
Che aicué ma che Tumpa, dc che apoaba rocua baera jare romboete baera. Che aicua ma aria ve che chepueréa coba jaré depuere, che cheparabete jare. De denbaeyecou Baetij imru Tumpa ma De giii ba, Poromborij icabibaepeba, jare iyeu guir’lo oicoba.
TUPI: Guarani dialect (Argentina, Brazil, Paraguay)
She aikua’a she Tupé, Nde japé hagiie, roikua’a hagfia, haré Tupa’itu hagfia.
Aikua’a avel’ koaga, 1a she kangy ha, ha Nde, Nde mbaretéha, Ha she Mboriahfi, ha Nd, Nde riko ha.
Ndai pori ambu’éishagfla. Nandejara, Nde fioite pytyvohéra roimé va’l’ javé, Nde fioite reikc’) Nde jehevé.
TUPI: Guarayfi dialect (Bolivia)
Ché de'y vyindar cherfi tumpé, de cheépo have de cuagfia deli. Ché yeroyy augfia afiencua vehy deli c6 corintein deli ché vaé causé de recé pirantaza veiné ché paraizusaveiné de recé yemboeteisé veiné dipoiri ambuaé tumpa de noité hore p'yt'yinbyin vaé, vaé yabaeté vaé sui. Deahé ere yeupivaé de recocuer pype.
YAGUA (Brazil, Colombia, Peru)
R51 andiatene, unindano sun, dejano I’m rz’i andiante, ragita huantanani Ungé Ragité dateré Ungé tunshondfi ne andietané datera ne tratén i criquitin.
Tie qui sauchera Unge uirti qui saucheré urindené Sunfi chera unicho sansquité unichera ninda.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
YAQUi (Mexico, United Strum)
Inapooné testicé in Dios, enpooné yéturiac paquéne enchitallane. Paqueté enchiwatane. Inapone téstico en lautipo, caemo beki jume in uteém caen utean bequi impovea poovetana empon’toorico. Cabe intok Dios,jf1 Ileaniame, enpo jibapé be chiibo jiapsé.
YARURO (Venezuela)
Dadémene koné. Dadémene koné kodé um’ optéa. Mené cua ja no ré dérrér dabéicreine. Dabéicreine cua jémene dérrér. Déicre udércre uchércre. Guardemércre guamérene chereguz’lmerenene. Aéme véi optéedi kanémedi optéedi. Optéedi da jua di chi cua.
Optéedi da diu di que juing.
YUKPA (Colombia, Venezuela)
Aunene, 01 Cémoco, oemcat auyune éope oyénepe, éapera ayampo auyé técshinco. Aunene, jaarketéu, yéitpai auv1’a, amorcotipshin, aumeréjera’yé amori mavare jaapera ma.
Oloco mak améroco élmak, Cumoco técshinco. 610k oyémerficané cupétuécoyo, toépanoperém.
YUPIK, CENTRAL ALASKAN: Kuskokwim dialect (Alaska)
Nallrunitua, Agayutma Piliaqellruavnga Nallunricesqelluten Ciktarvikesqelluten-llu. Watua, Nallrunritua Pingailucimnun Pingirpanun-llu, Arrsaucimnun tukuutevnunIlu.
Allamek agayucetaituq Taugaam elliirek, Ikayulaavkut Aarnarqellramek, Camek elpet Piunrilavet.
YUPIK, CENTRAL ALASKAN: Yuk dialect (Alaska)
Kahnaryahan aungakaka, Agaeutma. Doyooha billyakelrhuavoonga, nahtlooskifkanuk, Chale ookfakishkatlootin. Waneheuha nahtlunrehkaw chaywelujekah etlpet dowghan gahaywavit. Chale ahrsowlowa etlpet dowghken chut dummyetah bektlooghe. Awtlamiktloo owahten Agaeutchetdownnuneh, cheyunahrbootloo nawtloovghahrngownakoo awhrnahgegunn. Keevitloo ahnehrtooreshtengoolootin.
[Page 519]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ZAMUCOAN, NORTHERN (AYORE,
AYOREOfi (Bolivia. Paraguay)
Urepiseyu, Dupadea, uje je vapesute yu, ujetiga yiraja uato ega ujetiga yisi vabay. Yigome ua uje que yé bajopire gotique, uje mataqueyu jeque cuchapeua. que Dupade ufieque cusego gusuué. U3 (1 uje barate yoque, ome cucha gajnaregone, uje je ua Ii cuchadejnese.
519
ZAPOTECWL (Mexico)
NAQUE TESTIGU SHIOSE, YEB LU BAS LA NAHRE TE GUMBE, CHANE LAZ SE YEBLU. NAKQUE TESTIGU NAH SHTEN YEL GU, BIH’N, SHTEN YEL NAZAK.
Ruti steh dad 10h yeb lu, ni rak ms nu re Che cayac nadzin, ni nabahn shteb tis.
c. ASIA
- Denotes revised translation. + Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
AGTAT (Philippine Islands)
SAKSI AKO. O KANA KONG DIYOS, NA MINA AKO, KANIMONG LINALANG TANGANING MA MIDBID TAKA SAKA SAMBAHON KA. SUMASAKSI AKO SA ORAS NA ADIE SAKANI MONG PAG KAODA KAN KUSOG SAKA KANIMONG KAPANGYARIHAN, SA KANAKONG KADUKHAAN SAKA SA KANIMONG KAYAMANAN.
ODA IBANG DIOS KUNDE IKA SANA,
NAGTATABANG SA PELIGRO, ANA KANIMO BA SA KANYANG SADIRI. AGUSANON (AGUSANfi (Philippine Islands)
Ako motindog nga saksi, oh akong Dios, nga 4kaw nagbuhat kaniko para magkila kanimo hasta magsimba kanimo. Ako mosaksi ini doon. sa ako pagka wa do-oy gahum, sa akong pagkapobre, hasta sa ako bahandi. Wi nay lain
AKLANON (Philippine Islands)
May pagtestigo ace, 0 Guino-o, nga-Icao r0 nag himo cacon para magquilala kimo cag mag ampo sa atubang m0. Nagtestigo aco sa sining momento, sa acon buya cag sa imong ng ca cusog, sa acon ca pobrehon cag imong mangad.
Owa lon it ibang imong Dios con indi-Icao, mananabang sa tanan capiligrohan cag ang mainantuson.
APAYAOT (Philippine Islands)
Apo Kabunian, inuman k0 un Sika din nangwa kan Sakon tan matagammuak kan mapadayawak Sika‘ Testigoak sinsaton, maid kabkaboolak kan Sika, kamas dan! Bilongno, kinakapus k0 kan kina Babalin no.
Maid udom si apowok n0 adi Sika, Katulungan di makasapu], Sika din Mannakabalin.
iban Dios kondi 4kaw, ang panabang sa ARABIC kalisud, ang nagkaugalingon nangabuhi. See p. 496. ARMENIAN
"”0, 847' . IIJ ”.u:nnn_w¢\u,#v llfiuql'u’nr ?‘IuJ: qllu owl", .m. ‘U flhi ‘Wilzilullfll. h ‘Fbll "II”:MblIIL ‘ullrlllll I
”3:! [lull]! ‘Gw‘blm q, ’lnnnlntlufillu’ “’4‘"l""-Plu1‘” l; ‘Fnt. goanplujlq ,
Inf uulguunnLPIuJa-l h 'Fnc.
4wpmnn¢ PIuJu, I
'3’! 1"} qulUl
lenncw. illuq, Q-Quuqufivml L I’De‘hquJ”:
[Page 520]
520 THE BAHA’t WORLD
AZERBAIJAN] (AwlRBAYJANi, AZERI) (iran, Soviet Azerbaijan)
—- 4.4“ ‘51;- Hg—J ber’GJWM‘Pd‘
‘HUJ‘ ub5-5 oé—w: Wj—e‘fijfi p—woaw
‘—‘§r‘)ei'j,_.5 ‘HU,‘ 0ng WWH “UL—«htfi U'”W),J———5”O’__‘S’JHW
.._______mo.a__1.u-.__a.
BAGOBO: Gianga (Guianga) dialect (Philippine Islands)
Monna O nama k0, ngo poggali no ogo para kohaddon asta nikko. Mallo-o kloni mismo ngo hago lomilomit nikko keng kollos, ngo ogo keng kaayo-ayo, hikko keng malikoddo anda ottad ngo nama, hikko na eng kotawang neng hirap eng boy-yottow neng naw-wo mo.
BAJAU (BADJAO) (Borneo, Celebes, Sulu Archipelago)
Aku makasaksi, Ya Tuha ku, dah bay hinang aku ni katoo—nan maka ni duwaahan. Aku nulay ma kadjapan iti ni kalunaan maka ni kamiskinan ku maka dayan.
Mahananiya saddi Tuhan suga siga nabang ma kalaatan Kaulluman.
BENGALI (Bangladesh)
('9: ETHTZJ 3-31, @751 Inmar- «71? afitrz cam??? mfizfla my
.5131
czrmai 36m afima W, mi 7.12mi: Em?! 21:77 aficvfii 1
21% gycé ©7173: mam rrf‘éfln'a m: mam Uff: '49.; 9 mm:
WTfiEs Mt amm @wcém 2mm ?{ri‘csfii I
QB: 51:51 ma cwcm 31a RTE, fiz’rmmm ‘gr
fisa’mfi 1
BENGALI:
Assamese dialect
A {N
H? mama,
(Northeast India)
«mg,mim!wiwrti1camwmfifinmw°mma fit an? ’29 asfiah aiiz‘évfiwzsfimfimn,§fi
m, air min $8: 331%, gfi: mm, mm; mm zrfm‘ van:
wmifitil
[Page 521]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
521
BENGALI: Tripuri (Kok-Borok) T dialect (India)
. cm 551411? 5}“? WI. 1 W13, @1qu mm, :4: fifififl wn mi q'fw—m am :25 mm wmflm: I mm $TR-§§-3, gs mrfims, m fim—mm, ‘23 @133 flfir-e 31mm—mq: Ems mama wanna 5m? mm :’
‘w13-a aim}? u even fima m-sfu- gng-Raza,
itmw W411? 0: ca 333 l
BIHARI: Bhojpuri dialect (India)
aémwfimfléamfmamrafi firvz maeigmtsimfirtqm$fia1$s$raWn w E: m «a ma am fit: an éqffa wit an {I an «a? a 11767 at: w afaat am an 1 mum‘s! finmgmmggw gag afifi at q a? «mu? 11g l
mu % 3‘13 % fiat $55 117mm “a u {[0 :3 um 6:52?! it awry! an afmit
BIKOL (BICOL) (Philippine Islands)
Nagpapatotoo ako, O Dios ko, na linalang Mo ako na mamidbid Ika asin sambahon Ika. Nagpapatotoo ako, sa oras na ini, sa pagka dai k0 nin kapangyarihan asin sa Saimong Kusog, sa sakuyang kadukhaan asin sa Saimong kayamanan.
Dai nin ibang Dios kundi Ika, an Tabang sa Peligro, an Mismong Nagdadanay.
BILAAN (Philippine Islands)
Fnanglut go 0 Duwata na ge i ftabo deg na mimo deg agmade ge na mangamfo de ge. Gade go de kagkahon ani de klande gnagan go, dee de akgaganam de kablasok g0 na dee de kalgadom. Lande dame Duwata k0 la loghe dc lande sen kafyem na tabongam di kat sato de gami.
BISAYA (Sarawak, Borneo, Brunei)
Akujadie saksi, O Tuhan ku, Ikau nganjadie di jaie supaya aku ngatuie di Ijun. sarata nyambah di Ijun, Tito no aku mara, karana sangaie—ngaie no di jaie kurang, sangaie-ngaie no Ikau Yang Bakudarat, sarata ombo saja ontob alap ku, aku akan mamanau perintah Mu.
Onjop aro lagie Tuhan Yang lain, melainkan Ikau nga n0 Tuhan, Yang nulung musim suat susah, Yang Panakuara‘
BUKIDNON (Philippine Islands)
Testigosan k0, O Magbabaya k0, ha iyan ka nigtul—tul kanak ho pagkilala imo daw pagsimba imo. Matun-an k0 ha laus taini ha gutlo—a ha hura k0 agkabaloy daw sa gahum 110, sa ka pobre k0 da sa Bahandi no.
Hura un lain ha Magbabaya; kodi Ynaka, magbubulig ho Katalagman; nagkinaugalingun—ho Pagpanginabuhi.
BURMESE (Burma, Bangladesh)
s?:ngémooqaaqo: :vaél $996.0?336‘31 méqcfin s: géfiq co 5m cm 2:15 wfie’im‘Sma: 05:06:9m541méd‘5 debéaéknéu mi) mo mo
- mfiya mgécmfié fifl'gé: 95.53965 0'54:
cmSofigé: I mQém‘Sfi :05: §§G: 6h [‘35: 96_ 3:956 @60 eciqo: ['35: (1:396: l 055 6|
- uéa eooé,cgocfi cmSnacmo mooq mé cg.
cm’Sen 93:0 cogéymdl: I 59(32): uémaqqozg ego?
[Page 522]
522
THE BAHA’iWORLD
CHINESE
t ,
’fi mifi
.gwm%mm 3$i3W3FWE$ ' 3E”?
35.
4
3-?
$3M?“ fifivzfiWé-‘f-l‘ gfiwfih-T-‘r' $fififihfié' M§$?P‘£%‘ 3%4fiéfi?
InI
CUYUNON (Philippine Islands)
Naga testigo aco Dios co nga icao ang may buat canaquen, nga kilala ta cao ig ing gueguegman. Naga testigo aco sa mga oras nga dia Dios co nga inde sarang macacomparar ang aqueng keseg sa canimo ig ang aqueng calised sa imong manggad. Icaco Iamang ang Dios, ig icao lamang ang sarang macabawi canamen sa tanang cacorian.
DANGIT (India)
in men ?gwm, i mm HR m ncu- mammal 2m ngw gm sauna gm mm ‘m mg. m in 2m: mrfl gm’mm amt gvfl awn «mW-fi, mrll Mihflvfi (194x gall 11m!“ ENMm-{l mall 1mm.
g3 Rum ml $14M um! nm'l'. aw nag; ONMé azflmnmggt mun um “CNN.
fi
'PI a“);
- 55
Eéfixefinnb‘lflfie ‘ 4:1}? ®m~$+fi$mw%
1i
DAYAK, LAND (BIDAYUH): Bau dialect (Sarawak)
Oku mo ogi menyaksi, O Topa ku, nang Ingan m0 ogi nai Oku dah puan dup Ingan duch nyomah Ingan. Oku mo pikirien tarah adin itis dengan doii kuasa ku nudu kuasa Ingan de ayuh manah duoh dengan penyusah ku nudu pongipaguh lngan.
Doii loh Topa de bokun pakeh Ingan de jagin Penulung daang penyusah duoh de Pingidip.
DAYAK, LAND (BIDAYUH): Bukar Sadong (Tebakang) dialect (Sara wak, Borneo)
Aku jaji saksi ndug tanpa aku, akam mbuh ngundah supaya aku empuan akam serta lalu nyembah akam. Aku besaksi ndug iti seh, minan semoa pengurang kuasa aku ndug semoa pengagah akam, serta dingan pinyiranta aku dengan pingiraja akam.
Anyap tanpa da bekun masu akam, pinulung masa susah, pinulung adup.
[Page 523]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
DAYAK, SEA (IBAN) (Sarawak, Borneo)
Aku nyadi saksi ka Petara Aku. Nuan udah ngaga awak ka aku nemu Nuan sereta lalu nyembah Nuan. Aku besaksi ka diatu, ngena samoa pengurang kuasa aku, ka samoa pengering Nuan, sereta enggau penyeranta aku enggau pengeraja Nuan;
Nadai bisi Petara kalimpah ari Nuan, Penulong leboh Tusah, Penulong Diri.
GADDANG (GADDUNG)
Islands)
Pacuruhuan c0, 0 Bios c0, 56 pinaratunac ta quesi maamuan ta Ca 6 idayadayo ta Ca. Taddanggan cu, sitoya ya quinacafec c ya pacapanguam, ya diyariyat co 6 ya quinamayamannu.
Awan a corhuan a Dios nu baccan a Icca, na Acquisesalacan si Quetaggacan, na Acquitaronan.
(Philippine
GARHWALI (India)
Emma fr; rfl main war; 745 9‘ H215 WIT?” {inf} u}? ‘afi 2"? gm TUTTI ?an VHF gen: I ft: 21'? aw 11: W16}; Fa 3 mm 31"?“ aIfiat as, fa ‘Tfia’ m ah :3 HIGH, ft? QT: a? d1? HAW HE §€i 33 l
Ems amen :5: fl unam :fiar I ?a'IiI 7mm
523 GONDI: Bethul dialect (India)
a wma-aaw 3: #1? 3a q‘Iaa‘m vat: arm: fan itfi ark mama; 3?? ({er fiatfi {mt Irvzer’h I VI! fiafi awa‘tt mm 3H firm I? ma faara mafia, WI fawn era ngfi War W war wfia 3mm I
fa}? anfla inn mm fgfi, fwmefi 63? i?” 3W6, am fawn: «mam erIag‘Ima’Ia !
GUJARATI (India, Pakistan)
‘g wafi mug Q, 3 mm Mu, E <13 vam cm mil or am wu 8' u?! «will i). mu 3Q é mil glam NIH cu'x’l act‘aIGmu-mqvfl, mil diam MR mil aq'a'uucurll am mil amt?“ 2&3 am \Rumm-N‘rfl mail m3 553
HANTIK (ANTIQUENO) (Philippine Islands)
May pag testigo aco, O Guino-o co, nga—Icao ang nag himo canacon para mag quilala canimo, cag mag ampo sa atubang m0. Nag testigo aco sa sining memento, sa acon caluya cag sa imong ca cusog, sa acon ca pobrehon cag sa imong manggad.
Wara ron it iba nga Dios con indi kao, man 33' $021 q “T ?“m E"? 55 am mgr} anabang sa tanan capilogrohan cag ang 83mm fitmf fiv’j E} I mainantoson. HEBREW
.u‘m 31’7: 1133751
,mfix ,vanb mum
131'! ny-I‘a unmn nnx ’3
,D’JIR ‘IDI'I ’JK'! 7111:1171 1‘7 ’3 01’?! ’JR H117.)
.‘7:>:I ‘7unn :1an
71*:x1 sax 51
.umhyn vg‘m ,I‘I'IX ny: HJ‘IP ,vw‘vzm m‘m 73x
HINDI (India)
gin? ! ff weft 2mg % fimmfi fl‘r‘fi ?II'T 3'} gm afifir % 1%fo ff? 11%. Ezra fm 31 fifiamfifimzafifing ??an mg Hénfifirm %, fi #133 :J’Ir q main 3, 1‘? W g W q Wham? a I
a? flfdftfi' w afré WWII Hg? 3 I q it {sz‘fi'm Hiamfl a I
HINDI, EASTERN: Chhattisgarhi dialect (India, Nepal)
3 wk swarm, afgza tfit narg‘? :8 far afafi n‘mr emit 3H a‘tfir quafit (arfat us? #11 am $3 mfat I fifiaaaizaramaaghfi: u‘ttm‘ gg sma'} a: % afgfi gt afimfiafima Efifi I i? agar? zrfia g‘ra 5131 Ha? Tam $7 em? 3?! I ah? ream fla‘f {6? mm H: 3 I arfafit gm: «aw 31a :11 fit namar ant ma amt WT afgfi m WI f?f‘OR am: I
[Page 524]
524
ILOCANO (Philippine Islands)
Ipanecnecco, 0 Bios k0, a Sica ti namarsua caniac nga umammo Kenca ken mangidaydayaw Kenca. Panecnecac, iti daytoy a canito, ti kinacapuyco ken awan bilegco ken ti kinabilegmo, ti kinapanglawco ken ti kinabacnangmo.
Awan ti sabali a Dios n0 di Sica laeng, ti Catulong iti tiempo ti peggad, ti puon ken gubbuayan dagiti isu-amin.
ILONGGO (HILIGAYNON) (Philippine Islands)
Nagasaksi ako‘ O Guino-o k0, nga guinahimo M0 ako agud makakilala Jeao cag makahalad sa Imo. Naga pamatu-od ako sa subong nga ti-on sang akon kakabus cag sa Imo gahum, ang akon kapobre, cag sa Imo nga mangaranon.
Wala iban nga Guino—o kondi-Icao ang bulig sa katalagman ang mabinuhaton.
THE BAHA'I’ WORLD
JAHAI (Malaysia, Thailand)
Yek tanggongkan ley sa-bagai saksi, Mei Tuhan yek‘ Pai yei manjadik-kan yek ney gelong yek kenel Pai dan bersembahyang Pai. Yek luek saksi bahawa peryam ta’ah, ok Iemeh yek dan ok et at Pai maken basat yek dan Kayak Pai.
Berak Tuhan peu Chan lebah Pai, Tulung keleng Bahayak. yang Henjan Belak.
JAKUN (Malaysia)
H’ma ména-ngongkan dirik sabagai saksi, O Tuhan h’ma, bahawak Ajeh télah ménjadikan h’ma ontok méngénoo Ajeh dan sémayang Ajeh. H’ma naik saksi, pada masa ka, akan kéléhoman h’ma dan kudrat Ajeh, padah képapaan h’ma dan kékayaan Ajeh.
Hémpak Tuhan lain daripada Ajeh, Ménulung dalam Chélaka, Yang Bérdirik Séndirik.
JAPANESE
.J
.cxw
?ftwfi—é .} 'xI-v’
- 35"
r J
39"‘3- ”V?“ 7 37‘
D} fisdthby
p(“rrJLjdakTfl?
Q. ~::3*
l J
I l I
Tw“ , 3~V —§ 3
77
i. ~Wéfi‘ mrvuetwtxht.‘
35‘
«1% 33%. T—gfl
Si‘bfifn-U ~m73fipw
(
H mn-HV’E?
KALINGA Islands)
(KALINGGA) (Philippine
Sacan y testigo O Diosco nga Sicaw y namaravvu ta niacan tape nu ammuattaca anna dayawattaca. Testguaccu ta sangaw y cawaccu
7T“? Iii
\‘ 1 l 1'; 0)
<1
' € f
MV‘PX m ””4“” .7»: 5*
. 5*
I U
- Q&~%
03* NA}? waxfig‘fivwmay
( J
tu awa-awayya anna y dacal nga pacawayyam; to quinapobre anna ta quinaricum.
Awatta tanacuan nga Dios nu ari laman Sicsicaw; y Cabbag ta tiempo na ziga anna Mangyawa ta ngamin nga mawmawag.
[Page 525]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
525
KANNADA (KANARESE) (India)
dean, 333434 580303! M39 n33, 25¢ sh amazes Nab 663155.113 2H»: weeds; 250330; ms» mass, M859 geaood.
ya. zomaor!
KASHMIR] (India, Pakistan)
um; J?,(U/A m K 1/ )L‘
yu LI}; dljd V900) #Mlyu’flu W)» (,6) J 5kiy62upia JJ#J/)
- 5 bfrdbingflmi’, t2} upr/{ubw
‘: ‘A’ ~VJ—U)}"d;r d’IHB’W/LU '1
KAYAN (Borneo, Sarawak)
AKUI NAH ITUNG TAKSI KA’, O TUHAN. TENANGAN KUI, IKA’ ALENG UH NYELUNG AKUI NAI JADI’ JAM IKA’ DAHIN NYEPIDA IKA’. KERAI NIH AKUI BARA LEMA KUI KATYAHA DAHIN KUASA KA‘, KETAH KUI DAHIN KAYA’ KA’. USI’TE’ KET ALENG HA
83:3 64363.) :5on dead» fig.
835 *ai 2903300» $5033. mas: uabed, M55; fad“ mam mo duh hcmuficxjgd, gm
BEH DENG SENG AK KATALAU LA’AN MEH UH TENANGAN BIH IKA’TUA, ALENG NYEKANG AKUI, ALENG TE’ MURIP NYELIMAN.
KHALKHA (MONGOLIAN) (Mongolia, China, Tibet, U.S.S.R.)
T3Hr3p Ta! Ta Hamafir 6m71 60111‘0001-1 HL 614 TaHbIF Mmax 6a xYHnaTraxnfiH Tenee I-OM ranmfir 6M rapqnabe. BM 0300 n MHHnfi qananrYfir, TaHbI qauamafir 6a anfirYYr MKHb, 6a2nrbu‘ ‘1qu rapqmbe.
TaHaac eep T3Hr3p 6a171er17I, Ta 63px 3osnourn17m 110Top naHaaa aspan Tyc 6aFIHa naa. Ta eepee aMb 3yyrq T3Hr3p }OM.
KHMER (CAMBODIAN) (Kampuchea, Thailand, Vietnam) uaLaanmgm éngasgmngwmm anigmsm§fi§ si'mjeJ rgmenmnganzaé 1 gmnmssmgaungwfinmétsydawa'aééa maééumudswmg mefirfiémwnié éanumsmafiéfiaunil’nng ‘1 thfianngmm msanmgmilnmgmwnemmfifiumsflm angmgfigujimwzqgfiwadmmtj m:ngnmmmég ‘l
KOREAN (China, Japan, Korea)
6¥*E. Hl’} vg‘oflfflfi- COM] 16V|°4 EL"? $51 73 “H 1 W3» 1-0] LP Xl’} 0] 17740415 11 3L CLAIQI ILV16}. A]%_ '[ glglv‘ 2+ 9' CF
- 64 3% 2+1 4 ogg-aL-s-urol
4L].
Cp/qioV O», P
_L—, EDAI \. O \_
[Page 526]
526
KUI (KHONDI) (India) afaq angel :0, wea, 9ch qqcII ®I°§ 4°C"
m we qua ammo 4Q om Qlé) ecu, cqac: I aIQqco
mlq am am rmI cm aIgI QQIQIQ, WI quggI 4°91
QIQI QQI QIQ QIgI eea |
awa QQIQI ac: 4%] Q €04 caat QQQI QawI mm m saw amIQveIeIeIQ QIQI om exam I
KUMAUNI (India, Nepal)
(KOUMANI, KUMAONI)
% €331, m 3T3} anqn-antqar mfir, argfbr 3m fem Eifr Um $3, ‘1 ha: grief él H ma amivr WEI aI’rI ?Ifi atrfifz EI, mfifbr arfifvr slam" in ‘a’r‘x atw’fi mrfin‘a #1an I
B éfi- WTfi-‘I , fifirfi air g}? 97f; a‘r ah 1351 mfm I
KURDISH (Afghanistan, Armenian S.S.R., Iran, ‘Irdq, Syria, Turkey)
LLL/ " 2 —’/JJIJ£C§;~¢[-ujngR—i—z
/
. ‘l . . l l Pydofc ”)le )fl
651? {"23;;DL -' :leJ
. / , - . oJl’ydgpf 'J’LfLL: 0) [1)?
(JAG/L ,- ~ y(qtb);)Ua/},J
9ng 51,4; quLU
'5. . _ //. L_x/ 65L 5.,“ij AA r“
uLjv
THE Bahá’í WORLD
LAMBADII‘ (India)
firs‘ox‘ 351 543351 8'5 33° s’éa‘fié 68 ar 55‘ SS‘; 6&231135' 0200595 860-5 569”? 595§S EE‘Q'S 53%? {3-5535 5*9 MS 641 35: 8‘ £2.55“ '3: 36w 5°65) 3530‘ :5" 5'5 $3? §?55‘ {3 m8. 544 35: am» s‘awo 3-6685:B‘U‘oifg (3337‘ zSemfig‘So. 5°5— [5&3 a6 63m $235 Max: 5,6321. $523.“ $05 5). 5% 5'93" 5‘65) 5&1; 33;.
LAO (LAOTIAN) (Laos, Thailand)
.. _ .. h F - I y- .. u. u 19 uszwwumaewszgjIUuwzmuaI ngtdunflnauea . uszsfimna:21ws:§)és'315ws:§]uaufiIs’ungsze—j 2mm] . u v .6 u u I- .- l u.cduuusa‘nnaunomupumamsajmuszs1(m:nmmuqujmquI . .. A l a .. i umaswsmm m:nnmua‘naugueawswm 1n u - b- ,(A v .. k .. v uuwsmcducvgjeu‘ln uaniInus:I-3<Uut11ws:9jnlja. m . . .. .. . . A . . .. v, I .. .. .n qflummuqoucmaa'iumsg'iuemgunsw, mmimnmucUUQa .
on gun
MALAY (Malaysia, Indonesia)
Saya ménanggongkan diri sa-bagai saksi, Ya Tuhan saya, bahawa Kamu télah ménjadikan saya untok méngénal Kamu dan bérsémbahyang Kamu. Saya naik saksi, pada béntar ini, akan kélémahan saya dan kudrat Kamu, kapada kémiskinan saya dan kékayaan Kamu.
Tiada Tuhan lain daripada Kamu, Pénolong dalam Bahaya, Yang Bérdir Séndiri.
MALAYALAM (India, including Laccadive Islands)
swarm”. mam“ ngwr'm @W‘Bfi‘ mama nmmMa” mm%1@amomu, mom nmmhoe" apfl marrooomaml. g9” mambo. m mImfimlm ngmnbo wmelgoWa. mmwas wm'kwa, Amado GooIQamo, mmqos (mango mam mIW. mo W069.
magnum maooan maemngaWE—mlmm Iceman, mhwmbo.
[Page 527]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
527
MALDIVIAN (DIVEHI BAS) Divehi character (Maldive Islands Minicoy Island)
0/;zv/ 07/ ‘71)» 2/! f2)/ fffig’j/f o/>/
9/ 0// // 0/?)
<0 4) / )fé;>"’w4
0/ <0
\x/D/
7V
c A/
”/0/
7/ fiV"/’W8/2/V f’V/fl fx' JJ'JJ‘WGD/v z“; j};
C/ 4/
(7/ 3
'Von mny é‘yV/y £2» '}ny/)/1 //~/ ,3 ‘97} f/ / //// </ </'// /-0/o>/> <0 //
‘avr 4X71! 5:7"; .57» 4’» 27" 57?”)? J/gy // / / c 0 // 3 / 4/ // 0 C x > ,
74 guva/ v73 ”“2951 YXV/fey/g/s 55’; §,—0// // (’C 1 C 4 //./¢ 0./ // ; J /} // 0C J/
)7" 9/13 1.9 3/5 J/V/I J’VQV /’/ {12’2" ff” V/
MALDIVIAN (DIVEHI BAS) Latin character (Maldive Islands, Minicoy leand)
Alhaa hedhdhevi kalakko!
Hasuvaameenge dheelathi vaatha kamua alhaa ufadhdhavaa fai vanee Hasuvaameenge ah alhukan kusumahttakai kamah alhu hekivameve. Mihin‘dhu alhu hehivameve. Alhaa ge mikamethi kamashaai Hasuvaameenge kulhadhun vantha kamah adhi alhaa ge mikamethi kamashaai Hasuvaameenge fudhi—vodigen vaa kameve. Hasuvaameenge fiyavai Haahaku neiy kamashaai hunihaa kamakah ekalaange dhemivodigen vaa kamah hekivaaieve.
MANOBO+ (Philippine Islands)
Bannalan ko no kaddin nad Langagan na id baballan do siak amid killa kikaw owayd simba kikaw, Kaddin nad pangintowan kaungkay edda kaddin wara sadda tat kikawn katussan oway edda kikawn katussan tat kaddin kapobrian oway tat kikawn kayamanan.
Warad as-san manama gawas kikaw, eddad tabang ta kahimpan, oway naantay ta salili rin.
MARATHI (India)
ngr! gmamfifir mmmfir q mfif’mm
marufiam.fifiréaan%a'<q mm,fifiéaafifi qaémamgw! sriwfi mewfi cam. memm fiqfiamm.
MELANAU: Mukah dialect (Sarawak)
Akou menyaksi, O Tuhan kou, wak Ka’au menyadin akou itou bei-lah bak mena’au Ka’au jegum bak menyembah Ka’au. Ajau itou kawak akou menyader ji—wak lemah akou jegum ji-wak kuasa nyat Ka’au, kawak ji—wak miskin akou jegum ji—wak kaya raya Ka’au.
Nda bei Tuhan ke keman Ka’au, un wak kena bak Menuluong akou Lian Susah, jegum Lian Lubieng Siksa.
MELANAU: Oya/Dalat dialect (Sarawak)
Ako menyaksi, O Tuhan k0 ien Kaau nga manamangun ako ba ta-au Kaau jegum ba menyebah Kaau. Ako pasadei jaka ito, ji ako nda bei kekuasa jad jegum Kaau a-kuasa temegah, ji ga k0 a-sase jegum ga Kaau a-kaya berkuasa. Ien lah nda bei Tuhan ke kida Kaau, a Menyapul Mara-bahaya Udipan Kakal.
[Page 528]
528 THE BAHA’EWORLD
NEPALI (NEPALESE) (Nepal, Sikkim)
a 2m {53? ! Ir Hm? ffig fa? ?th mi fa'sr, mar nfir fair gar fiat mi fan? 3? wrfi 36cm ma”! I tr ufgér 1ft WEN H&q fia- q uma fig, ER fatfi W'srfqatna 3‘1, :1 aft: q, fan? Hé WW 31, am 17 gig fig, fem? «é «mi :51 I
farm nfaftara W g: WWII 33 l fan”! a 3‘1 warms H'aszm amt am qaf' 11W fair I
ORIYA (India)
mag; SDIéTQI aIé) 63 aacIQ-Q aalgol SIC) emquléj 96199; 99; 99 I 91’ gm 90929, <16) 916953199, i quQ QQQIQQI (a aama agqa, QQIQ 96m (3 219an mm gala @099!
@9099 9912; 63 2194-909 UIQG alé mam 9a 210% cm mm
QIQIQ | ’
ORIYA: Halbi (Halabi) dialect (India)
a zfia‘I mam I zfia‘t q &a q «725 it e31 fa: git 11% qw% snaa‘tt #tma‘tt $15? 3113? qua? 1m awn fin} 33‘er m arm I w‘r% q rfia «a aim? fii q‘ta‘t arfi W fiafvw 3:} férgm, amt 1113‘! mi $856 an unit in? ma imam 31m, theft 5 $33: Wfta’T 3n5r, mat qua} Em mam «'5: mm am? I 1W3? ma anat fix} warm fin, afir far: i it um. figfl HI-vza‘I-fin HEWEF arm I
PALAWANON (Philippine Islands)
SAKSI AKO O DAKEN AMPO NA BLUAL MO AKO AMPANG KUMILALA DIMO AT SUMIOM SA DIMO. SUMASAKSI AKO SA DAKEN KAYANG BASAG AT SA DIMONG BASAG, SA DAKEN KALYUTAN AT KODYONG KAKAYAHAN.
KAYA IBA FANG AMPO LIBAN DIMO ANG TABANG SA MAGKAKLAS, ANG SARIRING HANGALO.
PANGASINAN* (Philippine Islands)
SAMBAAN KO, 0 DIOS KO, YA SIKAY AMALSA ED SIAK PIAN KABATEN TAKA, TAN GALANGEN TAKA. TESTIGUAN KO ED SAYAN BEKTA SO KAKAPOYAN KO TAN SAY PAKAPANYARIM, SAY KAPOBRIYAN KO TAN SAY INKAYAMAN MO.
ANGGAPOY AROM A DIOS NO AGSAY SIKA, MANANULONG ED KAIRAPAN, ONTALINDEG -ED-KABUKBUKORAN.
PANJABI (PUNJABI): Gurmukhi character (India, Pakistan)
5 fia HEW fififlseafi'ffin m1 ifaIaif aéigftnaiigauaaibfi ‘ figure: né fiflgmaaII’szn n nflava aw aim Wm n65 mamas 3‘, Efiflhéi uafi 5"Iaéfaaign?‘ afl man? i tflauwanénaa MEI
E'
213,
31! 1.!
[Page 529]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
PANJABI (PUNJABI): Persian character (India, Pakistan)
‘6)bIm/wflu: 1.1 2.594;. buhalld'l 2—41 W5” uI/u‘ldr'd; LyLuIIflyI b JJWI¢:Q{I:; LIL 441,14.ij wiry: 51/1,: y} W bc-JW .uniun-o dwdngdwf
PULA Islands)
(MANGYANPULA) (Philippine
Kangko patuhuyan gid, O kangko Panginoong Dios, ako gid kanmo binu’ at hampay kawo ay kilalanon kag sambahon. Kangko patuhuyan inda pag udas sa kanme on man may kapangyarihan kag sa kanmo pakusog sa kangko pagkurian kag sa kanmo pag mangarangon.
On man may Panginoong Dios n0 kontay kawo lamang ti umawat sa tanan nga palad kag 5a on man may katabuha.
PORTUGUESE, MALACCA CREOLE (PAPIA KRISTANG) (Malaysia)
Jenti ja beng, you-sé Deyu, pra fala Bos ja faze ku yo supayé yo mesti sabe dan reza ku Bos. Agoré—agoré yo ta testifika yo mulyadu dan Bos forti; yo pobri dan Bos riku.
Nte utu Deyu, teng Bos nsong, keng ta juda ku nu na tempu di ma] fortuna, Bos keng nggere utu jenti pra juda ku Bos.
RAJASTHANI (India, Pakistan)
ir tern turn?“ Y3 era 23:“ é 7* ur‘a Emit «WEI, qrf‘r gar W‘I 1W9! fr gfiaawf‘w‘r‘zl Mwa‘fiilrfi aqa‘rn' 3i mi? amrfiTUfi. 336W ’1 mfr iaiar 3i qzqrfin‘a 25$ g I m‘z faar a‘Tz fliwqramé‘r‘m ‘46; aka: WW" arg‘rkq’r arrié'a‘a I
529
RAJASTHANI: Gujuri dialect (India, Pakistan)
\>x}’&wfié—\U{\:>LS:J\SQ_,EI
GMLMLQIMS‘VIQQULJ/
(£50qu, ($531M &w\,
L"\-Lkb64;~6;qbgs'jl
694-! L9Li>LL52LoqujI
C2.)k$¢‘IG/|A33|/;£_L5,de /
IJTUM/GLWULé‘fi)/fi
RAJASTHANI: Marwari dialect (India, Pakistan) 3 ésrat ! a mzfi éa’ H. .anm % arfi
am am gm $15? en? E? Wfl’ Era} fish a: I tr q ma #3; m6 :7: Fm ii fwéa H; 1172 q «a'm‘aama H211 wfia E" wk 31 aga air air: am If g“; If am q «ma =I: I H? 1mm 3111 ms? crttnem $13? 1 =3 111mm rhea :I' enzmr =IT. {fit mum (T: |
SAMAL (SAMAL BAHASA) (Philippine Islands)
Ad’u makasaksi, Ya Tuhan ku, dah bay hinang aku ni katoonan maka ni duwaahan. Aku nulay ma kadjapan iti ni kalunaan maka ni kamiskinan ku maka dayah Mahananiya sakki Tuhan Suga Siga nabang ma kalaatan kaulluman.
SANSKRIT
STE“ mafi sri‘w I E III: suit I at «fling fifag’ 3 am? sm'aa: I zarémg' anw3a‘amm:, aa srfira 3mm: aaftzam: 63 a6? awaramrz mafi :1me I
m agmefiz, 3,1wa33%. a? ram,
afiscam: mum anea I
[Page 530]
530
SEBUANO (CEBUANO. (Philippine lemnls)
VISAYAN)
Saksihan k0, O Diyos k0. nga Ikaw mao ang naglalang kanako sa pag-ila Kanimo ug pagsimba Kanimo. Matud-an k0 niining gutloa, sa akong kawalay mahimo ug sa Imong gahom, sa akong kakabus ug sa Imong bahandi.
Wala nay laing Diyos kondili Ikaw‘ ang tabang sa katalagman, ang Nagkinaugalingong—Pagkinabuhi.
SENOI: SEMAI (CENTRAL SAKAI):
(Malaysia, Indonesia)
Eng ménanggonkan bérok ng sabagai saksi, Ya Tuhan eng, ajeh-lah Jun télah pérjadikan ha eng untok ha pannei ha-Jun ru ha sém THE BAHA'I’ WORLD
bahyang ha—Jun. Eng pérhut saksi, ku-ma Séadeh, ha kélémahan eng ru ha kékuasaan Jun, ru ha nahajap eng ru ha kénayak Jun. Walah Tuhan asik ju padérJun. Jun Pénolok kate Bahaya. yang dér Chukup Jun Séndiri.
SENOI: TEMIAR (NORTHERN SAKAI) (Malaysia)
Yeeq menanggongkan diri yeeq-deh re saksi, O Tuhan yeeq, naq Haaq—top menteqelkan yeeq untok neh-neh Haaq wab bersembahyang Haaq, Yeeq naik saksi, ma-mentardeh, akan teq bersil yeeq wab bersil Haaq, kapada kemiskinan yeeq wab kekayaan Haaq.
Hoi Tuhan yang moi num Haaq, Pembeseh dallam Bahaya, yang Ehtet tet tenaq.
SINDHI (India, Pakistan)
”smwubrg u..ng p {rk'fEJz flea! g HM.)
5 5:44. = 5%» 6w
¢§44 U" U: u” '3“
- - 535%); W E “.5115 6342;49:3919 6&9
4,2 ‘1,” 015,: .gotgjs 50an 16“.”? 9.59:5 59’
92"! r 3‘24?) gw
,. 0,: «rd ,3,c_—. le
.Ufifl Jig 0L. £85552» 0;; W.
SINHALESE (SINHALA) (Sri Lanka) 33667 scams}, aa awake? cpaoah’o no (9138053, m omega
aad‘zmo 8892:? 6am: ea Oma‘bd’ an azg aoo ea 6:238 008.
9:) Ga?
géocdao cm 8:996? mafiaafi’, aacts? 4123625230 cm 6606? Gesamocozsad’
8&3228, G§ Gaoemaomfig 68 2502mm? 08$.
cagacd’g (zoom mozfi’mggzfi ®mt§°8Q5Y, CM Omaha” and 000
Gaa omcazfi mm.
TAGALOG (FILIPINO) (Philippine Islands)
Ako ay sumasaksi, O Diyos ko, na ako ay Iyong nilikha upang Ikaw ay kilalanin at sambahin. Aking pinatutunayan, sa mga sandaling ito, and aking kawalan ng kapangyarihan at
ang Iyong lakas, sa aking karukhaan at and Iyong kayamanan.
Walang ibang Panginoong Diyos maliban sa Iyo, ang Siyang Tumutulong sa lahat ng panganib at ang Walang Kawakasan.
[Page 531]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
TAGBANUA (Philippine Islands)
Taksi aka 0 Dios k0 nga pianak manan mo ako nga sumonod Kanimo baw ikaw e nag buat kanaum. Natandaan k0 kayte nga yon kiarotan k0 nga sabap, kanimo baw kat Kakorongan k0 daasi kat ka doonan k0 baw yan Kadoonan m0.
Uga nay bakun ng Dios ekaw lamang, nga mananabang et Kakorean baw Ka gayonan et usa baw usa.
TAMIL (India, Malaysia, Sri Lanka)
mair m_Gquvr, 913153671 43296;) 61le UGsufifi) 635me ma'n&m_) umLfi'S/qué 9/3/11 mmugflg 56min, 675157 uwé‘mifip‘agtb s_lipsin
rsrrG'sar anQ. @g
ova'vwanwdgtb. 6151i: wgmmé®tb a_téga'n
056116111153,“sz :wLQuJLb aya’o‘flldw. gu§§sfi 3521114515,
gléama'n/n? Gay wngflsbaa).
5U Z®QJLLIT€UT
TAW SUG (JOLOANO SULU) (Philippine Islands, Borneo)
Aku, in saksi, O Allah, ikaw in nagpapanjari kaku, umingat kaimu iban magsumba kaimu. Sapahan ku ha way kung ku iban ha gaus mu ha ka miskin ku iban ha daya mu.
Wayruun dugaing Tuhan hambuilk-buuk da ikaw, tabang ha kasusahan, in way nagpapanjari.
TELUGU (India) a 10" "am. 31% mu £1 K3800
531
meg‘mag gm); {réodmbé 5330mm 353mm €15» 7.111565%.) ammwgam 21159:) aw—éd avg; 33 nomcsm 6e amowasofig 5313:1115».
1151606" nfi‘vfix mfg .6005) m5 363315313303 35° mags 66°) aoemrv 36>.
TEMUANT (Malaysia)
Akuk menanggongkan dighik sabagai saksi, Yak Tuhan—Kuk, bahawak—lah Ong, telah menjadikan akuk untok mengenal dan memujik Ong. Akuk nait saksi, padak waketu nin, akan kelemah akuk dan kekuasak Ong, kemiskinan akuk dan kekayak Ong.
Nyap adak Tuhan melainkan Ong, Pelindong dalam Bahaya, yang Bedighik Sendighik. THAI (Thailand)
., 1 v ‘1 v' y u fl] : IE] ‘IJWLLHWYZELUHLTI ?WWLWWEIBLUHWEJWHY‘I
11738111 15mmfiammfiwwyflfiififnwnmfi Lmz‘lfi a r h p ., v «1 u (
NTTLNTIUWTZENH lummzmnww11fltuuflfiz1nuwmu
p I v: v o l/ p 1 X LLfiVWUn’W‘ITDWfiJ BWHFWUJ‘IJWWWWWBQYI‘ELWH‘UDJ mzmfi viammfimmawfiwnfiumd0111111113613 ‘IJUJWTSPNé
Mwmfifiulfiuanmnwnmé Wizaofié ma‘fiwlumfimm LLaxw‘sxmfigmafiwamflméwfi
TIBETAN CENTRAL (BHOTIA): Lhasa (Dbus) dialect (Tibet,1ndia)
1311113111111111111119151111111 1111131 $3111 fifi'qj‘ziiqAfiqm—§aa {\Wfilfifi 114-14775“qu “411 111M311361111‘1111‘1 111141¥m5fi1
11111111111311‘1
351:1 413:11 <15qu 154141113
“71 a‘sgflaaaaakmn mu: $1
1 “11““ $1 “R‘%“1@\°1
31"01181'U4311 “7110 611111 361161 RannmN an «1
1‘1 11111111111111“ 1
‘97? “i “311
[Page 532]
532
TIRURAY (Philippine Islands)
Ge-tindego k0 Tulus si be-em me’y le—menimbag ge begen inok ge-tuwa ku be-em brab ge-datu—o k0 be—em. Ge-safa—a ku bene’y enda e ke-ataga ku brab ati’y barakat Mu-we, e ke-meskina ku-we brab keungangen mu-we.
Enda e se-giyo Tulus we-e Be-em sa-en, e Temabang ngo enok u-wen ni kamarasayan, e Turun.
TULUT (India)
3:38 2 5.8;» some ma‘. “Q86“ gm, 53:38 mw acrosma‘ $$$ch dsgo‘. 03mm 2531, moéaacfi)?é¢o* zidoé, 05mg? udi. 690‘ @(35305.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
610‘ 2.400336 3‘30‘. éao‘ Emma“ 23mm
- 3035202 336: 3:52;?
L dew
QNSSEO‘EJE 658e,
TURKISH
Iléhi! Senin, beni, Seni tanimak ve Sana tapmak igin yaratmi§ olduguna gahadet ederim. Su anda kendi ac-zime ve Senin Kuvvetine; kendi zaafima ve Senin iktidarina ve kendi fakirligime ve senin wzenginligine taniklik ediyorum. Mfiheymin 've Kayyum Iléh ancak Sen sin.
TURKMEN (TURKOMAN) (Afghanistan, irdn, Turkmen S.S.R.)
/
()JfJ)/¥’l’.j"/ULl_‘(f/U/ fiUW’V/d/ (L_L/UJJ/ff/
4»wa Q’JEI/QJL; gqyfigagj gnu
fox) f3? 1y; 34¢} wfrA JWQ
/
( 5/,15LJU/JMQJ/a2.’ 4&1-) w/JJJLJJ
/ A ‘ . “3-. . . Vfl/rgz at)» h) isms uMw.’
VIETNAMESE (Indochina)
Luy 'lhuqng-DE cfin r'nn, cnn xiu chin“,I nllz'ul rfing N(‘IUO'I, ([5 Ian cnn db men 1m NGUO’I. dt- 1le mo NGUO’I. Con xin (lul-nhiln nguy hxc m‘ly con Hull 11‘: biiLthr lru't'vc uy-h‘rc
(I'm NUL‘UI vh ughéomz‘m [mac >1; pluong-llhu cfla NGC‘UI.
Khimgcb ni ngohi NGUO‘I 151 Thuo'ng BF, Natrm 1:. BiugCfl-annC) C1‘ru.r:}n Bing TI_r.Ti3n Ttg-Ttpi,
WARAY (SAMAR-LEYTE, SAMARENO, WARAYWARAY) (Philippine Islands)
Testigos ako Nimo, Dios namon, nga Ikaw an naghimo ha acon para kilal-on ka ngan tuuron. Natuod ako hini yana nga oras nga waray aco gahom ug ha imo gahom, ha acon kawarayan ug ha imo caricohan.
Waray na iba nga Dios con diri Ikaw, ma naracop han maka-luluoy, ug mga waray na
paglaom.
[Page 533]
BAHA’I BIBLIOGRAPHY
533
D. AUSTRALASIA AND THE PACIFIC ISLANDS
- Denotes revised translation
T Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
BAINING (New Britain Island, Papua New Guinea)
Ngo tes nas. aingo gu Kalau. Sa na rong na nge ivengo taram inge dilotu. Ai langit ingo koir kunga kurot dap ai nge di di kurot. Aingo di ama ralak ka na ngo dap a inge di ama hurong bara ka na nge. Ai re Varivat ki di koir a nga Kalau dokop sokop nge. Katat naramut na mara ma guvengirong, kosaki koir memar varung dokop sokop e Lalau.
CHAMORRO (Guam and orher Mariana Islands)
Mandeklara yo’, si Us’us—hu, na un fatinos yo’ ya para bai bu tungo’ Hao yan para bai hu adora Hao. Tumestitigu yo’ pago’ na Memento, ni tai nina’ sina—hu yan ma acompara gi fuetsa-mu, i pobla-hu yan i Abundasia-mu Taya mas ke guaiya na Yu’us i a’ayuda gi pelegro i todo i tiempo layana na Yu’us.
EASTER ISLAND (PASCUENSE) (Easter Island)
Au testigo, o tooku AtL’la, a au ianga i iaau memahani i atu i a koe. Hanga rahi i te horo nei taaku mee hanga rahi tamee itau tetahi mee i tau ono.
Ina tetahi Atl’la k0 koe noma, tangata moaina ite ati, tangata mohapao ia ia tangata riva riva.
EFATE (EFATESEML (New Hebrides)
A noa pae nalomauana Supe anginau, O! Nanga ningo ku dawonaki nau nanga anga ataeko p0 do lotu kingo. Doko rangi waia a noa pae nalomauana nanga kinau a manainai ngo a dika nakasuana ma ningo ku peani nakasuana waina e parua liu; a pei tea tika sa Ina ningo kupei tea songolapa ki sara naleo.
Ningo ku masikima pei Supe, ku silae doko rangi ni nariesokiana ngo ku mariatae dumarha doko pae nakasuana aningo masikima.
FIJIAN (Fiji Islands)
Au sa qai kila, O i Kemuni na noqu Kalou, ni sa 1 Kemuni ga Koni a vakatuburi au mai me’u kilai Kemuni ka dau masu vei Kemuni. Au sa kila tu 6 na gauna oqo ni’u sa ka malumalumu wale Koni sa kaukauwa K0 i Kemuni, ni’u sa ligalala Koni sa vutuniyau K0 i Kemuni.
Sa sega tale ni dua na Kalou au kila sa i Kemuni duadua ga, O i Kemuni Koni sa Dauveivukei 6 na Guana ni Leqa, O i Kemuni na Kalou Bula Vakai Koya ga.
FUTUNA (Futuna (Hoorn) Islands)
Ekau tui maoki loku Atua, na ke faka tupu au ke kau iloa ma atolasio ki lou agai.
Ekau tui maoki ile temi nei, iloku gaegae ki lou puleaga, loku mativa ki lou kalasia.
Tie kau tui fuai kile Atua etasi, kole pule taualuga m0 mafimafi.
Eina saofaki tatou mei le fakasala, mo tuutamaki kesekese ole malama.
GILBERTESE (Kiribati, Ocean
Island)
Nauru,
Atuau, I kaotia ma te koaua ba K0 a tia ni karikai ba N na ataiko, N na tangiriko 30 N na noboiko. A0 I kaotia n te tai aei ba boni moan te m’aaka Ngkoe a0 ngai boni moan te mangori. Moan te korakora Ngkoe a0 ngai boni moan te kainnano. Bon akea te Atua temanna ba ti Ngkoo ae K0 maiu i bon Iroum a0 te Tia Buokiira.
HAWAIIAN (Hawaiian Islands)
KE HI’I NEI AU I KA’U HOIKE, E KUU AKUA, UA HANA MAI OE IA’U E IKE IA OE A E HOOMANA IA OE. KE HOIKE NEI AU, I KEIA MANAWA, I KO’U PALUPALU A I KOU IKAIKA I KO’U ILIHUNE A I KOU WAIWAI. AOLE HE AKUA E A’E O OE WALE NO, KE KOKUA I KA MANAWA POINNO, KE KOKUA O KEIA KINO NOU NA POMAIKA’I.
[Page 534]
534
KOSRAEAN Caroline Islands)
(KUSAIEAN) (Eastern
Nga fwakak, O God luk Kom oreyula nga in ete kom a in alu nu Sum, Nga fwakak ingena ke munas luk 21 kc ku Lom, nu ke sukasrup luk a ke kasrup Lom.
Mangin God Sayom, mwe kasre kut in pal in fosrgna, a ma ku in sifwana.
LAU (Solomon Islands)
Nau ku fa mamana 06, a God nau, na 0, haungai nau, uria kua haitamamu, ma kua foa hatamu. Nau ku fito_0mu asi kada na, kua alua makeso la nau gi, i fafo na rigita la 06, na siofa la new i fafo na initwa oe, e langi lau ta God, teeni 0e na, na fufa kada ana ta’a la, ma 3 toto firi.
LIFU (LIFOUAN) (Loyalty Islands)
Akétesie ti fe, nyipici koi ni [aka Cilie la Atre xupi ni matte troni a adraié Cilie. Ini a 6hne hnyawa enehila laka Atre ka kucakuca ni, nge thei Cilie Ia egécatr. Atre ka pé mo ni, nge Cilie la trenamo.
Nyipici, péké’) ketre Akétesie hui Enétilai, Joxu, la Atre i xatua ngéne la ijine hace, la Atre ka cilehuti epinéti palua.
MAORI, COOK ISLANDS (RAROTONGAN) (Cook Islands)
K0 au te kite E taku Atua e Naau an i anga mai kia kite ia Koe e kia akamori ia Koe. Te akapapu nei an i teia nei i toku puapingakore e i Toou ririnui, ki toku putaua e ki Toou ki e manganui. Kare atu e Atua ke mari ra k0 Koe anake, te Tauturu i roto i te tuatau o te kino, te Tauturu o te oraanga.
MAQRI, NEW ZEALAND* (New Zealand)
E meinga ana e an, E toku Atua, Néu an i hanga kia mohio ki a Koe a kia koropiko ki a er. E whaka puaki ana au, i tenei wa, ki toku ngoikore a ki Téu kaha, ki toku pohara a ki Tou oranga.
Kahore he Atua i tua atu k0 Koe anake, te Awhina i roto i te Mate, te Mana noho Motuhake.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
MARSHALLESE (Marshall Islands)
Ij, kamol, 0 a0 Anij, bwe Kwoar komanmon io bwe in jela kin Yuk. Ij kwalok, kio, kin mwojno k0 a0, nae Kajur e0 Am, kin jeramol 60 a0, nae maron 60 Am. Ejelok bar Anij ijelokim, Dri jiban ilo ien ban, Dri binmur ilo ien otemjij.
MELE: Fila dialect (Fila and Efate Islands, New Hebrides)
Feuia foki akoe Atua akoe gani konia auau sirtaea akoe, go akoe gani komaro. Tmaramararaga niau iaro maramana poulapa, kit teulia go mujia miefa geia Imouriraga. G0 kainugia foki akoe geia nekekela gani mafitlakena toturu akoe Atua.
MOTU, HIRI (Papua New Guinea)
Lau hereva momokani, lauegu Dirava e, Oi 656 Ian karaia Oi diba bona Oi tomadiho henia gwauraia. Lau gwauraia, harihari, lauegu manoka bona Oiemu goada dekenai, lauegu ogogami bona Oiemu kohu dekenai.
Dirava ta be lasi, Oi sibona, Durua—DikaDekenai, Sibona-Noho Diravana.
NENGONE (MAREEN) (Loyalty Islands)
K010 ca Madrarungo, uni ci asesekoni, k0 hnei Buango hna puli nu thu bane carajewe du Buango, ne ahmani Buango, inu ci waamilu du Buango ri gula hawa ome, wenore kogo ke inu ri tadawaien ’ore nene ni Buango, ka deko ace ke inu ri tadawaien ’ore aca ace ni Buango, ka deko se Makaze, ka Buango so ’ore thu thakui nu ri tadan ’ore tango, ne Buango ’ore ci wien kani Buango k0.
PALAUAN Guam)
(Western Caroline Islands,
Akmui el medengei, 0 Bios erngak, el kmo kau a milebak el mome dengelkau e mengull er Kau. Makuuchais er chelechal time e1 kirel a elitechetuk ma klisichem, ma elebulek, ma chiltetem. '
Ngdiak a ngodech 61 Dies ngkmal di kau el tang. E1 mesiou ra chelebuul edingar el mo cherechar.
[Page 535]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
PIDGIN, NEW HEBRIDES (BISLAMA, BICI—IELAMARE) (New Hebrides)
Mi talem stret O God blong mi se yu mekem mi blong save yu mo prei long yu. Long smol taem ia mi save talem tru long wik paoa blong mi mo long strong paoa blong yu; m0 mi talem 56 mi kat nating be yu yu kat planti samting. I no kat nara fala God be yu: yu yu help long taem blong trabol m0 yu yu save stap oltaem yu wan no mo.
PIDGIN, PAPUAN (NEO-MELANESIAN) (Papua New Guinea)
O God bilong mi. Mi tokaut nau long Yu yet i bin wokim mi baimbai mi nap long save long Yu na mi nap long preia long Yu. Nau tasol mi tokaut, olsem mi no strong na Yu i strong moa. Na mi tokaut tu olsem mi rabis pinis na Yu i holim olgeta samting.
I no gat narapela God. Yu tasol i stap. Na Yu i halivim 01 long taim bagarap i Iaik kisim 01 na Yu tasol i lukautim Yu yet.
PONAPEAN (Eastern Caroline Islands)
I wia kadehdeh, Oh ai Koht, me Komwi me ketin kapikiedahr en esei Komwi 0h en kaundok ohng Komwi. I patohwanehr, ni ansou kiset, me ngehi me Ieut oh Komwi me manaman, oh sohte ahi mehkot ah Omwi te mehkaros.
Sohte pil emen Koht pwe Komwih te, me Sawasepen ansoun apwa], oh Koamoaur Poatpapoat.
ROTUMAN (Rotuma Island)
Gou aier’ak ‘otou ‘Aitu, ne ’Ae ta fup’akim gou la ‘inea ‘Ae. Gou aier’ék ‘e 30 pau hete’is, ne gou ‘af‘af ka ‘Ae ne’ne’, gou keia ka ‘Ae‘es koroa.
Kat ‘es ‘Ait hoi‘akit ra, ‘Ae ‘esea Gagaja, ne asoa gou ‘6 a0 noanoé. ‘Ait se ‘es é’ofige.
SAMOAN (Samoa, New Zealand)
Lo’u Atua 6, cu te molimau atu, na faie, C Lau Afio a‘u ina ia ou iloa Oe ma tapuai atu ia te 06. On te tautino atu i lenei itula, lo’u augavale ma Lou malosi, o lo’u mativa i 16 ma Lou tamaoaiga.
E leai lava se tasi Atua na 0 0e, 0 le Fesoasoani i Puapuaga, 0 le Puna-o-Ie-Ola.
535
TAHITIAN (Society Islands, Tuamotus, Marquesas Islands, Gambier and Austral Islands)
Te ite nei au 6 ta ’u Atua e ua hamani Oe ia’u Note iteraa ia e te haamuriraa atu hoi ia 06.
Te ite nei hoi au na roto i teie nei taime i to’u nei paruparu I mua i to 06 na Puai Hope, 6, to’u nei veve i mua i te rahi O ta 06 na Tao’a.
Aore roa e Atua é atu maori r51 0 Ce ana’e, Oia tei hi’o aroha mai i tae i te mau taime ati, Oia tei tupu mai mai toro mai ia’Na iho.
TANNA: Nupuanmen (Weasisi, Whitesands) dialect (T(mna Island, New Hebrides)
Iau iakani nuparian, 0 rahak Iarumanig, in namol iau iakarun ik iakafaki kamik. Iau iakani nuparian u main 0 rahak napauian, ik iatam askasik iau iatos takaku.
Iarumanig katimun tika matou ik pusin ama, ik nakasiru ia nian raha narahain, ik pusin ama.
TONGAN (Tonga Islands)
Lotu Ho’ata. K0 6 fakamo’oni an ’e hoku ’Otua, kuo Ke ngaohi au, ke u ’ilo koe m0 u hu kiate koe, ’Oku ou faka—mo’oni’i ’i he momeniti ni ki hoku vaivai pea ki Ho’o Mélohi, ki hoku masivé pea ki Ho’o Koloa ’ia. ’Oku ’ikai ha toe ’Otua kehe ka ko Koe, k0 e tokoni ’i he tu’utémaki’, ko 6 mo’ ui pé iate Koe;
TRUKESE (Eastern Caroline Islands)
Ua puaratta, O ai Kot, pun En ka fori inisi pun upwe sile En 0 fel ngeni En. Ua puer nganuk non ei atun pun ngang use fakkun tufich nge En ka atufichi ai, ua osupuang nge En ka apiseki ai.
Ese wor eman Kot pun En chok. Ewe Tufich Ion feiengau, O Ewe—unusan Anuwor.
URIPIV (Malekula Island, New Hebridés)
Inu‘ nurai weritun, o Atua suk, ga nik kuloli inu re borong wosi nik k0 re bosrove nik.
Inu nurai weritun leligen wolik re inu sete nu teter k0 teterin som, re jorok ejki ko re jorom elep.
Atua san ejki k0 nik, ku metmet kem re nanu ga marsej, nik ga kumaur tetajer.
[Page 536]
536
UVEA, WEST (OUVEAN) (Uvea Island, Loyalty Islands)
Oge me haihnathuu, Khong 16, uj'é up nya me oge méhé ka oganéu. Me hai hnathuu ogé mé haié monu hnyi traém ang hnyi hnyimékan hniim hna hu, me finyam hnathu me anyik thedruéc me hnéim hna tren.
Ebé ke Khong aé ficii méu, at aé hana jé i'myi hia, mé hé ka hum 6ta hnyi hwetr aé gan, uthibi at aé tibentenge.
VAHOT (New Caledonia)
Gotchogn ’héré némé Gn’hon Yova. Gn’hon r0 wéra mé gorowé atché wé Gn’hon. Gn’hon tai go mé noué ka Gn’hon. Arégn’h wéhn gn’hin gn’hré gn’hiri, ka, iken, mon wéhn
THE Bahá’í WORLD
gn’hi i go mé oumo wéhn: go tchogn’héré némé Gn’hon venviirii ton ra. Gn’hon b0 tonhenran nohu ta vi patou, mon na ta ko’hen mé vinniré.
Gn’hon tai, Gn’hon Yova, aya kon, tdha mon ari koa.
YAPESE (Western Caroline Islands)
A Got kemichu wun’ug
Ni kam sunmiyeg
Ni ngug mathange—luwol. Nigem mug liyor ngom. Gum nang ni gage dariy Rogog ma gure gab fala—ab. Dariy rebe Got ni taareb Rogon ngom mi wod
Fanam mathange Iuwol.
E. EUROPE
- Denotes revised translation.
”(Efforts to obtain exact identification continue.
ALBANIAN
Deshmoj a Zot, i em Peréndi! qé ti mé ke krijue mue pér me té njoftun tyé dhe pér me té adhurue tyé. Deshmoj kété geshtje né dobsinén t’ime dhe né fuqiné tate, né vobeksiné t’eme dhe né pasuniné Tate, S’ka tjetér Peréndi pér vec se teje, Mbrues, ivet-gjendun!
ARABIC: Maltese dialect
Naghti xhieda, O Alla tiegfii, li Int hlaqtni biex nagfiarfek u nagfitik qima. Nistqarr Pdan il-waqt kemm jien bla fiila u kemm Int setgfiani; nistqarr il-faqar tiegfii wil-gfiana tieghek. M’hemmx Alla iefior gfiajrek, ilGhajnuna fit-Tigrib, Inti Ii Tghix fik Innifsek.
BASQUEWL (France)
Seguratzendut oi néré Jainkoa égin na zula zu ezagutuzeko éta adoratuzeko. Seguratzendut orai néré ahalgabétasuna éta zuré podéria néré béhartasuna éta zuré ontasuna.
Esta bertze Jainkok zu bésik, bera iraun dena Guré lagintza galbitdetan.
BASQUET (Spain)
Ene Jainko hori, Zu ezagutzeko eta adoratZeko egin nauzula sinesten dut. Une honetan
banaiz neure botererik ezaren lekuko, zure ahalmenarena, bai eta neure pobrezia eta zure aberastasunarena.
E2 dago Zu baino beste jainkorik, arriskuan laguntzen duena, bere baitan bizi dena.
BIELORUSSIAN (BYELORUSSIAN, WHITE RUSSIAN) (U.S.S.R., Poland, Lithuania)
51 CbBell‘ly, O Boxca, LUTO TbI MHHC CTBapmy, K216 5| naanay H566 i Llfl6e cnaBiy. fl ChubBHmeaio )7 1‘3Ty}0 XBiJIiHy Maio 6e3nanaM0x<Hac5ub i Tsaio MOI_[, M2110 )760l‘aCbub i TBaio Benin.
HaMa iHLuara Bora, anpa‘ia H266, [Ianamoxua )7 6511136, CaMaiCHyioqbl.
BRETON (North western France)
Test on, 0 ma Doue, ac’h eus krouet ac’haron evit da anaverout hag azeulin. Anzar a ran d’ar c’houlz—man ma dic’halloud ha da galloudegezh ma faourantez ha da binvidigezh.
N’eus Doue all Eset egedout, an hini a sikour e-barzh an danjer, an hini a 20 drezhén e-unan.
[Page 537]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
CATALAN (Andorra, Balearic Islands,
France, Sardinia, Spain)
Séc testimoni, ioh Déu meu! que tu m’has creat per a conéixer-te i adorar-te. Séc testimoni en aquest moment, de la meva impotencia i del Teu poder, de la meva pobresa i de la Teva riquesa.
No existeix altre Déu, més que Tu, el que Ajuda en el Perill, el que substitueix per Si Mateix.
CROATIAN (SERBOCROATIAN, Latin character) (Austria, Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Italy, Romania, Yugoslavia)
Ispovedam se, 0 Gospode, BOZe moj! Ti si stvorio mene da spoznam i oboiavam Tebe. Ispovedam u trenutku ovom slabost moju a moé Tvoju, siromaétvo moje a bogatstvo Tvoje. Nema drugog Boga sem Tebe, Svespa§avajuéi Samopostojeéi!
CZECH *
Dosvédéuji, 6 mfij Boie, ie jsi mé stvofil, abych Té poznal(a) a vzyval(a) Té.
Doznévém v tomto okamiiku svou bezmocmost a Tvoji moc, svou chudobu a Tvé bohatstv1’.
Neni’ jiného Boha kromé Tebe,Pomocn1’ka v Nebezpeél’, Sama v Sobé Existuji’ciho.
DANISH
Jeg bevidner, 0 min Gud, at du har skabt mig, for at jeg skal kende 0g tilbede dig. Jeg vidner i denne stund om min afmagt 0g din_ styrke, om min armod 0g din rigdom.
Der er ingen anden Gud end dig, hjzelpen i farens stund, der’i enerédende.
DUTCH
Ik getuig, o mijn God, dat Gij mij hebt geschapen om U te kennen en te aanbidden. Ik betuig op dit ogenblik mijn machteloosheid en Uw macht, mijn armoede en Uw rijkdom.
Er is geen ander God dan Gij, de Helper in nood, de Bij-Zich-Bestaande.
ENGLISH See p. 496.
537
ESTONIAN
Tunnistan, oh my Jumal, et Sa oled mind loonud Sind tundma ja teenima. Sel hetkel tumiistan oma jéuetust ja Sinu Végevust, minu vaesust ja Sinu rikkust.
Pole muud Jumalat kui Sina, Abi hiidas, Iseolev.
FAROESE (Faroe Islands)
Eg asénni, Gud min, at tfi skapaai meg til at kenna teg 0g tilbidja teg.
Sanneliga kenni eg, i hesu l¢tu, mitt hjélparloysi 0g tfna megi, mitt fataekdsami 0g tftt veldi.
Eingin annar Gud er til uttan tfi, bert ti’i hjélpur 1’ vanda, bert tl’i ert um alt annaé fer.
FINNISH
Todistan, oi Jumalani, ettéi olet luonut minut tuntemaan sinut ja palvelemaan sinua. Tuon julki téllé hetkelléi oman voimattomuuteni ja sinun voimasi, oman kéyhyyteni ja sinun rikkautesi. Ei ole mitéiéin nuuta Jumalaa kuin sinéi, apu héidéisséi, itsestiiéin oleva.
FRENCH
Je suis témoin, 6 mon Dieu, que Tu m’as créé pour Te connaitre et pour T’adorer. J’atteste en cet instant mon impuissance et Ton pouvoir, ma pauvreté et Ta richesse.
Il n’est pas d’autre Dieu que Toi, Celui qui secourt dans le péril, Celui qui subsiste par Lui-méme.
FRISIAN* (Frisian Islands, Germany, The Netherlands)
Ik tsjfigje, o myn God, dat Jo my skepen hawwe om Jo te kennen en te oanbidden. Ik betsjfigje op dit pas myn machteleazens en Jo macht, myn earmoede en Jo rykdom.
Der is gjin oare God as Jo, de Helper yn need, de Troch-Himsels-Besteande.
GAELIC, IRISH (ERSE, IRISH)
Tugaim fianaise, a Dhia, gur chruthaigh tfi mé chun thfi a aithint agus a adhradh. Dearbhai’m san am $60 mo neamhéifeacht agus do Neart, mo bhochtaineacht agus d0 Shaibhreas.
Nil Dia ar bith eile ann ach tl’i, an Cfintéir i mBaol, an FéinChothaitheach.
[Page 538]
538
GAELIC, SCOTTISH
Tha mi toirt fianuis, 0 m0 Thighearna, gun d0 chruthaich Thu mi gu eblas a chur ort agus gu aoradh a dheanamh Dhuit. Tha mi ag aideachadh, aig an 31m 560, mo laigse fhin agus D0 chumhachdsa, m0 ainnis agus T’ionmhaissa.
Chan’ eil Dia eile ann ach Thu, ar Cémhnuidh ri ém gz‘ibhaidh, an Uile-bheé.
GERMAN
Ich bezeuge, 0 mein Gott: Du hast mich erschaffen, Dich zu erkennen und Dich anzubeten. Ich bezeuge in diesem Augenblick meine Ohnmacht und Deine Macht, meine Armut und Deinen Reichtum.
Es ist kein anderer Gott ausser Dir, dem Helfer in Gefahr, dem Selbstbestehenden.
GERMAN: Alsatian dialect (France)
Isch bezei’, 0 min Gott, dass dfi mish erschafft héish, disch ze erkenne un anzebette.
Isch beze‘l‘ én dem Afiebleck mini Schwéische un dini Macht, mini Armut un din Rischdum.
Es gét ken Gott fisser dér, dem Beschétzer. dem ewich sei‘ende.
GERMAN: Luxembourgian dialect (Luxembourg)
Esh bezeien, O mei’ God, dass Dfi méch erschaffen heust Dech ze erkennen an Dech unzeibeden. Esh bezeien an dessem Ableck meng Schwz‘lchhét an Deng Machl, meng Armut an Dein Reichtom.
Et gét ken anere God ausser Dier, dem Héllefer a Gefohr, den dfirch sech selwer beste’t.
GREEK
Morp'rupa), (To Oeé uou, 6T1 u‘a Snulofipynoeg ylo't vér Zé c’xvorvapigco xai vd Zé ?\otTpex'Jw. 'E'rnfieEaldwm m’nfiv Tfiv 0T1yufiv Tfiv d5uvauicxv uou pwpbs c-rfiv chfiv Zou, Thv neviotv uou u'n'pbg o-rév 'n'AOO'rov Zou. Aév CITréthEI ékko; 956g éx‘rég érrrb Zévcx, Tc'w [50an UTbv xiv5uvov, Tév AOTOGUVTfionTo.
HUNGARIAN
Oh Uram, oh Istenem! Tanuséga vagyok annak, hogy Te teremtettél engem, hogy megismerjelek és imédjalak. Beismerem 3
THE Bahá’í WORLD
jelen pillanatban gyengeségemet és 3 Te Hatalmadat, szegénységemet és a Te Gazdagségodat. Rajtad kiviil nincs mzis Isten csak Te, a Védelmezfl, az Onmagéban Létezfl‘
ICELANDIC
Eg ber bess vitni, O Gué minn, a6 D11 hefir skapaé mig til bess a6 pekkja Dig 0g tilbiéja Dig. Eg staafesti é bessu augnabliki, vanmétt minn 0g métt Dinn, ffitzekt mina 0g aublegé Dina.
Enginn er Gué nema 1311,1-Ijélpin1’Nau6um, hinn Eilifi.
INUIT (INUPIAQ): Greenlandic dialect (Denmark, Greenland)
Upernarsauvunga‘ Gfitiga é, Ivdlit pingortikangma ilisariniésagavkit pat]dorfiginiésagavkitdlo.
Ménakorpiak navsuerpunga pigl’naunikiningnut ivdIitdlo pissaunekarnernut, pitsfiningnut ivdlitdlo pissfijunernut.
Avdlamik Gutilgéngilalg Ivdlit kisivit, navianartune ikiortelg, tamanut sapigalgéngitsok.
ITALIAN
lo faccio testimonianza, 0 mio Dio, Che Tu mi hai creato per conoscer Ti 6 adorar Ti.
10 attesto in questo momento la mia debolezza e la Tua potenza, la mia poverta e la Tua ricchezza.
Non v’é altro Dio all’infuori di Te, I’Aiuto nel pericolo, Colui che Esiste da Sé.
ITALIAN: Corsican dialect (Corsica, Italy)
80 testimone, u me Diu, chi mi hai fattu per conocedi e per amarti Digu, da stu momentu a me debuleza e a to forza, a me poereza e a to richeza.
Un ce altro Diu chitu,1’auido in u periculu, quellu chi £3 per ellu stessu.
ITALIAN: Piedmontese dialect (Northwertem Italy)
Mi faso testimoniansa, b Nésgnor, Che Ti ’T [has creame pér conbss Te e adore Te. Mi diciaro ant cést mément mia debéléssa e Téa pétensa, mia pévertél e Téa richéssa.
A j’e gnun éutr Signor che Ti, l’Agiut ant él pen’col, Col ch’a esist daspérchiél.
[Page 539]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ITALIAN: Sardinian dialect (Sardinia, Italy)
Deo fatto distimonia, Deus meu, chi Tue mi has fattu 0mine/femina, pro Ti connoscher 6 pro Ti adorare.
In custu momentu, deo attesto sa debilesa mia e i-sa potenzia Tua, sa poberesa mia e i-sa ricchesa Tua‘
Non b’hat atteru Deus a in foras de 21 Tie, Azudu in su perigulu, Cussu chi est solu dae Se.
NORWEGIAN: Nynorsk (Landsmél)
Eg vitnar, 0 min Gud, at Du har skapa meg $51 at eg kan kjenna Deg 0g tilbe Deg. Eg vitnar i denne stund om mi makteslgbyse 0g Din styrke, 0m min fattigdom 0g Din rikdom.
Der er ingen annan Gud enn Deg, Hjelparen i fare, den Evig Sj¢lvstz°1ande.
NORWEGIAN: Riksmél (Bokmél)
Jeg bevitner, 0 min Gud, at Du har skapt meg for atjeg kan kjenne Deg 0g tilbe Deg. Jeg vitner i denne stund om min maktesl¢shet 0g Din styrke, om min fattigdom 0g Din rikdom.
Der er ingen annen Gud enn Deg, Hjelperen i fare, den Selvbestéende.
POLISH
Swiadcze, 0 Panic, Boie méj, iZeé mnie stworzyl, aiebym znal Cie i wielbil. Swiadcze w tej chwili mojej slaboéci a Twojej mocy, memu ubéstwu a Twemu bogactwu. Nie ma Boga précz Ciebie, Obror'icy, Samoistnego.
PORTUGUESE
Dou testemunho, 6 men Deus, de que Tu me criaste para eu Te conhecer e adorar.
Confesso néste memento, minha incapacidade e Teu poder, minha pobreza e tua riqueza.
N50 hé outro Deus além de Ti, 0 amparo no perigo, o que existe por sf préprio.
ROMANIAN
Stau mérturie. O Stépéne, pentru a Te cunoagte 5i 3 Te slfivi. Mfirturisesc in clipa aceasta slébiciunea mea §i Puterea Ta, sfirficia mea 5i Imbel§ugarea Ta. Nu e alt Dumnezeu decét Tine, Ce] Ocrotitor, Cel de Sine Stétfitor!
539
ROMANSCH: Upper dialect (Switzerland)
Engadine (Puter)
Eau fatsch testimoniaunza, 0 mieu Dieu, cha Til am hest creé per At recugnuoscher e per At adorer.
Eau attest in quaist momaint mia deblezza e Tia potenza, mia poverted e Tia richezza.
I nu do fingfln Dieu oter c0 Te, quel chi gfida nel prievel, quel chi exista in Se stess.
ROMANY
Penéu, Devla, ke Tute sas ka kerdyz’m ma te ianéu Tut, hai te rudiiv Tuke. Penéu akana, ke me siim slébo ‘ai Tu san zoralé; kc me sfim éoré ‘ai Tu san barwalé. Nai kavér Devél, feri Tu hinka; 0 aZutimés and’e prikéza. Tu kai kérkoro aiutis Tu, Ci trubl’ll Tuke avrén.
ROMANY: Anglo-Romany dialect (Canada, United Kingdom, United States)
Mandy’s acai te sikka as it ’uz Tooty as caired mandy te jin Tooty, ta te del cooshty borra laws to Tooty sasky Tooty’s morra Divvel. Ocknaw mandy’s rokkarin trustel mandy’s bee-roozlo ta Tooty’s tacherly roozlo, ta mandy’s chorro and Tooty’s barvallo. There’s kakkava Divvel ner Tooty, morra haskipen canna mendy’s dray waffody cherras, Tooty con kakka coms chommany te ge along.
ROMANY: Sinto dialect (Northern Italy)
Me crava zaiga, o Mur Devel, Che Tu kerdal man Ti pingiarap tut unt camap tut. Me ginava in cava ziro miri schwacha unt tiri zor, miri elenta unt tiri barvapen. Na hi vavré Devel har Tu vri Tuter, holfa an u ferlocho, cova cai hi peske.
RUSSIAN
H ennaeTenbcmyio, 0 M0171 Bome, ‘iTO T131 comopnn menu, l”061,1 >1 noanan T3651 14 noxnommcsi Te6e. 51 nonTBepmax) B 3Ty MHHyTy CBoe 6eccmme 14 TBOio MOLle, CBOI-O CKyIlHOCTb M T1306 06mme.
He‘r Bora, KpOMC T6651, l'IOMOLuHHKa B OHaCHOCTH, TBopHTem camocymero.
[Page 540]
540
SAME (LAPP): LULESAMISKA (LULE LAPP) (Swedish Arctic)
Mé’m vattau vihtenastemau, Jupmelam, tan pirra, aht Tén lfih sjiunjetam mu, vai mén téptéu Tu ja réhkétalau Tunji. Mé’m tz‘ipti’istau talle ietjam famotisvuotau ja Tu famov, mu héidjovuotau ja Tu péntavuotau.
Iléih ietja Jupmel k5 Tin, viehkke vata aiken kuhti léih ietjanat.
SAME (LAPP): NORDSAMISKA (NORTHERN LAPP) (Scandinavian Arctic)
Min addén duodaétusa, Ibmilan, dan ala, atte Dén lzet siv’dnidan mu, vai mén dévdan Du ja gébmirdan Du. Mén duodaStan dél ieééan haeddjovuoda ja Du fémo, ieééan gefudaga ja Du rig’gudaga.
Ii laet ieié Ibmil g5! Dim, vmk’ki hwdi éigis, gutte laet ieS-aldéd.
SAME (LAPP): SYDSAMISKA (SOUTHERN LAPP) (Norway, Sweden)
Manne vitt’enusteb, O muv Jubméele, dan bijre, atte Dadne manneb leéih éugniedamme, juktie manne dabdeb Dadneb jih rukkedalleb Dadneb. Manne dabdesteb délie jeZ’ene vie§iesvuodeb jih Duv fémoub, jei’ene giehviesvuodeb jih Duv boédnaavuodeb.
Ij leéih jefiiéh Jubméele guh Dadne, gutt’e leéih viekkie vérén éjgien, gutt’e leéih jei’esisnie érruomienie.
SLOVAK (Hungary, Slovakia, Yugoslavia)
Svedéim 6 méj Boze: Tyvsi ma stvoril, aby som Ta spoznal(a) a Teba vzyval(a). V tomto okamihu dosvedéujem svoju bezmocnosf a Tvoju moc, svoju chudobu a Tvoje bohatstvo. Niet Ziadneho Boha okrem Teba, Poméhajficeho v nebezpeéenstve, Samobytného.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
SLOVENE (Austria, Hungary, Italy, Yugoslavia)
Priznavam, o moj Bog, da si me ustvaril, da Te spoznavam in molim. Prinznavam v tem trenutku svojo gibkost in Tvojo moé, svojo revééino in Tvoje bogastvo.
Ni Boga razen Tebe, Zaééitnika, Veénobivajoéega.
SPANISH
Soy testigo, oh mi Dios, de que TL’I me has creado para conocerte y adorarte. Atestiguo en este momento mi impotencia y Tu poder, mi pobreza y Tu riqueza.
No hay otro Dios mas que Tl’l, el Que Ayuda en el Peligro, 6] Que Subsiste por Si Mismo.
SWEDISH
Jag biir vittnesbérd 0m, 0, min Gud, att Du har skapat mig fér att Iiira kfinna Dig och f6r att tillbedja Dig. Jag betygar i detta 6gonblick min svaghet och Din styrka, min fattigdom och Din rikedom.
Det finnes ingen annan Gud utom Du, Hjéilpen i farans stund, den i Sig sjéilv Varande.
UKRAINIAN
H e CBiJIKOM, o Mifi Some, 1110 TH MeHe COTBOpHB Ha Te, U106 51 ni3HaB(na) Te6e i I‘lOKJIflHHBCfiUTEle) T06i. H cainqy B uiii XBHJ‘IHHi npo MO}O CJ'la6iCTb iTBOIO cymy, npo MOio B6oriCTb i TBOG 6araTCTBo.
HeMa iHLuoro Bora, mime Tn, HomiImMK B HeLuaCTio, CaMo6yTHm7i.
WELSH (CYMRAEG)
Tystiaf, O fy Nuw, mai Ti a‘m creaist i’th adnabod ac i’th addoli. Tystiaf, y funud hon, i’m gwendid fy hun ac i’th nerth Dithau, i’m tlodi i ac i’th gyfoeth Di. Nid oes Dduw arall 0nd Tydi, y Cynorthwywr mewn Perygl, yr Hunanfodolwr.
F. INVENTED LANGUAGES
ESPERANTO
Mi atestas, ho Sinjoro, mia Dio, ke Vi kreis min, por ke mi konu kaj adoru Vin. Mi atestas 6imomente pri mia senforteco kaj pri Via Potenco, pri mia malriéeco kaj pri Via Riéeco. Ne ekzistas alia Dio krom Vi,1a Defendanto, la Mem-Ekzistanto.
INTERLINGUA
Io testimonia, o mic Deo, que tu me ha create, pro Te cognoscer e adorar, Io testimonia in iste instante a mie debilitate e a Tie potentia, a mic paupertate e a Tie ricchessa. No existe éltere Deo salvo Tu, le adjutor en periculo, le in se mesmoexistente.
[Page 541]
BAHA‘iBlBLIOGRAPI—IY 541
. . - V ---- ... .- .. .- . . V -. - .- -- .. . - U. _ .. ' ' . - .-. - .. H -H” ” ' " "‘ . H- - H - . - . .. .. “' " -~ v w n—- .v -I v . .- , -, - --- u- . . w -. . u- . w v -. -H . - - .v. . u . - - -U 1. .- . . « ... . w w . .. - . . ...- .- «- . ¢~~ ' " 'l 4 v‘ u v v v ‘1 tea - ._.- -. . - . - ‘ . . ' _" .. 9‘ -..- .-- . ». .-. .. ”w - V . - - .. "H , . -. - .. M. - ..., .- ..- H . .. - .o— —» ~~ — u v v a‘ - —v a - uuv . . ,-.. - - .- . .. -- .- . . - -.. _ - - - .,. . -. ., . .. -. - . - - .- . . - - . - H - . ... ‘ . H . -..- V . H. . .
Facsimile Ofthe Short Obligatory Prayer in Braille (English), Grade II, courtesy of Bahá’í Service for the Blind, a committee Ofthe National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís offhe United States.
Bahá’í literature display sponsored by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of Taiwan during a nation-wide book exhibition held from I 7 December 1977 to 8 January 1978 at International House in Taipei.
[Page 542]
542 THEBAHA‘iWORLD
8. MAJOR WORKS AND PARTIAL LIST OF LANGUAGES IN WHICH THEY ARE AVAILABLE
Riḍván 1979 1 — Arabic 3 — French 5 — Persian 7 — Spanish 2 ~ English 4 — German 6 — Portuguese
A. WORKS OF BAHA’U’LLAH
Epistle to the Son ofrhe Wolf: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 Prayers and Meditations by Bahd’u’lhih (ComGleanings from the Writings of Buhd’u’lláh pilation): 1, 2, 4, 5 (Compilation): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh (CompilaThe Hidden Words: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6, 7 tion): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 Kitdb-i-iqdn (The Book of Certitude): l, 2, 3, The Seven Valleys and The Four Valleys: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 4, 5, 7
B. WORKS OF THE BAB Selections from the Writings OfIhe B(ib: 2, 6
C. WORKS OF‘ABDU’L-BAHA
Foundations of World Unity: 2, 7 Tablets Ofthe Divine Plan: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 Paris Talks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 The Talks Of ‘Aba’u’l—Baha’ in America and The Secret ofDivine Civilization: 2, 3, 4, 5 Europe, vols. I, ll: 1, 5
Some Answered Questions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 7 A Traveller’s Narrative: 1, 2, 5 Tablet [0 the Central Organization for a Dur- Will and Testament: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 able Peace, The Hague: 1, 2, 4, 5 Memorials Ofthe Faithfid: 2, 5
D. WORKS COMPILED FROM THE WRITINGS 0,1: BAHA’U’LLAH, THE BAB AND ‘ABDU’L-BAHA
Bahá’í’Prayers: 1, 2, 3,4,5, 6, 7 A New Way of Life (What it means to be a The Bahá’í’Revelation: 2, 6 Bahá’í Youth): 2, 6
Bahá’í World Faith: 2, 3 The Pattern ofBahci’t’ Life: 2, 3, 4, 6
The Divine Art ofLiving: 2, 3, 4, 7 The Reality of Man: 2, 7
E. WORKS OF SHOGHI EFFENDI The Advent of Divine Justice: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 God Passes By: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 The Dispensarion of Bahá'u'Ihih: 1,2, 3,4, 5,6, The Promised Day is Come: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 7
Some Compilations from his Writings Bahá’í’ Holy Places at the World Centre: 2, 5 The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 4 Principles of Bahá’z’Administratian: (U.K.): 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
[Page 543]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
543
9. A SELECTION OF INTRODUCTORY AND EXPOSITORY WORKS AND PARTIAL LIST OF LANGUAGES IN WHICH THEY ARE AVAILABLE
Riḍván 1979
1 — Arabic 2 — English
3 — French 4 — German
5 — Persian 6 — Portuguese
7 — Spanish
A. GENERAL
BALYUZI, H. M.
Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 6
Bahá’u’lláh: The King of Glory: 2
The Bdb: 2
‘Abdu’l-Bahá’: 2
Muhammad and the Course oflsla’m: 2
Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í’
Faith: 2
BLOMFIELD, LADY
The Chosen Highway: 2 BRAUN, EUNICE
From Strength t0 Strength: 2, 3, 7 BROWN, RAMONA ALLEN
Memories ()f‘Abdu’l-Bahá: 2 BRUGIROUX. ANDRE
La terre n'est qu’un seul pays: 3 COBB, STANWOOD
Security for a Failing World: 2, 3, 5, 6 COY. GENEVIEVE
Counsels of Perfection: 2 ESSLEMONT, J. E.
Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era: 1, 2,3, 4, 5, 6,
7
FADL, MiRZA ABU’L
Bahá’í Proofs: l, 2 FAIZI.GLOR1A
The Bahd'z’ Faith: 2, 4, 7
Fire on the Mountain Top: 2 FATHEAZAM, HUSHMAND
The New Garden: 2, 3, 6, 7 FERRABY. JOHN
All Things Made New (rev. ed.): 2 FOZDAR, JAMSHED
Buddha Maitrya-A mitabha Has Appeared: 2 GAIL, MARZIEH
Dawn Over Mt. Him, and other essays: 2
The Sheltering Branch: 2 GIACHERY, UGO
Shoghi E ffendi—Recollections: 2 GROSSMANN, HERMANN
Der Bahá’í’ und die Bahá’í—Gemeinschafi: 4
HOFMAN, DAVID
Commentary on the Will and Testament of
‘Abdu’l-Bahá: 2
The Renewal ofCivih'zation: 2, 3, 6, 7 HOLLEY, HORACE
Religion for Mankind: 2 HUDDLESTON, JOHN
The Earth is But One Country: 2 IVES, HOWARD COLBY
Portals to Freedom: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 MARTINEZ, EMILIO EGEA
La Gran Promesa: 7 MAXWELL, MAY
An Early Pilgrimage: 2, 7 MEHRABKLIANI, R.
Transcendencia del Kittib-i-iqdn: 7
La Aurora del Dia Prometido: 7
Noches Navidenas: 7 MIGET'TE, LUCIENNE
Le Cycle de l’Unite: 3 MOFFETT. RUTH
New Keys to the Book ofRevelation: 2 NAIQIJAVANI‘, BAHiYYIH
When We Grow Up: 2 NAQJAVANL VIOLETTE
Amatu’l—Bahá Visits India: 2 PAVON, RAUL
La Voz de Dios: 7 RABBANL RUHiYYIH
The Good Message: 2
Prescription for Living: 2, 4, 6, 7
The Priceless Pearl: 2, 3, 5, 7 ROST, H. T. D.
The Brilliant Stars: 2 SABET, HUSCHMAND
Der Gespaltene Himmel: 2, 4, 7 SCHAEFER. UDO
Der Bahá’í in der modernen Welt: 4
The Light Shineth in Darkness: 2 SEARS, WILLIAM
Release the Sun: 2, 6
[Page 544]
544
Thiefin the Night: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 The Wine ofAstonishment: 2, 3 The Flame: 2 (with Robert Quigley) The Prisoner and the Kings: 2 SHOOK, GLENN Mysticism, Science and Revelation: 2 TAHERZADETH, ADIB The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh, vol. I: 2; Vol. II: 2 TOWNSHEND, GEORGE Christ and Bahá’u’lláh: 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 The Glad Tidings of Bahá’u’lláh: (A compilation of Bahá’í Writings with notes and introduction by George Townshend): 2 The Heart Ofthe Gospel: 2, 3
THE Bahá’í WORLD
The Mission of Bahá’u’lláh and Other Literary Pieces: 2, 7 The Promise ofAll Ages: 1, 2, 3 WARD, ALLAN L. 239 Days: 2 WHITE, ROGER Another Song, Another Season: 2 WHITEHEAD, 0. Z. Some Early Bahá’ís Ofthe West: 2 WOOLSON, GAYLE Divina Sinfonia: 2, 7 Rumbo Hacia el Futuro: 7 ZARANDL NABIL-IThe Dawn-Breakers (Translated by Shoghi Effendi): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7
(Note: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts and National Spiritual Assemblies throughout the world constantly issue pamphlets and leaflets on various aspects of the Teachings.)
B. FOR CHILDREN
CHRISTIAN, ROBERTA K.
A Bahá’í Child’s ABC: 2, 3, 4 HOFMAN, DAVID
God and His Messengers: 2, 3, 4, 7 LEE, ANTHONY A.
The Black Rose: 2
The Cornerstone: 2
The Proud Helper: 2
The Unfriendly Governor: 2 LINDSTROM, JANET
The Kingdoms of God: 2, 3, 4 MEHRABI, JACQUELINE
Stories for Children: 2, 3
Nine Holy Days: 2
MEYER, ZOE Stories from ‘The Dawn-Breakers’: 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 REED, BETTY Stories of Bahá’u’lláh as told by Pokka: 2 TRUE, MARGUERITE Living Today for Tomorrow’s World: 2, 3 Bahá’í Prayers for Children (Compilation): 2, 4, 6, 7 WALCOTT, CYNTHIA K. The Gifi: 2, 7 Compilation: O God Guide Me (Prayers): 2, 7 Let Thy Breeze Refresh Them: Prayers and Tablets for Children: 2 Prayers and Tablets for Children: 2, 4
C. PERIODICALS
Bahá’í Studies: Monograph Series: 2 Published by the Canadian Association for Studies on the Bahá’í Faith.
Editorial Office: 224 Fourth Ave., Ottawa, Ontario KIS 2L8, Canada.
Opinioni Bahá’í: Italian Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of Italy. Editorial Office: c/o Centro Bahá’í Via A Stoppani, 10 00197 Roma Italia
World Citizen (Youth Magazine): Published by the National Bahá’í Youth Committee of the United States. Editorial Office: 10110 Margate Drive Houston, Texas 77099 U.S.A.
Child’s Way: 2 Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States. Editorial Office: 6446 Ridge Lake Rd. Hixson, Tn.37343 U.S.A.
[Page 545]
BAHA’iBIBLIOGRAPl—IY 545
Glory (Youth Magazine) La Pensée Bahá’íe: 3 Published by the National Bahá’í Youth Published by the National Spiritual AssemCommittee of India. bly Of the Bahá’í’s of Switzerland. Editorial Office: PO. Box 19, Editorial Office: PO. Box 175 Panchgani 412805, 1260 Nyon, Switzerland
Maharashtra, India.
World Order Magazine: 2 Published by the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís Of the United States. Editorial Office: 2011 Yale Station New Haven, Connecticut 06520, U. S. A
(Note: There are, in addition, numbers of domestic organs, issued by National Spiritual Assemblies or their Committees, for use by the Bahá’í communities.)
D. INTERNATIONAL RECORD
The Bahá’í World, vols. I—XVII (1925—1979): 2
Some current Bahá’í’periodicals. Clockwise, from bottom: Puthia Oli (Malaysia, in Tamil);
Bahá’í Family Life (New Zealand); Bahá’í’ Vizier (Netherlands, in Dutch); Opinioni Bahá’í’
(Italy, in Italian); Child’s Way (United States); World Order (United States); Glory, Bahá’í Youth Magazine (India); La Pensée Bahá’í’e (Switzerland, in French).
[Page 546]
546
THE BAHA’I’ WORLD
10. THE PUB/LI/CATION AND DISSEMINATION OF BAHA’I LITERATURE IN ENGLISH
WILLIAM P. COLLINS
I testify that no sooner had the First Word proceeded, through the potency ()f'l‘lu' will and purpose, out oins mouth . . . than the whole creation was revolutionized, am! all that are in the heavens and all that are on earth were stirred t0 the depths. Through that Word the realities afall created things were shaken, were divided, separated, scattered. combined and reunited, disclosing in both the contingent world and the heavenly kingdom, entities
ofa new creation. . . .'
THE descent of the eternal Word of God, the Logos, and its expression in a perfect Being and a Revelation, are the central facts of each of the divinely-appointed religious Dispensations. Moses and the Torah, Krishna and the Gité, Zoroaster and the Avesta, Jesus and the Gospels, Muhammad and the Qur’án—these are the dual manifestations of God’s timeless Utterance, inexorably wedded and intertwined. One is the living Mouthpiece of the divine will; the other, a perspicuous Book, a witness to all nations that God speaks and will not be silent. In our own time, the Creator has vouchsafed to the world a fresh measure of His inexhaustible Word through the Twin Messengers for this era of human history—the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh, and through the Scriptures revealed by Their untiring pens.
In conjunction with the manifestation of the Logos in the towering Figures of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh and in Their incomparable Writings, God has willed that His holy Speech be protected, preserved and interpreted. The strong and binding Covenant ordained by Bahá’u’lláh established ‘Abdu’l-Bahá as the Interpreter and Perfect Exemplar Of Bahá’í Teachings. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá was followed by Shoghi Effendi, Guardian of the Cause of God. The continued expression of that part of God’s good-pleasure not expressly recorded in the Bahá’í Holy Texts is assured by Bahá’u’lláh’s pen through the powers granted to the Universal House of Justice to legislate upon all matters not dealt with in those Texts.
The Bahá’í religion has been founded upon nearly forty—six years of divine Revelation and sixty-five years of authentic interpretation of the God-given message. The Will of God for this age has been stated; it is the turn of human ‘ Bahá'u’lláhi Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts, 1969), p. 295‘
ity to respond. This blessed Word, through which ‘the whole creation was revolutionized. must by its very nature exercise a transforming power over all mankind, individually and collectively. It is to this goal of bringing the healing Message of Bahá’u’lláh and the fruits of spiritual progress to every soul on the planet that Bahá’í publication is dedicated.
1. Early Bahti’z’ literature in England and America.
Although there existed hand-copied manuscripts in the original Persian and Arabic, and isolated publications in those languages were made in India during the late nineteenth century, the earliest established agencies for the official dissemination of Bahá’í literature were located in the West.
During the final decade of the nineteenth century, Edward Granville Browne, the British orientalist, published translations of two early Bábi-Bahá’íworks—‘Abdu’l-Bahá’sA Traveller’s Narrative Written t0 Illustrate the Episode Ofthe Báb (Cambridge University Press, 1891) and Mirzá Husayn of Hamadén’s Tén’flz-iJadz’d (1893).
Dr.Ibréh1’m K_hayru’lláh, a Syrian convert to the Bahá’í Faith, who settled in America in 1892. was the first Bahá’í to reach its shores and begin a systematic teaching of the precepts of the Faith. The first publication in the United States attempting to expound Bahá’í principles was K__hayru’ll€1h’s Za-ti-et Al—lah: the Identity and Personality of God (Chicago: Grant’s Printery, 1896), later enlarged into a book entitled Bab—ed—din: the Door of True Religion . . . Revelation front the East (Chicago: Charles H. Kerr & C0., 1897). Although of interest as the first books by a Bahá’í’ in English, K_hayru’lláh’s works were by {10 means an
[Page 547]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
authoritative statement of Bahá’í beliefs. It was rather through the prayers and Tablets received from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá that the early Western believers received their deepest education in the verities of the Bahá’í Cause. These few early believers exchanged typewritten copies of communications received from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, treasuring each new message as a special gift from their beloved Master. By 1900—1901 two major centres of Bahá’í publishing emerged in the United States—New York and Chicago. The ‘Bahai Board of Counsel’ in New York, and the ‘Bahais Supply and Publishing Board” (later the Bahá’í Publishing Society”) in Chicago became the first official agencies for the publication and dissemination of literature about the new Revelation. The founding ofthese two publishing ventures, as well as support from individual Bahá’ís and commercial publishers in England, made it possible for Englishspeaking Bahá’ís to receive a greater measure of Bahá’u’lláh’s inspired Works. Within less than a decade, several basic Bahá’í Texts were available, including the Suram'l-Haykal. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Tablets Of Bahá’u’lláh, and the Kitdb-i—qun.
2. Talks and Writings of‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Pilgrim Reports
The first contingent of Western Bahá’í pilgrims to visit ‘Abdu’l-Bahá arrived in ‘Akká in 1898. From that time until the Ascension Of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in 1921, a steady stream of pilgrims from the Occident attained His presence, some of whom later shared the experiences and impressions of the Master in published accounts. Among the most significant and moving is May Maxwell’s An Early Pilgrimage (Chicago: Bahai Publishing Society, 1917)1 which recounts the spirit of the original party of Western believers to reach the spiritual centre of their Faith. Thornton Chase’s In Galilee (1908), Helen S. Goodall and Ella G. Cooper’s Daily Lessons Received at ‘Akká (1908), Julia M. Grundy’s Ten Days in the Light of‘Akká’ (1910), and Lady Blomfield's The Chosen Highway (1940) also providedthe early Bahá’ís with insight into the life of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá.
' George Ronald. revised edition 1953; reprinted 1969 with new Foreword.
547
Most pilgrims‘ notes record statements and talks by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Such records of the Master‘s conversations, though edifying t0 the believers in that early period of the Faith’s development in the West, do not constitute authentic or exact reports of His words. A major exception to this, however, is Some Answered Questions, a book unique in the history of religions. It is a compilation of the responses given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá to certain questions posed by Laura Clifford Barney during 1904-1906. The Master’s replies were recorded in Persian with the assistance of His secretaries, and were later reviewed, corrected and approved by Him. Some Answered Questions was translated by Laura Barney and published in London in 1908. The answers to Miss Barney’s questions, given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in His ‘tired moments’, contain a wealth ofinsight into the nature of God, the Manifestations and man; the powers of soul, mind and spirit; and various Christian doctrines.
In 1911—1912 the Master undertook His epic missionary tour of Europe and America. During that journey He gave dozens oftalks in churches, universities and philosophical societies. Three major anthologies of His addresses appeared in the 19205—The Wisdom Of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd (now known as Paris Talks), ‘Abdu’l—Bahd in London, and The Promulgation of Universal Peace. These reveal the facility and power with which He spoke on a wide range of topics.
During the course of World War I, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá revealed a series of letters to the American Bahá’í community. These Tablets Of the Divine Plan are the charter for the worldwide spread of the Bahá’í Faith under the mandate given to the Bahá’ís of North America. The international teaching plans launched under the aegis of the Guardian and the Universal House of Justice all derive their inspiration from the guidance given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in these Tablets.
As mentioned earlier, the Western Bahá’í’s received their best knowledge of the Faith during the early twentieth century through letters from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. A large number of such letters to Spiritual Assemblies and individual believers was brought together and published in three volumes known as Tablets ofAbdul Baha Abbas (Chicago: Bahai Publishing Society, 1909—1916).
[Page 548]
548
The Mysterious Forces of Civilization, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s appeal for the spiritual transformation of Persia’s people and government, was first published in 1918 in a translation by Yuhanné Dawfid. In 1957 this remarkable treatise on true civilization was republished in a translation by Marzieh Gail entitled The Secret ofDivine Civilization. Marzieh Gail, a distinguished and erudite Bahá’í’, and an accomplished poet, essayist and translator, also supplied the Bahá’í’s with a touching rendition into English of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s Memorials Of the Faithfid (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1971). It is a compendium of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s memories of more than seventy Of the early believers.
The Will and Testament of‘Abdu’l-Bahá is the crowning touch to His many years of guidance to the Bahá’í world. Though a short document, Shoghi Effendi describes the Will as ‘supplementary’ to the Kitdb-i-A qa’as, and ‘the Charter of a future world civilization’. In it, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá establishes the Guardianship, the Hands of the Cause of God, the National or Secondary House of Justice, the principles of Bahá’í administration, and defines the method of election of the Universal House of Justice.
3. Writings and Translations ofShoghi Effendi
Shoghi Effendi, the Guardian of the Bahá’í Faith from 1921 to 1957, was a master of the English language, with which he sought to interpret for the West, in luminous prose, the basic truths and social programme of the Bahá’í movement. In a succession of cogent letters, Shoghi Effendi expanded the vision of the believers and clearly defined for them the nature of their weighty responsibilities under ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s divine plan.
Shoghi Effendi’s early letters to the western Bahá’ís awakened them to the newly-emerging administrative institutions of the Faith. In 1928, a collection of the Guardian’s letters was published in the United States under the title Bahá’í Administration. The series of letters penned by the Guardian between 1929 and 1936, published separately, and then collectively under the title of The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh , provide a treatise on the processes shaping the Bahá’í community, a mandate for the role of the American believers in raising Bahá’u’lláh’s World Commonwealth, and a
THE BAHA’l WORLD
vision of that Golden Age of the Bahá’í’ Revelation destined to emerge from its Chrysalis in the fullness of time. The Advent of Divine Justice (1939) and The Promised Day 15 Come (1941) define the spiritual prerequisites for the American Bahá’í community in the prosecution of its tasks, and describe the significance of world-wide cataclysms and wars for the building up of the new World Order proclaimed by Bahá’u’lláh. Other compilations of the Guardian’s letters have been made under the titles of Messages (0 America 1 932—] 946, Citadel of Faith, Messages to the Bahti'z’ World, Messages to Canada, Messages to Australia and New Zealand, and High Endeavors: MessagestoAlaska.l
In addition to Shoghi Effendi’s analysis of the world situation, his contributions to Bahá’í historical scholarship are astounding. The only actual book the Guardian wrote was Goa’ Passes By, the history of the first century of the Faith. It is such a distillation of Bahá’í history—both factual and interpretative—that hundreds of other historical works may be inspired by it in the future. Furthermore, Shoghi Effendi edited, translated, and supplemented the first part of Nabil’s narrative The Dawn-Breakers, one of the most important and meticulously-recorded sources on the time of the Báb.
Shoghi Effendi’s major contribution to Bahá’í literature, and the greatest testimony to his brilliant knowledge of Arabic, Persian and English, are his unequalled renditions of Bahá’u’lláh’s Writings into English. Between his accession to the Guardianship in 1921 and the beginning of World War II Shoghi Effendi translated The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, The Kitdb-i-qun, and The Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, and compiled Gleam‘ngs from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh and Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh. The translations of Shoghi Effendi are not only models of beauty, but also provide a standard with which subsequent translations of Bahá’í Scriptures in English can be compared.
4. Introductory Texts
A number of Bahá’í authors have given a systematic exposition of the history and fun‘ At time of writing the National Spiritual Assembly of the
United Kingdom has in preparation a compilation entitled
The Unfolding Destiny of the British Bahá’í Community. A full list of compilations appears on page 488.
[Page 549]
BAHA‘I’ BIBLIOGRAPHY
damental precepts of the Bahá’í Revelation. The most outstanding example is John E. Esslemont in his Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, first published in 1923 in Great Britain. This book had, by 1944, been published in thirtyseven languages, and is now available in dozens more in its fourth revised edition. Its enduring value as the major introductory Bahá’í textbook and its place in the vanguard of Bahá’í literature, is attested by Shoghi Effendi in his message at the time of Esslemont’s death: ‘His book, however—an abiding monument to his pure intention—will, alone, inspire generations yet unborn to tread the path of truth and service as steadfastly and unostentatiously as was trodden by its beloved author.’l
The foremost expounder Of Baha’u’llah’s teachings t0 the Christian world was George Townshend, sometime Canon of St. Patrick’s Cathedral Dublin, and Archdeacon of Clonfert. His introduction to God Passes By, and his three volumes— The Promise ofAll Ages, The Heart of the Gospel, and Christ and Bahá’u’lláh—are an abiding witness to the power of the eternal Word, as revealed in Bahá’u’lláh, to seize upon the heart of this ecclesiastical figure and enable him to use his extraordinary powers of expression in the advancement of God’s Cause.
Since its appearance in 1957 John Ferraby’s All Things Made New has established itself as another classic of Bahá’í expository writing. Unlike Bahd’u'lláh and the New Era, this work gives a lengthier and more comprehensive picture of the history of the Faith and its Administrative Order, while preserving a universal and timeless appeal. A revised edition with updated information was published by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of the United Kingdom in 1975.
Those who, for various reasons, may find the aforementioned introductory texts too difficult or lengthy to read, have three other works on the Bahá’í teachings which they may consult. Rfihl’yyih Rabbani’s Prescription for Living, Hushmand Fathea’zam’s The New Garden and Gloria Faizi’s The Bahá’í Faith: an Introduction are relatively short and simplified accounts of the Bahá’í teachings and have been translated into many languages.
‘ Shoghi Effendi. Bahd’fAdministralion. (Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing Trusts, 1968), p. 97.
549
5. Children’s Literature
In the Five Year Plan, specific goals were set for activities relating to children. Several of the earliest attempts to produce quality Bahá’í children’s books were made in the 19505 and 19605: Janet Lindstrom’s The Kingdoms of God, David Hofman’s God and His Messengers and Zoe Meyer’s Stories from the Dawn Breakers deal with the realms of existence, progressive revelation, and Babi saints and martyrs. Children’s prayer books have been published to introduce young Bahá’ís to the Sacred Texts of their Faith; colouring books, puzzles and games have been developed; and several books, including the very successful The Gift by Cynthia Walcott, have been published along with cassette narration Of the stories.
6. Scholarly Works, Biographies, Translations
From the time of the appearance of Mirzál Abu’l-Fadl’s Hujaju’l-Beheyyeh: The Behai Proofs in 1902, until recently, scholarly Bahá’í books have appeared at irregular intervals. In the current decade, however, the results of much fine scholarly research have been published. The British publisher, George Ronald, has been a major source of this type of work. Particularly noteworthy has been the prodigious output of H. M. Balyuzi, whose Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í Faith (1970) and Muhammad and the Course of Isla’m (1976) have provided a wealth of historical material and analysis on topics of Bahá’í interest. Mr. Balyuzi is currently working on the final parts of his trilogy on the Central Figures of the Bahá’í Faith. His The Báb: The Herald of' the Day of Days and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá: the Centre of the Covenant Of Bahá’u’lláh have already appeared, and in a short time his final work on the life of Baha’u’llah is expected to be completed.
Rfihi’yyih Rabbani’s The Priceless Pearl (London: Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1969) and Ugo Giachery’s Shoghi E ffendi: Recollections (Oxford: George Ronald, 1973) have afforded the English-speaking Bahá’ís the first coherent tableau of their Guardian and the many aspects of his dynamic personality.
Adib Taherzadeh, a member of the Continental Board of Counsellors for Europe, has
[Page 550]
550
embarked on a four-volume survey of the Writings of Bahá‘u’llz’ih and some of the events associated with their revelation. Two volumes of The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh appeared in 1974 and 1977. covering the Baghdád and Adrianople periods respectively, and—unveiling to the Western believers a glimmer of the scope and magnitude of Baha‘u‘lláh’s abundant outpouring of divine Utterance.
One of the goals of the Five Year Plan was to ‘cultivate opportunities for courses on the Faith in Canadian institutions of higher learning’. This goal led to the establishment of the Canadian Association for Studies on the Bahá’í Faith,l which has produced three issues of its journal Bahá’í’Studies. and is engaged in the preparation ofFrench and English editions of a textbook on the Bahá’í Faith to be used in comparative religion courses throughout Canada.
Jamshed Fozdar has been the Bahá’í Faith's foremost scholar on Buddhism. After finishing a book on the concept of God in Buddhism (The God ofBuddha. New York: Asia Publishing House, 1973). he embarked on his monumental and important work to interpret Buddhism and the Bahá’í Faith to each other. Buddha Maitrya-Amitabha Has Appeared was published in 1976 by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust of India. Its scope reflects a thorough knowledge of Hinduism, Buddhism and the Bahá’í Faith, which Mr. Fozdar compares and relates doctrine for doctrine.
One of the Bahá’í Faith’s most talented writers and essayists was Horace Holley. a Hand of the Cause and for many years secretary of the National Spiritual Assembly of the Bahá’ís of the United States. Among his writings are The Modern Social Religion (London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1913), Bahá’í’, the Spirit of the Age (New York: Brentano, 1921), and a selection of essays, Religion for Mankind (George Ronald, 1956).
There have also been several translations into English of scholarly Bahá’í works originally published in other languages. The Heavens Are Cleft Asunder by Huschmand Sabet reached high into theological circles in Germany under its original title Der Gespaltene Himmel where it provoked much discussion of the significance of Bahá’u’lláh’s claims
' A report of its activites in the period 1975-1979 appears on p 197.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
for the Christian church. The Light Shineth In Darkness is a collection of essays by Udo Schaefer on the Bahá’í Faith and Islam, and on refutations of orthodox Christian criticisms of the Bahá’í Faith.
7. Periodicals
The first Bahá’í magazine in English was Star of the West.2 issued in Chicago from 1910 through 1935. In its presentation of first-hand reports about people and events connected with the early development of the Faith, it is an unparalleled source of historical information Of special importance was its publication of Tablets from ‘Abdu’l-Bahá and its coverage of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s trip to Europe and America. The first fourteen years of this periodical were reprinted in 1978 by George Ronald publisher. In Australia, Herald of the South published news of Australasia’s Bahá’ís between 1926 and 1960, and in a new series in 1965—1970 and 1974—1975. World Order magazine, the successor to Star of the West, was published in the period 1935—1949 and in a new series since 1966. It publishes essays on Bahá’í philosophy and beliefs in their relation to contemporary problems. Several other magazines under Bahá’í auspices are directed to specific audiences, such as Child’s Way from the United States and Glory: Bahá’í Youth Magazine from India. Some 130 National Spiritual Assemblies now exist, each of which publishes its own internal newsletter; a large number of these is in Eng-' Iish.
8. The Bahá’í World
No discussion of Bahá’í literature in English would be complete without mention of the multi-volume survey of the activities of the international Bahá’í community, The Bahá’í’ World. Now in its seventeenth volume, and spanning over halfa century, it is a source book for information on current activities, growth and development of the Bahá’í administrative order, biographies of deceased Bahá’ís, poetry and articles. The contents of this one publication bear witness that the Bahá’í Faith is a well-established, international and independent religion, steadily growing and developing new institutions and powers.
3 Published in its first year under the title Bahá’í News.
[Page 551]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
551
M "‘ HI- mu “1..”
Examples of Bahá’í’ literature in English. Clockwise from bottom: Star of the West, Reprint
(1978); God’s Heroes by Laura Barney (I 910); The Priceless Pearl by Rflbz’yyih Rabbani
(I 969); Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era by J. E. Esslemont (I 923); The Dawn-breakers by
Nabl’l (1976 printing); The Mysterious Forces of Civilization by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá (1918); The
Book of Ighan by Bahti’u’lláh (1915); God Passes By by Shoghi Effendi (1965 printing); Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, 2nd rev. ed. (1 976).
9. Audio-Visual Materials
Technological innovations in the twentieth century have led the Bahá’ís to develop a fascinating array of films, filmstrips, slides, cassette tapes, posters and exhibit materials. The official impetus for the full-scale production of such materials came from the Universal House of Justice in 1967 with the establishment of the International Bahá’í Audio-Visual Centre in Victor, New York, USA.1 The Bahá’í Publishing Trust of the United States also became an important source of audio-visual production.
Since the midpoint of the last decade, over two dozen filmstrip programmes have been produced on such topics as Bahá’í history, administration, general introductions to the Faith, and international Bahá’í conferences.
The production and broadcasting of a general.
‘ The Bahá’í World, vol. XIV, 1963—1968, pp 91—92.
film on the Bahá’í Faith, And. His Name Shall Be One, by the American television network C.B.S., sparked the making offilms among the Bahá’ís. A New Wind by the Canadian documentary film producer George C. Stoney, was commissioned by the National Spiritual Assembly of the United States to show the world-wide diversity Ofthe Bahá’í community. A number of Bahá’í film companies have since produced a diverse selection of films featuring youth conferences, interviews with Hands of the Cause of God, and dedications of Bahá’í’ Houses of Worship. Perhaps the most ambitious was the two—hour film of The Green Light Expedition.2 It is a priceless glimpse into the spiritually-rich lives of South American Indians, accompanied by Rfihl’yyih fllénum’s characteristic insights into the meaning of pioneering.
z The Bahá’í World, vol. XVI, 1973—1976. pp. 419—448.
[Page 552]
552
10. Sources of Publications
Of the sources of Bahá’í’ publications in English, the New York Bahai Board of Counsel and Chicago’s Bahai Publishing Society have already been mentioned. Since the time of the establishment of these two publishing institutions in 1900, the Bahá’í world has expanded to such a degree that there are now over twenty Bahá’í Publishing Trusts. A significant number of these publish in English, including the United Kingdom, Australia, the United States and India. Even the Bahá’í PubIishing Trust of Japan has issued landmark Bahá’í’ books in English. Of the 130 National Spiritual Assemblies and their subordinate committees, nearly all issue publications in various formats; many of them are in English. Not only are Bahá’í works issued by Publishing Trusts and National Assemblies, but one other publisher, George Ronald in England, has issued only Bahá’í books in the past few years. The Bahá’í World Centre has also produced a series of outstanding publications: The Proclamation ofBahd’u’Iltih, Bahá’í Holy Places at the World Centre, The Constitution Ofthe Uni Bahá’í literature display featuring literature produced by Editora Bahá’í’ Brasil exhibited
THE BAHA’l WORLD
versal House oflustice, A Synopsis and Codification of the Laws and Ordinances Of the Kitáb-i-Aqdas, and the three compilations of Scripture called for in the Five Year Plan.1
11. The Five Year Plan and Publishing in English
As in previous international teaching plans of the Guardian and the Universal House of Justice, the Five Year Plan had a sizeable number of goals devoted to the production and dissemination of literature in many languages. Seven new Publishing Trusts were called for; Bahá’í literature has been translated into many new languages, and enriched in many more, including English.
The major Five Year Plan goal for publication of Bahá’í literature in English was assigned by the Universal House of Justice to the Bahá’í World Centre. The goal—to publish three compilations of Sacred Scripturesignificantly increased the range of Bahá’í Holy Writings in English. In 1976 the first of
' See section 11 of this article.
IRAS“. ,
1 E&mg’gfifl ME: 2! 7325 l
during the annual Street Book Fair held In Belo Horizonte, Brazil, October 1977.
[Page 553]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
the three volumes, Selections fiom the Writings Ofthe Báb, appeared, releasing for the first time to the Bahá’ís of the West the mighty torrent of the Báb’s utterance. Tablets of Bahd’u’l/éh Revealed After the Kitáb-i-Aqdas was released approximately eighteen months later. Included in this anthology were retranslations of several Tablets which had been translated in the days of the Master, as well as much material previously unavailable in English. In late 1978, Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá completed the trilogy of newly-translated Sacred Texts. The dynamic spirit infused into the Bahá’í community by the appearance of these volumes has contributed significantly to the stimulation of the herculean efforts exerted to achieve the assigned tasks of the Five Year Plan.
A supplementary achievement of the World Centre was the publication in 1977 of excerpts from various letters of the Guardian under the title Call [0 the Nations. Extracts from the four books just named appear elsewhere in this volume.
At the request of the Universal House of Justice, the Research Department of the World Centre has from time to time compiled appropriate passages from the Bahá’í Writings on various subjects. These compilations have brought together previously-translated and
553
newly-translated excerpts from the corpus of Bahá’í Scripture and interpretation on such topics as teaching, education, youth, children, opposition to the Faith, and consultation.
This review has not attempted to give a definitive survey of Bahá’í literature in English; it has, rather, indicated the broad categories of Bahá’í publication. Nevertheless, the importance of the publication and dissemination of Bahá’í literature in English cannot be over-emphasized. Not only is English 3 language rich in expression, but it is currently one of the most widely spoken. It is also the tongue in which a significant portion of Shoghi Effendi’s writing was composed, and the language into which his authentic translations of Bahá’u’lláh’s Writings were made. It is not from the original Persian and Arabic, but rather from the authorized English editions of Bahá’í Holy Texts, that nearly all translations into other languages of the West are made.
The Word of God for this era of the earth’s spiritual history has appeared as the sun in the East in exalted verses of Arabic and Persian; it has been focused clearly and unambiguously for the West in unmatched English prose, from which, as light through a prism, its rich texture and colour reach the whole of mankind in a myriad tongues.
[Page 554]
554
10.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
11. BIBLIOGRAPHIES
A. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF Bahá’í BOOKS AND BOOKLETS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader
(i) THE WRITINGS OF BAHA’U’LLAH
A bbrcviations
NSA—National Spiritual Assembly LSA—Local Spiritual Assembly BPS—Bahzi’l’ Publishing Society (1902—1922) Bahá’í Publishing Trust
BPC—Bahá’í Publishing Committee
. Blessed is the Spot. n.p. n.d. National
Teaching Committee. paper.
. Book of Assurance, The. trans. Ali Kuli
Khan. New York: Brentano’s, (1924). New York: BPC, 1929. cloth.
Book oflghan, The. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. New York: George V. Blackburne C0., 1904. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and 1915. cloth.
Epistle to the Son Ofthe Wolf. trans. Julie Chanler. New York: BPC, 1928, parchment on hard cover.
. Epistle to the Son Ofthe Wolf. trans. Shoghi
Effendi. Wilmette: BPC, 1941 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1962. 1969, 1970. 1971 and 1976. cloth.
Gleam’ngs from the Writings of Bahd'u'[hilL comp. and trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC,1943, 1946,1948, 1951 and 1952. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1963, 1969 and 1976. London: BPT, 1946 and 1978. paper, fabrikoid and cloth.
. Hidden Words. trans. Shoghi Effendi.
London: 1923. New York: 1924, 1925 and 1929. paper and leather.
. Hidden Words, The. trans. Ameen ‘Ullah
Fareed. Chicago: BPS, 1905, 1914 and undated. London: The Unity Press, 1911. paper and leather.
. Hidden Words, The. (Persian section only)
Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, Press of the Hollister Bros. n.d. paper.
Hidden Words, The. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1932,1939 and
11.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1952 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1971 and 1975. London: BPT, 1944, 1949, 1966 and 1975. New Delhi: BPT, 1964 and 1973. paper and cloth.
Hidden Words from theArabic, The. London: Kenneth Mackenzie, 1915. paper.
. Hidden Words from theArabic, The. fore word by Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, Mayle’s Penny Series, 1908.
pape r. H idden Words from the Persian R eveale d by th e Blessed Perfection.
New York: The Board of Counsel. paper. Hidden Words—The Seven Valleys. two works bound together, the first work has no mention of translator (Fareed), the second was translated by Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, n.d. leather.
Hidden Words Translated from the Persian, The. trans. Antun F. Haddad. n.p. n.d. paper.
Kitáb-El-Ah ’d—The Book of the Covenant, The Will and Testament of‘the Baha’o’llah. Chicago: BPS, 1913. paper. Kitáb-i-iqdn—Thc Book of Certitude, The. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1931 and 1937. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1950 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1960 (this edition has two varieties of dust jacket: the first states erroneously that the iqén was revealed in 1858 while the latter correctly gives the date 1862), 1970 and 1974. London: BPT, 1946 and 1961. cloth.
[Page 555]
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
. Abdu’l-Bahá
BAHA’iBIBLIOGRAPHY
Lawh-El—AkcltIs—The Holy Tablet Revealed by the Blessed Perfection (Baha Ullah) at Baghdad. Stuttgart, Germany:
Dr. Edwin Fisher, Stitzenburgstrasse, 1907. Chicago: BPS, 1913. also n.p. n.d. paper.
Mission of Bahti’u'lláh, The. Wilmette: BPT. 1952 and 1971. paper.
Prayers and Meditations. comp. and trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1938. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1962, 1969 and 1974. London: BPT, 1978. fabrikoid and cloth.
Proclamation of Bahd'u’lláh, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1967 and 1972. paper and cloth.
Selected Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. Wilmette: BPT, 1972 and 1975. paper.
Selections from the Hidden Words of Baha’o’llah. Chicago: BPS, n.d. paper. Seven Valleys, The. trans. Ishtea] lbn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, 1906 and n.d. paper and leather.
Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, The. trans. Ali Quli Khan. New York: BPC, 1936 and 1937. paper and fabrikoid. Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, The. trans. Ali Quli Khan and Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPC, 1945, 1948, 1952 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 19??, 1967, 1968 and 1975. paper and cloth.
27
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
34.
35.
36.
37.
555
. Source of Spiritual Qualities, The. New York: BPC, 1924. paper Suratu'l—Hykl—Sura Of the Temple. Chicago: The Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1900. paper.
Synopsis and Codification Of the Kittib-iAqa’as. The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice. 1973. cloth.
Tablet Of Ishrakat. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper.
Table! of Taruzat, Tablet Of the World, Words of Paradise, Tablet Of Tajalleyat, The Glad Tidings Revealed by Bahd'u’lltih at Acc‘a. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1906 and 1913. cardboard.
Tablet of the Branch, The. n.p. n.d. (New York: December, 1912). paper.
. Tablets Of Bahá’u’lláh. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS. 1917. cloth. Tablets of Bahd'u’lltih Revealed after the Kitáb-i-Aqdas. comp. the Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. Habib Taherzadeh. Haifa: Bahá’í World Centre, 1978. cloth.
Three Obligatory Prayers. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1937. paper. Three Tablets Of Baha'o’llah. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1918. paper. Tokens from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh. comp. Jay and Constance Conrader. Wilmette: BPT. 1973 and 1975. paper and cloth.
(ii) THE WRITINGS OF THE BAB
. Bdb’s Instructions to the Letters Ofthe Liv ing, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944 also n.p. n.d. paper.
. Selections from the Writings of the Báb.
comp. Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. Habib Taherzadeh. Haifa: Bahá’í World Centre, 1976. cloth.
(iii) THE WRITINGS OF ‘ABDU’L-BAHA
. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in Canada. comp. NSA of
Canada. 1962. paper.
. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá in Edinburgh. comp. NSA
of the British Isles. London: 1963. paper. in London. comp. Eric Hammond. London: Longmans Green & Co., 1912. East Sheen, Eng: The Unity Press, 1912. Chicago: BPS, 1921. paper.
4.
5.
6
Abdu’l-Bahá in New York. comp. LSA of New York City. New York: 1922. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.
Abdu’l-Bahá 0n Divine Philosophy. comp. Isabel Fraser Chamberlain. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916 and 1918. paper. see
- 6.
. Abdu’l-Bahá on Divine Philosophy. comp.
[Page 556]
556
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22. 23.
. America’s
. Christians,
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Soraya Chamberlain. New York: BPC, (1928). paper. see #5.
Spiritual Mission. (trans. Ahmad Sohrab). New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. paper. see #58 and 68.
Bahá’í Peace Program, The. New York: BPC, 1930. paper and fabrikoid.
Jews and Muhammadans. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper
Christ’s Promise Fulfilled. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954, 1959, 1970, 1975 and 1978. paper.
Compilation of Utterances from the Pen of Abdu’l-Bahá Regarding His Station. n.p. November 26, 1906. paper.
Definition of Love by Abdu’l-Bahá. New York: December 7, 1902. paper.
Divine Art ofLiving, The. comp. Mary M. Rabb. All but first two #5 of Star of the West dealing with Rabb’s compilation bound in 5% leather. Chicago: Bahai News Service, 1924.
Divine Art ofLiving, The. comp. Mary M. Rabb. New York: Brentano’s, 1926. paper and cloth.
Divine Common Senxe from the World's Greatest Prisoner to His Prison Friends. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916. paper see
- 20.
Faithfor Every Man. London: BPT, 1972. paper.
Foundations of World Unity. comp. Horace Holley. New York: World Unity Publishing Corp., 1927. New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. Wilmette: BPT, 1955, 1968 and 1971. paper and cloth.
From Abbas Effendi to a Lady who Visited Acre in Feb., 1906. Edinburgh: T & A Constable, 1907. paper. see #19.
From Abdu’l-Bahá to a Lady who Visited Acre in February, 1906. trans. Monever Khánum. London: The Unity Press, 1907. paper.
From the World’s Greatest Prisoner to His Prison Friends. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1921. paper. see #15.
Garden of the Heart, The. comp. Frances Esty. East Aurora, New York: The Roycroft Press, 1930. fine cloth.
He Is God. Chicago: BPS, 1913. paper. Industrial Justice. New York: BPC, 1940.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
Wilmette: BPC, 1941 and 1946. paper. Japan Will Turn Ablaze. Japan: BPT, 1974. cloth.
Letter and Tablet from Abdu’l-Bahá t0 the Central Organization for a Durable Peace, The Hague. Chicago: BPS, 1920. paper. Letter from Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas t0 the Friends in Persia. trans. Ameen ‘Ullah Fareed. Chicago: BPS, Jan. 21, 1906. paper.
Letter from St. Jean d’Acre. London: The Bahai Press, 1906. paper.
Letter of ‘Love’ from ABDUL-BAHA ABBAS t0 the ‘beloved’ in America, Received by Mr. George E. Witte at New York, December 7, 1902. Chicago: BPS, 1902. paper.
Letters to the Friends in Persia. Chicago: BPS, 1906. paper.
Life Eternal. comp. Mary Rumsey Movius. East Aurora, N.Y.: The Roycroft Shops, 1936 and 1937. fine cloth. Memorials offhe Faithful. trans. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1971. cloth. Messages from Abdu’l-Bahá to the Honolulu Bahais. Honolulu: Advance Press, 1924. Honolulu: NSA of the Hawaiian Islands.
Mysterious Forces of Civilization, The. trans. Johanna Dawud. London: Cope & Fenwick, 1910. Chicago: BPS, 1910 and 1918. cloth.
Mystery of God, The. comp. Mrs. Iran F. Muhajer. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. cloth and leather.
Paris Talks. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield, and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. London: BPT, 1951, 1961, 1969, 1971 and 1972. paper and cloth. (see
- 63 and 73 of this section).
Prayers and Tablets—Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas. n.p. 1906. paper.
Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. Vol. I. (comp. Howard MacNutt). Chicago: BPC, 1922. (New York): BPC, 1922 (actually 1925). cloth. Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. Vol. II. (comp. Howard MacNutt). New York: BPC, 1925. cloth.
Promulgation of Universal Peace, The. combined edition. (comp. Howard MacNutt). (New York): BPC, 1922 (1939).
[Page 557]
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Wilmette: BPC, 1943. Cloth.
Reality of Religion—Tablet Of Abdul Baha, The. New York: BPC, 1924. paper. (see #41).
Reality of Religion—Words Of Abdul Baha, The. New York: BPC, 1924, paper. (see #40).
Secret of Divine Civilization, The. trans. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1970 and 1975. cloth.
Selected Writings of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper.
Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. comp. the Research Dept. of the Universal House of Justice. trans. by a Committee at the Bahá’í World Centre and Marzieh Gail. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1978. cloth.
Some Answered Questions, comp. Laura Clifford Barney. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1908. Chicago: BPS, 1918. New York: BPC, 1930 and 1937. Wilmette: BPC, 1943, 1947 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1964, 1968 and 1971. London: BPT, New Delhi: BPT, 1973. cloth.
Some Christian Subjects. London: BPT, 1946. paper.
Tablet t0 the Beloved of God in America. trans. Ali Kuli Khan. Cambridge, Mass.: 1906. paper.
Tablet t0 the Beloved of God Ofthe Occident. trans. Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab). Chicago: BPS, 1906. paper.
Tablet t0 the Hague. London: BPT, n.d. paper.
Tablets Communes and Holy Utterances. up. (1897). paper.
Tablets Containing General Inxtructions. trans. M. A. E. (Mirza Ahmad Esphahani Sohrab). Washington: Bahai Assn. of Washington, DC, 1907. paper.
Tablets Containing Instructions. trans. Mirza Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab) and Ali Kuli Khan. Washington: Bahai Assn. of Washington, DC, 1906. paper. Tablets from Abdu’l-Bahá to E. E. Wrestling Brewster. Chicago: BPS, 1902. paper. Tablets Of Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas. Vol. I. (comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1909, 1912 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.
Tablets Of Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas. Vol. II.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
557
(comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1915 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1940. cloth.
Tablets ofAbdu’l-Bahá Abbas. Vol. III. (comp. Albert R. Windust). Chicago: BPS, 1916 and 1919. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.
Tablets Of Abdul Beha Abbas to Some American Believers in the Year 1900. New York: Board of Counsel, 707-708 Carnegie Hall, April, 1901. paper.
Tablets Of the Divine Plan, The. (trans. Ahmad Sohrab). Wilmette: BPT, 1959, 1962,1965 and 1971. (see also #7, 59 and 68). paper.
Tablets 0 f the Divine Plan, The. trans. various scholars. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. cloth. (see also #7, 58 and 68).
Tablets Revealed by Abdu’l-Bahá Abbas to the East and the West. trans. Ahmad Esphahani (Sohrab). Washington: Bahai Assembly of Washington, DC, 1908. paper.
Tablets Revealed by the Master Abdul Beha Abbas t0 the House of Justice at Chicago, to the Ladies’ Assembly ofTeaching, to Mirza Assad ’Ullah and to Other Individuals, also One to the Believers in Persia. Chicago: Press of the Hollister Bros., 1901. paper.
Tablets to Japan. (comp. Agnes Alexander). New York: BPC, 1928. paper. Talks by Abdu’l-Bahá Given in Paris. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield, and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. London, East Sheen: The Unity Press, 1912. Chicago: BPS, 1912. London: G. Bell and Sons, Ltd., 1915, 1916 and 1920. paper. (see also #35 and 73).
Traveller’s Narrative Written to Illustrate the Episode Ofthe Báb, A. trans. Edward Granville Browne. London: Cambridge University Press, 1891 (this edition issued in two volumes of which the first is the Persian text). New York: BPC, 1930. cloth.
True Belief—A bdul Baha Abbas. n.p. n.d. paper.
True Gardener, A Talk Given by Abdul Baha, The. comp. L.A.C.B. Rangoon, Burma: Rangoon Standard Press, 1903. London: The Unity Press, n.d. paper.
[Page 558]
558
67
68.
69.
70.
71.
10.
. Twelve Basic Teachings Compiled from the Words of Abdu’l-Bahá. New York: 1926. paper.
Unveiling Of the Divine Plan, The. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. New York: 1919. paper. see #7 and 58.
Utterances of Abdul Beha Abbas to Two Young Men, American Pilgrims to Acre, I 901. New York: Board of Counsel, 1901. paper.
Visiting Tablets for Our Recent Martyrs Who Suffered in Persia in 1901 with some Tablets and Prayers for the American Behais. New York: Behais Board of Counsel, 1902. paper.
Will and Testament of‘Abdu’l-Bahá’, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada, 1942. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. Wilmette: BPT, 1968, 1971 and n.d. London: BPT,
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
1950. paper.
Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, Selectionsfrom the. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1944 and 1948. paper.
Wisdom ofAbdul Bahu, The. comp. Beatrice Marion Platt, Mary Esther Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia Blomfield and Lady Sara Louisa Blomfield. New York: BPC, 1924. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. cardboard and cloth. see #35 and 63.
Wisdom Talks Of Abdu’l-Bahá (Abbas Effendi) at Chicago, Illinois, April 30th to May 5th, 1912. Chicago: Press of Bahai News Service, n.d. paper.
Woman’s Great Station in the Bahai Dispensation. n.p. 1913. paper.
World Order Through World Faith. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper.
(iv) WORKS COMPILED FROM THE WRITINGS OF BAHA’U’LLAH AND ‘ABDU’L-BAHA
. Arise and Serve: A Compilation. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. paper and cloth.
. Bahá’í Answers: A Compilation. comp. Olivia Kelsey. Independence, Mo.: Lambert Moon Printers and Publishers, 1947 and 1947 rev. cardboard and cloth.
. Bahá’í’ Community, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1947 and 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1963. New Delhi: BPT, 1964. paper.
. Bahá’í Education: A Compilation. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper.
. Bahá’í’ Institutions: A Compilation. New Delhi: BPT, 1973. paper.
. Bahá’í Meetings, The Nineteen Day Feast. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. paper.
. Bahá’í’ Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1929 and 1929 (1936 with newer translations). cloth.
. Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1935 and 1937. paper.
. Bahti’z’ Prayers. comp. NSA of USA and
Canada. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1942,
1944, 1945, 1947, 1949 and 1952. paper
and cloth.
Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA. Wil mette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT, 1954,
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18
19
1957,1962,1967,19691970,1973, 1975 and 1978. cloth and paper.
Bahá’í Prayers. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPC, 1954. Wilmette: BPT 1954 and 1970. cloth. (the ‘White’ Prayer book which includes only the first section of
- 10).
Bahá’í’ Prayers. comp. NSA of Malaysia. (Kuala Lumpur): BPT, 1970. paper. Bahá’íPrayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: 1951. cloth. Bahá’í’Prayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1945 and 1951. cloth. (this edition contains only the first section of #13).
Bahá’í Prayers: A Selection. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1967 and 1975. cloth.
Bahá’í Prayers and Meditations—The Báb, Bahá’u’lláh, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. paper. (contains two pictures of the Louhelen Bahá’í School). n.p. n.d.
Bahá’í Prayers: An Introductory Selection. comp. NSA of Malaysia. (Kuala Lumpur): BPT, 1973. paper.
Bahá’í Prayers for Special Occasions. London: BPT, 1945. cloth.
. Bahá’í’Revelation. comp. NSA of the Brit
[Page 559]
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
ish Isles. London: BPT, 1955 and 1970. cloth. ' Bahá’í Scriptures. comp. Horace Holley. New York: Brentano’s, 1923. New York: BPC, 1928. cloth.
Bahá’í World Faith. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1943 (the second 1943 edition was bound in red leather and inscribed in gold 1844—1944 as a special centennial souvenir—only 500 copies). Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1966, 1969, 1971 and 1976. cloth, fabrikoid and leather.
Bahti’z’ Writings. (comp. Amelia Collings and Alice S. Cox). Wilmette: BPC, 1942 and 1947. paper and cloth.
Book of Prayers. n.p. n.d. paper and leather.
Chalice of Immortality, The. comp. Hushidar Mutlagh. New Delhi: BPT, (1979).
Communion With God. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. ten subsequent printings. paper. Compilation N0. 9 Concerning the Most Great Peace. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1918. paper.
Compilation of the Holy Utterances Of Baha’o’llah and Abdu’l-Bahá Concerning the Most Great Peace, War and Duty Ofthe Bahais Toward Their Government. n.p. 1918 and 1918 rev. paper.
Covenant Of Bahti’u’lláh, The. Manchester, Eng.: BPT, 1950. London: BPT, 1963. cloth and fabrikoid.
Daily Prayers—Bahá’u’lláh, Báb, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. New York: BPC, n.d. paper.
Daily Prayers—Prayers and Meditations. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.
Dawn of World Civilization, The. n.p. World Order Magazine, 1945.
Divine Art of living, The. comp. Mabel Hyde Paine. Wilmette: BPC, 1944, 1946, 1949 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1960, 1965, 1970, 1972, 1973 and 1974. cloth and fabrikoid.
Divine Pearls. comp. Victoria Bedikian. n.p. n.d. paper.
Divine Wisdom of Bahá’u’lláh and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. comp. NSA of the British Isles. Manchester: BPT, 1946. paper. Glad Tidings Of Bahá’u’lláh, The. comp. George Townshend. London: John Murray, Wisdom of the East Series, 1949 and
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
559
1956. Oxford: George Ronald, 1975. paper and cloth.
. God and His Manifestations. comp. Maye
Harvey Gift. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.
Holy Utterances Revealed by Baha’Ullah and the Master, Abdu’l-Bahá Regarding the Necessity for Steadfastness and Effort in the Present Time, That Thereby the Believers May Be Strengthened and Made Ready Under All Conditions, to Stand Firm in the Covenant. Compiled 1905. n.p. paper. Individual and Teaching, Raising the Divine Call, The. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper.
Life After Death. comp. Barbara Mason. Honolulu: Hawaii Bahá’í Press, 1976. paper.
Mighty River, A. comp. Audrie Reynolds. Wilmette: BPT, 1977. paper.
New Day: Prophecies and Precepts from the Utterances Of Baha’o’llah and Abdul Baha. comp. Isabel F. Chamberlain. New York: The Fellowship Press Service, 191—. paper.
Pattern of Bahá’í’Life, The. comp. NSA Of the British Isles. Manchester: BPT, 1948. London: BPT, 1953, 1963, 1968 and 1970. paper.
Peace: A Divine Creation. n.p. 1943. paper.
Power Ofthe Covenant, The. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1956 and 1972. paper.
Power Ofthe Covenant Part One, Bahá’u’lláh’s Covenant With Mankind, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, February, 1976. paper.
Power of the Covenant Part Two, The Problem of Covenant-Breaking, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, October, 1976. paper.
Power the Covenant Part Three, The Face 0 f Opposition, The. comp. Dr. Jane Faily et al. n.p. NSA of Canada, April, 1977. paper.
Prayer of Bahá’u’lláh and Prayers and Tablets Of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd. trans. Shoghi Effendi. Boston: 1923. paper.
Prayers Revealed by Bahá’u’lláh, The Bdb, and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1939. paper.
Prayers, Tablets, Instructions, and Miscel
[Page 560]
560
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
leny Gathered by American Visitors to the Holy City During the Summer of 1900. Chicago: The Adair Press, 1900. paper. Racial Amity. comp. M. H. and M. M. (Mariam Haney and Mountfort Mills). n.p. 1924. paper.
Reality of Man, The. New York: BPC, 1931, 1935 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC, 1942, 1945 and 1947. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1962, 1966, 1972 and 1975. New Delhi: BPT, 1971. paper and cloth. River ofLife, A Selection from the Teachings of Baha Ullah and Abdu’l-Bahá with Explanation and Preface by Johanna Dawud. London: Cope & Fenwick, 1914. Selections from Bahá’í Scripture. comp. David Hofman. Manchester, Eng.: BPT, 1941. cloth.
Selections from the Holy Utterances 0n the Subject of Unity from Bahd’u’lltfih ana’ ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’. n.p. n.d. paper.
Selections from the Holy Writings on the Subject of Unity from Bahá’u’lláh and
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
‘Abdu’l-Bahá. n.p. n.d. paper.
Some Special Bahá’í’ Prayers and Tablets. London: BPT, 1945.
Spiritual Opportunity Ofthe Bahá’í’s Ofthe United States and Canada, The. comp. the NSA of the USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1926. paper.
Splendour of God, The. comp. Eric Hammond. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1910. London: John Murray, The Wisdom of the East Series, 1909 and 1910. cloth. Tablets Revealed by the Blessed Perfection and Abdul Beha Abbas Brought to this Country by Haji Mirza Hassan, Mirza Assad’Ullah and Mirza Hussien. New York: Board of Counsel, 1900. paper. Tablets Revealed in Honor Ofthe Greatest Holy Leaf. New York: J. J. Little and Ives Company, 1933. paper.
Victory Promises. Honolulu: NSA of the Bahá’ís Of the Hawaiian Islands, 1978. paper.
(v) THE WRITINGS OF SHOGHI EFFENDI
. Advent ofDivine Justice, The. New York:
BPC, 1939 and 1939. Wilmette: BPC, 1940 and 1948. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1963, 1969, 1971 and 1974. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. paper, cloth and fabrikoid.
. America and the Most Great Peace. New
York: BPC, 1933. paper.
. Bahá’íAdministration. New York: BPC,
1928, 1933 and 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1945 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1960, 1968 and 1974. paper and cloth.
. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844—1944, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. paper.
. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844—1950, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. paper.
. Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information 1844—1952, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1953.
paper. (see also section on Universal House of Justice #3 and section on ‘Writings on the Bahá’í Faith’ #24).
. Bahá’íProcedure. New York: BPC, 1937.
Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper and cloth. (the 1937 edition is loose—leaf).
8.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Bahá’í Y0uth:A Compilation. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1973. paper.
. Call to the Nations. comp. the Universal
House of Justice. Haifa: Bahá’í World Centre, 1977. Cloth.
Challenging Requirements of the Present Hour, The. Wilmette: NSA of USA and Canada, 1947. paper.
CitadelofFaith. Wilmette: BPT, 1965 and 1970. cloth.
Citadel of Faith of Bahá’u’lláh, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA, 1948. paper. Continental Boards of Counsellors. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, (1970). London: BPT, n.d. paper.
Covenant and Administration, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1950. Wilmette: BPT, 1956 and 1969. paper.
Dawn ofa New Day, The. New Delhi: BPT, 1970. paper and cloth.
. Dawn of World Civilization, The. Wil mette: BPC, 1945. paper.
. Destiny ofAmerica, The. New York: BPC,
1940. paper.
[Page 561]
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Directives from the Guardian. comp. Gertrude Garrida. New Delhi: BPT, 1973 and n.d. cloth and paper.
Dispensation Of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1934, 1937 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1947. Wilmette: BPT, 1970. London: BPT, 1947. paper and cloth.
Earth is God’s, The. London: BPT, 1947. paper.
Faith ofBahzi’u’lla’h, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. paper.
Future World Commonwealth, The. NSA of the USA and Canada, 1936. paper. Goal ofa New World Order, The. New York: BPC, 1931. Wilmette: BPC, 1931 (not the true date). Wilmette: BPT, 1971. paper.
God Given Mandate, A. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper.
God Passes By. Wilmette: BPC, 1944, 1945 and 1950. Wilmette: BPT, 1957, 1965, 1970 and 1974. paper and cloth. Golden Age of the Cause of Bahd'u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1932. paper. Guidance for Today and Tomorrow. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1953 and 1973. cloth and paper. Generation Ofthe Half-Light: A Compilation for Bahá’í Youth. comp. Arjun Rastogi. New Delhi: BPT, 1974. paper. Guidance for Youth. comp. NSA of the United Kingdom. London: BPT, 1969. paper.
Guidelines for Local Spiritual Assemblies. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1975 and 1976. paper.
Importance of Teaching Indigenous People, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, 1968. paper. Letters from Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.
Letters from the Guardian to Australia and New Zealand 1923—1957. Melbourne: NSA of Australia and New Zealand, 1970 and 1971. cloth.
Lifeblood Ofthe Cause. comp. the Universal House of Justice. London: BPT, (1970). paper.
Living the Life. comp. NSA of the British Isles. London: BPT, 1974. paper.
Local Spiritual Assembly, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette:
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
561
BPT, 1970. London: BPT, n.d. paper. Messages from the Guardian 1932—1940. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.
Messages to America 1932-1946. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. fabrikoid.
Messages to Canada. NSA of Canada, 1965. cloth.
Messages to the Bahá’í World I 95 0—1 95 7. Wilmette: BPT, 1958 and 1971. cloth. National Spiritual Assembly, The. comp. the Universal House of Justice. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper.
Passing of Abdu’l-Bahá, The. co-author Lady Blomfield. Haifa: Rosenfeld Brothers, 1922. London: BPT, n.d. paper. Pattern for Future Society. A. Wilmette: BPC, 1940, 1946 and 1948. paper. Principles of Bahá’íAdministration. London: BPT, 1950, 1963 and 1973. paper and cloth.
Principles of Mass Teaching. comp. the Universal House of Justice. NSA of Canada, 1971. see #31. paper.
Promised Day is Come, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1943 and 1951. Wilmette: BPT, 1961 and 1967. New Delhi: BPT, 1976. cloth and paper.
Religion a Living Organism. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.
Rising World Commonwealth, The. London: BPT, 1945. paper.
Selected Writings of Shoghi Bahá’í. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. Wilmette: BPT, 1975. paper.
Special Measure of Love, A. Wilmette: BPT, 1974. paper.
Spiritual Potencies of that Consecrated Spot. n.p. 1939. paper.
Unfoldment of World Civilization, The. New York: BPC, 1936. Wilmette: BPC, 1945 . paper.
World Government and Collective Security. New Delhi: NSA of India, Pakistan and Burma, 1953. paper.
World Moves on to Its Destiny, The. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. paper.
World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1929. paper.
World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, The. New York: BPC, 1938. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. Wilmette: BPT, 1955, 1969 and 1974. cloth fabrikoid and paper.
. World Order of Bahá’u’lláh—Further
[Page 562]
562 THE Bahá’í WORLD
Considerations, The. New York: BPC," 1930. paper.
58. World Order Unfolds. Wilmette: BPC, 1952. paper.
(vi) MESSAGES AND COMPILATIONS OF THE UNIVERSAL HOUSE OF JUSTICE
. Analysis of the Nine Year International Teaching Plan 1964—1973. Wilmette: BPT, 1964. paper.
. Analysis of the Five Year International
5.
Constitution Ofthe Universal House of Justice, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1972. paper.
.Five Year Plan, The. Wilmette: BPT,
Teaching Plan [974—1979. Welwyn Gar— 1974. paper.
den City, Hertfordshire: Broadwater, 7. Five Year Plan, 1974—1979: Statistical
1975. paper. Report, Riḍván 1978, The. Haifa: Bahá’í’ . Bahá’í Faith, Statistical Information World Centre, 1978. paper.
1844—1968, The. Haifa: P. Schaut, 1968. paper. (see also section on Shoghi Effendi
- 4—6 and the section entitled “Writings
on the Bahá’í Faith” #24).
. Bahá’í Holy Places at the World Centre, The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1968. cloth.
. Messages from the Universal House Oflus tice 1968—1973. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. paper and cloth.
. Wellspring Of Guidance, Messages from
the Universal House of Justice I 963 —I 968. Wilmette: 1969 and 1970. paper and cloth.
(vii) WRITINGS ON THE Bahá’í FAITH
. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, FifiiethAnniversaryoins 9. Amatu’l-Bahá’ Visits India. Violette Passing, Wilmette: World Order Nafiljavéni. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. Magazine, 1971. paper and cloth. paper.
. Abdu’l-Bahá in Egypt. Ahmad Sohrab. New York: New History Foundation, 1929. London: Ryder & Co., n.d. cloth.
1958. Wilmette: BPT, 1960 and 1963. London: BPT, 1975. paper and cloth.
10.
Appreciations Of the Bahá’í Faith. Wilmette: BPC, 1941, 1947, and 1948. paper.
. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá the Center Ofthe Covenant. 11. Architectural Compositions in the Indian Juliet Thompson. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. Style. Designs for Temples and Shrines. paper. Charles Mason Remey. Boston: The
. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá the Centre Ofthe Covenant Tudor Press, 1923. paper. of Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. Lon- 12. Architectural Exhibition of a Series of don: George Ronald, 1971 and 1972. Preliminary Designs by Charles Mason paper and cloth. Remey for the Mashrak El Azkar (Bahá’í
. Abdu’l-Bahá’s First Days in America. Temple). n.p. n.d. paper. comp. Juliet Thompson. East Aurora. 13. Auguste Forel and the Bahá’í Faith with N.Y.: The Roycrofters, 1924. paper. Commentary by Peter Mahlschlegel.
. Addresses. Abdel Karim Effendi Tehe— Oxford: George Ronald, 1978. paper. rani. trans. Anton F. Haddad. Chicago: 14. Bab, the Herald Ofthe Day ofDays, The. Behais Supply and Publishing Board, Hasan M. Balyuzi. Oxford: George 1900. paper. Ronald, 1973 and 1973. paper and cloth.
. Akka Lights. Mr.& Mrs.Joseph H.Han- 15. Bab-Ed-Din, the Door of True Relignen. 1909. paper. ion. Ibrahim George Kheiralla.
. All Things Made New. John Ferraby. Chicago: Chas. H. Kerr and Company, London: George Allen & Unwin, 1957 1897. paper. and 1960. New York: Macmillan Co., 16. Bahti’z’Appeal for Religious Freedom in
Iran. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1956. paper.
[Page 563]
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.1
31.
32.
33.
34.
BAHA’I BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bahai Attitude Toward War, The. San Francisco Bahá’í’ Assembly n.d. paper. Bahá’í’ Case Against Mrs. Lewis Stuyyvesant Chanler and Mirza Ahmad Sohrab—A Statement Prepared for the Members of the American Bahá’í’ Community, The. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada. 1941. paper.
Bahá’í’ Centenary 1844—1944, The. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. fabrikoid.
Bahai Congress. Chicago: 1916. paper. Bahai Faith, The. G. Palgrave Simpson. London: 1920. paper.
Bahá’í Faith, An Introduction, The. Gloria Faizi. Beirut, 1971. Wilmette: BPT, 1972, 1975 and 1978. paper. Bahá’í Faith by a Methodist Layman, The. A. J. Truesdell. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.
Bahá’í Faith, Statistical In formation 1844~1 963, The. comp. the Hands of the Cause Residing in the Holy Land. Ramat Gan Israel, Peli-P.E.C. Printing Works Ltd. paper. (see also the section on Shoghi Effendi #4—6 and the section on the Universal House of Justice #3). Bahá’í Faith, The Dawn ofa New Day, The. Jessyca Russell Gaver. New York; Hawthorn Books Inc., 1967. cloth. (same as #113).
Bahá’í Follower Ofthe Light. Ray Meyer. NSA of Australia, 1972. Wilmette: BPT. paper.
Bahá’í Glossary. Marzieh Gail. Wilmette: BPT, 1955 and 1969. paper. Bahá’í Group, The. comp. NSA of USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.
Bahai House of Worship, Description a f the Temple with Illustrations, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1917. paper.
Bahai Hymns and Poems. Louise R. Waite. Chicago: BPS, 1904. New York: BPC, 1927. paper.
Bahai Hymns of Peace and Praise. L. R. Waite. n.p. 1908. paper.
Bahai Indexes. Charles Mason Remey. Newport, R.I.: 1923. paper.
Bahai Library Committee. Charles Mason Remey. Firenze, Italy: 1925. paper.
Bahai Library of Constructive Religion, The Peace of the World, The. Charles
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
563
Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. cloth. (same as #204).
Bahai Manuscripts. Charles Mason Remey. Newport, R.I.: 1923. paper. Bahai Martyrdoms in Persia in the Year I 903 A.D. Haji Mirza Haydar Ali. trans. Dr. Youness Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1904 and 1917 rev. paper.
Bahai Message, The. comp. Horace Holley. Chicago: BPS, 1920. paper.
Bahai Movement, A Series of Nineteen Papers Upon the Bahai Movement, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans and Sons, 1912 and 1912 (actually printed several years later). cloth.
Bahai Movement for Universal Religion, Brotherhood, and Peace, A Sketch oflts History and Teachings, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: PersianAmerican Bulletin, 1912. paper.
Bahá’í’ Movement: Aims & Purposes of the Bahá’í Faith, Outline oinstory, Principles of Administration, Excerpts from the Sacred Writings, and Reading List, The. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1931. paper.
Bahai Movement in Its Social-Economic Aspect, The. Helen Campbell. Chicago: BPS, 1915. paper. (see # 50).
Bahai Movement—Its Spiritual Dynamic, The. Albert R. Vail. n.p. n.d. paper.
Bahá’í’ Persecutions in Persia. comp. NSA of USA and Canada. New York: BPC, 1926. paper.
Bahai Proofs“. Mirza Abul Fazl. trans. Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). Chicago: BPS, 1914. New York: BPC, 1929. cloth. (see also #78).
Bahai Religion, The. Horace Holley and Ruhi Afnan. New York: BPC, 1925. paper.
Bahai Revelation, The. Thornton Chase. Chicago: BPS, 1909, 1913 and 1919. New York: BPC, (1928). paper and cloth.
Bahai Revelation, The. Mrs. Scaramucci. London: The Priory Press, 1911. paper. Bahai Revelation and Reconstruction, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper and cloth.
Bahaism: The Modern Social Religion.
[Page 564]
564
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
THE BAHA’t WORLD
Horace Holley. London: Sidgwick &, Jackson Ltd., 1913. New York: Mitchell Kennerly, 1913. cloth.
Bahaism in Its Social-Economic Aspect. Helen Campbell. Chicago: BPS, 1910. paper. (see also #41 of this section). Bahaism the Religion of Brotherhood and Its Place in the Evolution of Creeds. Francis Henry Skrine. London: Longmans Green and Company, 1912. cloth. Bahai Teachings, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. cloth.
Bahai Temple: Press Comments, Symbolism, The. comp. Louis Bourgeois. Chicago: 1921. paper.
Bahai the Spirit of the Age. Horace Holley. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Co., 1921. New York: Brentano’s, 1921. cloth.
Bahá’í World Volume II (1 926—1928), The. New York: BPC, 1928. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume 111 (1928—1930), The. New York: BPC, 1930. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume IV (1 930—1932), The. New York: BPC, 1933. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume V (1932—1934), The. New York: BPC, 1936. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume V1 (1934—1936), The. New York: BPC, 1937. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume VII (1 936—~1 938), The. New York: BPC, 1939. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume VIII (19381940), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. cloth.
Bahá’í World Volume IX (1940—I 944), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume X (1944—1946), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume XI (1946—1950), The. Wilmette: BPC, 1952. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume X11 (1 950—1 954), The. Wilmette: BPT, 1956. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume XIII (19541963), The. Haifa: The Universal House of Justice, 1970 and 1971. cloth. Bahá’í World Volume XIV (19631968), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1975. cloth.
Bahá’í World Volume XV (1 968—1 973), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre, 1976. cloth.
Bahá’í World Volume XVI (I 968 70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
1976), The. Haifa: The Bahá’í World Centre. 1979. cloth.
Bahá’í Writings, A Concordance. comp. Hugh Carden. NSA of New Zealand, Feb. 1975, Aug. 1975, Jan. 1976. and Sep. 1976. paper.
Bahá’í’ Year Book Volume I (19251926), The. New York: BPC, 1926. cloth. (see #53—67 of this section). Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: BPT, 1938 and n.p. 1938, paper. Bahá’u’lláh. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: George Ronald, 1963, 1968, 1970, 1972, 1973, 1974 and 1976. paper and cloth.
Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era. John Ebenezer Esslemont. London: George Allen & Unwin Ltd., 1923 and 1940. New York: Brentano’s, (1924) and (1925). New York: BPC, 1927, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1937, 1938 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1942, 1944, 1946, 1948, 1950 and 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1956, 1960,1966,1970,1975,1976 and 1978. London: BPT, 1952 and 1974. cloth, fabrikoid and paper.
Bahá’u’lláh and His Message. J. E. Esslemont. n.p. 1938. paper. Bahá’u’lláh’s Ground Plan OfWorld Fellowship. George Townshend. London: World Congress of Faiths, 1936 and 1938. paper. (see The Bahá’í World, vol. V1, p. 614).
Before Abraham Was I Am. Thornton Chase. Chicago: 1902. paper.
Behai Proofi, The. Mirza Abul Fazel. trans. Ishteal Ibn Kalantar (Ali Quli Khan). New York: J. W. Pratt Co., 1902. cloth. (see also #42 of this section). Bounties of the Kingdom—A Fairy Play, The. Evangeline Elizabeth Crowell Dunlop. Riverton, N.J.: The New Era Press, 1916. paper.
BriefAccount of the Bahai Movement, A. G. Palgrave Simpson and Ethel J. Rosenberg. West Kensington, Eng.: Burnside Ltd. n.d. London: The Priory Press, J. M. Watkins, 1911. paper. Brief Account of My Visit to Acca, A. Mary L Lucas. Chicago: BPS, 1905. paper.
Brief Sketch of Behaism, A. Ethel J. Rosenberg. London: R. F. Hunger, 310
[Page 565]
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Euston Rd., N.W., 1905. paper. Brilliant Proof, The. Mirza Abul Fazl. Chicago: Bahai News Service, 1912. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. paper.
Buddha and Amitabha. Shirin Fozdar. Calcutta: Daw Sen & Co., printed at the Anna Art Press Private Ltd. paper. Buddha Maitraya Amitabha Has Appeared. Jamshid Fozdar. New Delhi: BPT, 1976. cloth and paper.
Call of God, The. George Orr Latimer. Chicago: BPS, n.d. paper.
Character, A Sequence in Spiritual Psychology. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: The Avalon Press, 1938 and 1971. paper and cloth.
Chosen Highway, The. Lady Blomfield. London: BPT, n.d. Wilmette: BPC, n.d. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1970. paper and cloth.
Christ and Bahá’u’lláh. George Townshend. London: George Ronald, 1957, 1957, 1966, 1967, 1971, 1972 and 1976. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1970. paper and cloth.
Christianity of Jesus, The. Richard Backwell. Portlaw, Ireland: Volturna Press, 1972. cloth. .
Closer Than Your Life Vein. Henry A. Weil. NSA of Alaska, 1978. paper. Coming of the Glory. The. Florence E. Pinchon. London: Simpkin Marshall Ltd., 1928. cloth.
Commentary on the Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. David Hofman. London: George Ronald, 1943, 1947 and 1955. paper.
Constructive Principles 0 f the Bahai Movement. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. Chicago: BPS, 1917. paper and cloth. Continuity of the Prophets, The. Myrtle W. Campbell. New York: The Pageant Press, 1952. cloth.
Covenant, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Bahai Assembly of Washington DC, 1912. paper and cardboard.
Daily Lessons Received at Acca, January I 908. Helen S. Goodall and Ella Goodall Cooper. Chicago: BPS, 1908 and 1917. cardboard. Dawn-Breakers,
The. Nabil-i-A‘2am
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
565
Muhammad-i—Zarandi. trans. Shoghi Effendi. New York: BPC, 1932 (a limited edition specially bound numbering 150 copies autographed by the translator) and 1932 (the regular edition). Wilmette: BPC, 1953. Wilmette: BPT, 1962, 1970 and 1974. London: BPT, 1953 and 1975. leather, cloth and paper. Dawn of Knowledge and the Most Great Peace, The. Paul Kingston Dealy. Chicago: BPS, 1903, 1905 and 1908. paper.
Dawn Over Mount Him and Other Essays. Marzieh Gail. Oxford: George Ronald, 1976. cloth.
Declaration of Trust and By-Laws ofa Local Spiritual Assembly. New York: BPC, 1933. Wilmette: NSA of the USA and Canada, 1945. Wilmette: BPC, 1949. Wilmette: BPT, 1965, 1969 and 1975. paper.
Diary Letters of Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Chicago: Mrs. Fanny G. Lesch. (various volumes) cardboard.
Divine Revelation the Basis ofAll Civilization. Anton F. Haddad. New York: Board of Counsel, 1902. paper.
Divine Secret for Human Civilization, The. n.p. n.d. paper.
Divine Secret for Human Civilization, The. Josephine D. Storey. Geneva, Switz.: Quo Vadis, 1928. paper.
Divine Springtime. Daniel Nelson Wegener. Tegucigalpa, Honduras: Union Press, 1977. paper.
Divine Symphony. Gayle Woolson. New Delhi: BPT, 1971 and 1977. paper. Do’a: The Call to Prayer. Ruth Ellis Moffett. Chicago: 1933, 1938 and 1953. paper.
Do’a: 0n the Wings ofPrayer. Ruth Ellis Moffett. Des Moines, Ia.: Wallace Homestead Co., 1974. paper.
Dr. J. E. Esslemont. Moojan Momen. London: BPT, 1975. paper.
Drama Ofthe Kingdom, The. Mrs. Basil Hall. London: The Weardale Press, 1933. cloth.
Dream of God, The. Albert Durant Watson. Chicago: BPS, 1922. paper. Dynamic New Religion Bahá’í Faith, The. Jessyca Russell Gaver. New York: Award Books, 1968 and 1968. paper.
[Page 566]
566
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
(see also #25 of this section).
Early Pilgrimage, An. May Maxwell. n.p. 1917. London: George Ronald, 1953, 1969, 1974 and 1976. paper.
Earth is but One Country, The. John Huddleston. London: BPT, 1976. cloth. Edward Granville Browne and the Bahá’í Faith. Hasan M. Balyuzi. London: George Ronald, 1970. cloth.
Episodes in the Life of Moneereh Khánum. trans. Ahmad Sohrab. Los Angeles: Persian—American Publishing Co., 1924. paper.
Epistle to the Bahai World, An. Mirza Badi’Ullah. trans. Dr. Ameen’Ullah Fareed. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper. Essential Mysticism, The. Stanwood Cobb. Boston: The Four Seas Company, 1918. cloth.
Eternal Voice, The. Cornelia A. Norder. Rhinelander, Wis.: Legacy Press, 1972 and 1975. paper.
Explanations Concerning Sacred M ysteries. Mirza Assad’Ullah. trans. Dr. Fareed. Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1902. cloth.
Fallacy of Ancestor Worship, The. Jamshed Fozdar. Bombay, 1965. paper. 52 Bahá’í Talks for Every Occasion. S. 1. Dean. NSA of Malaysia, (1965) and 1977. paper.
Fire on the Mountaintop. Gloria Faizi. London: BPT, 1973. paper.
Firmness in the Covenant. Charles Mason Remey. 1918. n.p. paper.
Five Preliminary Architectural Sketches for the Temple Ofthe Mashrak-El-Azkar, which the Followers of the Bahai Movement are to Build Upon the Shore ofLake Michigan at Chicago. Washington: 1916. paper.
Flame ofFire, A. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, 1969 and 1973. paper. Flame——The Story of Lua, The. William Sears and Robert Quigley. London: George Ronald, 1972. paper and encased.
Flowers Culled from the Rose Garden of Akka. Ida A. Finch, Fanny A. Knobloch and Alma S. Knobloch. n.p. (1910). paper.
Follow a Dream Time, Father and Mother Dunn the Spiritual Conquerors of
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
a Continent. Commemorating the Fifiieth Anniversary Ofthe Arrival Ofthe Bahá’í Faith in Australia 18 April 1970. Paddington, New South Wales: NSA of Australia, 1970. paper.
Freedom of Religion on Trial in Morocco—The Nador Case. New York: Bahá’í Information Center, 1963. paper. From Strength t0 Strength. Eunice Braun. Wilmette: BPT, 1978. paper.
Glimpses of Abdu’l-Bahá. ‘Roy’ (Wilhelm) and M. J. M. (Mountfort J. Mills). n.p. n.d. paper.
Glorious Kingdom of the Father Foretold, The. Virgie V. Vail. New York: BPC, 1940. fabrikoid.
God, His Mediator and Man —A Study in Comparative Religion. Pritan Singh and Doris McKay. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.
God Loves Laughter. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1960, 1961, 1964, 1968, 1970 and 1974. paper and cloth.
God's Heroes. Laura Clifford Barney. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Co., 1910. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1910. cloth.
Great Themes of Life. Eric Bowes. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. cloth.
Heartofthe Gospel. The. George Townshend. London: Lindsay Drummond, 1939. New York: BPC, 1940. London: George Ronald, 1951, 1955 and 1960. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper and cloth. Heralds of Peace. Beatrice Irwin. n.p. 1938. paper.
Heavenly Feast, Some Utterances Of Abdu’l-Bahá to Two American Pilgrims (Charles and Mariam Haney) in Acca, Syria, February 1909—Interpreted by Dr. Fareed and Taken Down in Stenographic Notes by Mariam Haney During 9 Days in Acca, A. n.p. n.d. paper. Heavenly Vista, A. Louis Gregory. Washington: R. L. Pendleton, 1911. paper.
Heavens are Cleft Asunder, The. Huschmand Sabet. Oxford: George Ronald, 1975. paper and cloth.
History of the Bahá’í Faith in Japan 1914—1938. Agnes Baldwin Alexander. Japan: BPT, 1977. paper.
[Page 567]
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
BAHA’T BIBLIOGRAPHY
Illustrated Description of a Design in the Persian-Indian Style of Architecture for the First Mashrak El Azkar (Bahai Temple) to Be Erected in America. Humbly Offered to the Center of the Covenant through the Bahai Temple Unity by C.M.R. Apri126—28, 1920. Washington: C.M.R., 1920. paper.
In Galilee and In Spirit and In Truth. Thornton Chase and Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, 1908. paper. (see #147). In Galilee and In Wonderland. Thornton Chase and Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, 1921. paper. (see #146).
Indian Style ofArchitecture, The. Charles Mason Remey. Boston: 1925. paper. Instruction Given by Mirza Assad Ullah t0 Isabella D. Brittingham in Johnstown, New York November, 1900, and Taken Down in Notes from His Lips as He Spoke, An. n.d. n.p. paper.
Instructions Concerning Genesis and the Mystery ofBaptism. Mirza Assad ‘Ullah. trans. Alla Khuli Khan. n.p. n.d. paper. Karma and the Fallacy ofReincarnation. Jamshed Fozdar. Malaysia: BPT, 1977. paper.
Knock and It Shall Be Opened to You. ‘Roy’ (Wilhelm) and M. J. M. (Mountfort J. Mills). n.p. n.d. paper.
Knowing God Through Love and Farewell Address of Mirza Abul Fazl. Washington: Bahai Assembly of Washington DC, 1904. paper. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. I, Fulfillment in this Age of the Old and New Testament Prophecies etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans, Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahai Literature Center, n.d. paper. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 2, The Ideals Ofthe New Age etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahai Literature Center, n.d. paper. Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 3, The Universal Consciousness of Christ, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. Trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahai Literature
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
567
Center, n.d. paper.
Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 4, Man is the Collective Center of All Phenomena, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahai Literature Center. paper.
Lectures Giving the Solution of the World’s Problems from a Universal Standpoint Series No. 5, The New Vision oflmmortality, etc. Mirza Jenabe Fazel. trans. Mirza Ahmad Sohrab. Seattle: The Bahai Literature Center, n.d. paper. Lesson in Religion. Mohammed Ali Alkany. trans. Edith Roohie Sanderson. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1923. paper. Lessons on the Beha Revelation, in separate parts. W. Hooper Harris. Bayonne, N.J.: Charles E. Sprague, (1901). paper. Letterfrom Honolulu, A. Charles Mason Remey. Honolulu: Charles Mason Remey, Feb. 17, 1917. paper.
Letter Written by Mirza Abul Hussein 0n Behalfofthe ‘Friends’ oflsfahan Persia, to the American Believers. trans. Mirza Ameen ‘Ullah (Fareed). April 25, 1902. n.p. paper.
Life and Teachings of Abbas Effendi, The. Myron H. Phelps. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1903, 1904 and 1912. cloth.
Life Plan, A. Peter Esslemont. London: George Ronald, 1953. cloth.
Life with Nayan. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1969. paper. Light of the World, The. by a group of pilgrims. Boston: George Orr Latimer, 1920. paper.
Light Shineth in Darkness, The. Udo Schaefer. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. paper.
Martinist’s Report, An Investigation of Bahaism. Gabriel Sassi. trans. Honore J . Jaxon. Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, 1901. paper. Mashrak-El-Azkar. Charles Remey. n.p. 1916. paper. Mashrak-El—Azkar, Descriptive of the Bahai Temple and Illustrative 0 f an Exhibition 0 f Preliminary Designs forthe First Mashrak-El-Azkar to be Built in America, Showing Nine Varying Treat Mason
[Page 568]
568
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
ments in Different Styles 0 f Architecture. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: J. D. Milans & Sons, 1917. cloth. Mashriqu’l-Adhkár and the Bahai Movement. Jean Masson. Chicago: Executive Board of the Bahai Temple Unity, 1921. paper.
Maxim ofBahaism, The. Anton F. Haddad. New York: Board of Counsel. n.d. paper.
Meditations ofa Bahai Christian. E. T. Hall. Manchester: C. E. Bennet and Company, 1912. paper.
Memories of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: The Avalon Press, n.d. paper.
Memorial Services of Abdu’l-Bahá on Mount Carmel, Palestine. comp. Dr. Zia Bagdadi. n.p. 1922. paper.
Message from Acca, A. Anton F. Haddad. Board of Counsel (New York), n.d. paper.
Message of the Kingdom of God, The. James F. Brittingham. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and 1909. paper.
Message of Unity—The Bahai Movement, The. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Oct. 19, 1908. paper. Milly, A. Tribute to Amelia E. Collins. Abu’l-Qásim Faizi. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. paper.
Mission of Bahá’u’lláh and Other Literary Pieces, The. George Townshend. London: George Ronald, 1952. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1971. cloth. Most Great Peace, The. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1916. Shanghai, China: Ta Tung She, 1932. paper.
Mu’lla Husayn. L. Johnson. n.p. n.d. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d. paper. My Pilgrimage to the Land of Desire. Marie A. Watson. New York: BPC, 1932. paper.
Mysticism and the Bahá’í Revelation. Ruhi Afnan. New York: BPC, 1934. paper.
Mysticism, Science and Revelation. Glenn A. Shook. London: George R0na1d,1953, 1954 and 1964. Wilmette: BPT,1967,1970,1974 and 1976. cloth. My Visit to Abbas Effendi in 1899. Margaret Bloodgood Peeke. Chicago: The Grier Press, 1911. cloth.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
194.
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
Nabz’l’s Narrative Abridged. Zena Sorabjee. New Delhi: BPT, 1974 and 1976. cloth and paper.
Narcissus toAkka, The. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. paper. NationalSpiritualAssembly Ofthe Bahd’zlv Of the United States. Wilmette: NSA of USA, 1975. paper.
New Day, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper and cardboard.
New Garden, The. Hooshmand Fathea’zam. New Delhi: BPT, 1958, 1963 and 1971. paper.
New Holy City, The. Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. New York: Mutual Publishing Company, 1901. cloth.
New Keys to the Book of Revelation. Ruth J. Moffett. New Delhi: BPT, 1977. cloth and paper.
New Light on the Spirit Path, The. Ted Claus. Wilmette: BPT, 1971. paper. New Revelation: Its Marvelous Message, The. C0]. Nathan Ward Fitzgerald. Tacoma, Wash.: 1905. paper and cloth. Nonagonal Temple in the Indian Style of Architecture, A. Charles Mason Remey. Italy: 1927. paper.
Notes Taken at Acca. Corinne True. Chicago: BPS, 1907. paper.
Not Every Sea Hath Pearls. Loulie Albee Mathews. Milford, N.H.: The Cabinet Press, 1951. paper (earlier printings have the title imprinted on the spine). Observations of a Bahai Traveller. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Carnahan Press, (1909). Washington: J. D. Milans and Sons, 1915. paper and cloth.
Oneness of Mankind, The. comp. Mariam Haney and Louis Gregory. New York: BPC, 1927. paper.
Open Letter to the Bahais of America, An. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1918. paper.
Oriental Rose or the Teachings ofAbdul Baha, The. Mary Hanford Ford. New York: Broadway Publishing Company, 1910 (of the two printings of the New York edition the first has a seriffed monogram on the spine, the second a ‘bullseye’ monogram). Chicago: BPS, 1910 (actually printed at a later date). cloth.
[Page 569]
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
569
PassingofShoghi Effendi, The. Rúḥíyyih 215. Protection of the Cause of God, The.
Khánum and John Ferraby. London: BPT, 1958. paper.
Peace Ofthe World, The. Charles Mason Remey. Chicago: BPS, 1919. paper. (see also #34).
Personal Recollections 0 fa Bahti’t’Life in the Hawaiian Islands, Forty Years Ofthe Bahá’í’ Cause in Hawaii, 1902—1942. Miss Agnes Alexander. NSA of the Bahá’ís of the HawaiianIslands,1974.paper. Persian-American Educational Society Incorporated Statement and Constitution and By-Laws. Washington: 1910. paper. Pilgrimage to Thonon, A. Horace Ho]ley. Letchworth, Herts.: Garden City Press, Ltd., 1911. paper.
Portals to Freedom. Howard Colby Ives. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1937. Cynthiana, Kentucky: The Hobson Press, 1943. London: George Ronald, 1943,1946,1948,1953,1962 and 1969. Wilmette: BPT, 1967 and 1972. paper and cloth.
Prescription for Living. Rúḥíyyih Rabbani. London: George Ronald, 1950 (an edition of 300 copies in dark blue cloth serial numbered and autographed by the author), 1950 (regular edition), 1960 and 1969. paper and cloth.
Priceless Pearl, The. Rúḥíyyih Rabbani. London: BPT, 1969 (an edition of 1500 copies in red cloth serial numbered and autographed by the author) and 1969 (regular edition). cloth and paper. Prisoner and the Kings, The. William Sears. Toronto: General Publishing Company, Ltd., 1971. paper.
Promise of All Ages, The. Christophil (George Townshend). London: Simpkin Marshall Ltd., 1934. New York: BPC, 1935. cloth. (see #210).
Promise of All Ages, The. George Townshend. New York: BPC, 1938. London: Lindsay Drummond, (1940). Wilmette: BPC, 1944. London: George Ronald, 1948 and 1961. Wilmette: BPT, 1972. paper and cloth.
Prospectus: A Series of Five Lectures Upon the Universal Religious and Social Principles of the Bahai Movement, A. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: 1919. paper.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231.
Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1918. paper. Qua’dtis. L. Johnson. n.d. n.p. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d. paper.
Quest for Eden, The. Elena Maria MarselIa. New York: The Philosophical Library, 1966. paper and cloth.
Race and Man. Maye Harvey Gift and Alice Simmons Cox. Wilmette: BPC, 1943 and 1945. paper.
Radiant Living. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1970. paper. Rays from the Sun of Truth. Ida Finch. n.p. n.d. paper.
Reconciliation of Races and Religions, The. Thomas Kelly Cheyne. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1914. cloth. Release the Sun. William Sears. New Delhi: BPT, 1957. Wilmette: BPT, 1960, 1964, 1970 and 1975. cloth and paper. Religion for Mankind. Horace Holley. London: George Ronald, 1956 and 1963. Wilmette: BPT, 1966 and 1976. paper and cloth.
Religious Unity. Charles Mason Remey. June. 1906. n.p. paper.
Renewal of Civilization, The. David Hofman. London: George Ronald, 1945,1946,1947,1949,1953,1960 and 1969. New Dehli: BPT, 1969. Wilmette: BPT, 1970 and 1972. paper and cloth. Report of the Bahai Committee of Investigation 1917—1918. Charles Mason Remey, H. Emogene Hoagg, George 0. Latimer and Louis Gregory. n.p. n.d. paper.
Report to Abdu’l-Bahá of the Bahai Activities in the States ofNorth Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia and Florida U.S.A Charles Mason Remey. n.p. March—April, 1919. paper.
Revelation ofBaha Ullah, The. Isabella D. Brittingham. Chicago: BPS, 1902 and 9th ed. 1920. paper.
Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh Volume I (1853—1863). Adib Taherzadeh. Oxford: George Ronald, 1974 and 1975. paper and cloth.
Revelation of Bahd’u'lhih Volume II (1863—1868). Adib Taherzadeh. Oxford: George Ronald, 1977. cloth. School of the Prophets, The. Mirza Assad’u’llah. trans. Dr. Fareed. Chicago:
[Page 570]
570
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.‘
245.
246.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
BPS, 1907. cloth.
Secret ofLife, The. Mary Hanford Ford. 247.
San Francisco: Press of A. Carlisle and Co., Upham and Rutledge Inc., 1933. paper.
Security for a Failing World. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1934 and 1940. New York: BPC, 1934 and 1940. Wilmette: BPC, 1947. New Delhi: BPT, 1971 and 1977. paper and cloth. Series 0 f Twelve Articles Introductory to the Study of the Bahá’í Teachings, A. Charles Mason Remey. Florence, Italy: 1925. cloth.
Seven Articles Upon the Bahá’í’Religious Movement. Riverton, N.J., 1919. paper. Sheltering Branch, The. Marzieh Gail. London: BPT, 1941. London: George Ronald, 1959. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1970. London: George Ronald, 1974. cloth.
Shoghi Effendi Recollections. Ugo Giachery. Oxford: George Ronald, 1973. cloth.
So Great a Cause. Kenneth D. Stephens. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1973. paper and cloth.
Social Principle, The. Horace Holley. New York: L. J. Gomme, 1915. encased. Some Early Bahá’í’s Of the West. 0. Z. Whitehead. Oxford: George Ronald, 1976 and 1977. cloth.
Song Celestial, The. Howard Colby Ives. Portland, Ore.: Shankle Printing, 1938. Chicago: The Landon Press, 1938. (reprints of the Shankle printing—with frontispiece 1962 and in reduced size 1973). fabrikoid and cloth.
Songs ofPrayer and Praise. comp. Louise R. Waite. Chicago: 1912. paper.
Spell Of the Temple, The. Allen Boyer McDaniel. New York: The Vantage Press, 1953. cloth.
Spiritual Assembly’s Growing Pains, A. Amatu’l-Bahá Rúḥíyyih Khánum. New Delhi: BPT, n.d. Sydney: NSA of Australia2 1976. paper.
Statement on the Will and Testament of ‘Abdu’l—Bahd, Charter ofa Divine Civilization. Wilmette: NSA of USA and Canada, 1942. paper.
Station of the Manifestation and the Greatness of the Day, The. New York:
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
259.
260.
261.
262.
263.
264
Board of Counsel, 1901. paper.
Story Ofthe Bahá’í’ Movement, A Universal Religion, The. Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, Mayle’s Penny Series. 1907, 1908 and 1912. paper. Story of Louis G. Gregory, The. Elsie Austin. Wilmette: BPT, 1955. paper. Studies in Jewish Mysticism. Loulie Mathews et al. n.p. n.d. paper.
Success in Teaching. Rfihl’yyih Khánum. Wilmette: BPT, 1965. paper.
Sunburst. Lorol Schopflocher. London: Ryder & Co., 1938. cloth.
Table Talks by Abdu’l-Bahá Taken Down in Persian by Mirza Hadi at Acca, Feb. 1907. Trans. A. U. Fareed at Chicago Jul. 1907, Also Notes Taken by C. True. Chicago: BPS, 1907. paper.
Table Talks at Acca. Arthur S. Agnew. Chicago: BPS, Nov. 1907. paper.
Table Talks with Abdu’l-Bahá in February, 1904. Mr. and Mrs. George T. Winterburn. trans. Mirza Youness Khan. Chicago: BPS, 1908 and 1915. paper. Táhirih. Clara A. Edge. Grand Rapids, Mich.: Edgeway Publishing Company, 1964. cloth.
Tdhirih. L. Johnson. n.p. n.d. Toronto: NSA of Canada, n.d.
Ttihirih the Pure: Iran’s Greatest Woman. Martha Root. n.p. 1938. paper, cloth and cloth with gold lettering.
Tarikh-i—Jadid, The. Mirza Husayn of Hamadan. trans. Edward Granville Browne. Cambridge, Eng.: Cambridge University Press, 1893. cloth.
Ten Days in the Light ofAcca. Julia M. Grundy. Chicago: BPS, 1907 and n.d. Wilmette: BPT, 1979. paper and cloth. Thief in the Night. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1961, 1964, 1968, 1969, 1972, 1977 and 1978. paper. This Earth One Country. Emeric Sala. Boston: Bruce Humpheries Inc., 1945. cloth.
Three Meditations on the Eve of November the Fourth. Abul Qasim Faizi. London: BPT, 1970 and 1972. cloth. Through Warring Countries to the Mountain of God. Charles Mason Remey. Washington: Charles Mason Remey, 1915. cloth.
. Tomorrow and Tomorrow. Stanwood
[Page 571]
265.
266.
267.
268.
269.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
270.
Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1951. Wilmette: BPC, 1951. Wilmette: BPT, 1960 and 1970. paper.
Translation of a Letter Written by the Hebrew Assembly of the Bahais Of Teheran Persia t0 the House of Spirituality Chicago III. for the Perusal ofall American Friends. New York: Bahá’í Board of Counsel, n.d. paper.
Translation of the French Footnotes Ofthe Dawn-Breakers. Emily McBride Perigord. New York: BPC, 1939. Wilmette: BPT, 1970. paper.
Treasures of the East. Dr. Zia M. Bagdadi. Chicago: (1929). cloth.
Tribute to Shoghi Effendi, A. Amelia Collins. Wilmette: BPT, n.d. paper. Trouble, How to Meet It—Better Still How to Avoid It. Stanwood Cobb. Washington: Avalon Press, 1970. paper.
271.
272.
273.
274.
275.
276.
277.
571
Trustees of the Merciful. NSA Of the USA. Wilmette: BPT, 1958, paper. Trustees of the MercifiAl. Adib Taherzadeh. London: BPT, 1972. paper. Truth ofIt, The. Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. New York: The Mutual Publishing Company, 1901. cloth.
Twenty-Five Years of the Guardianship. Rfihl’yyih Khánum. Wilmette: BPC, 1948. paper.
239 Days, ‘Abdu’l—Bahd’s Journey in America. Allan L. Ward. Wilmette: BPT, 1979. cloth.
Two Shall Appear. Olivia Kelsey. n.p. 1943. Independence, Mo.: Lambert Moon, 1943. paper.
Unity—The Revelation of Baha’Ullah. Charles Mason Remey. n.p. 1905. paper. Unity Through Love. Howard MacNutt. from notes of Hooper Harris. Chicago:
Bahá’í literature display sponsored by the Bahá’í Publishing Trust ofItaly during the annual Milan Trade Fair held on I 4 ~23 April I 978. Bahá’í books in ten languages and in Braille were exhibited.
[Page 572]
572
BPS, 1906 nd 1908. paper.
Unity Triumphant. Elizabeth Herrick. London: Kegan Paul Trench Trubner & Company, 1923. cloth.
Universal Consciousness Of the Bahá’í’ Religion, The. Charles Mason Remey. Firenze, Italy: Tipografia Sordamoti, 1925. paper and cloth.
Universal Principles of the Bahá’í’ Movement, Social, Economic, Governmental, The. Washington: The Persian—American Bulletin, 1912. paper.
Universal Religion, The. E. T. Hall. NSA of the British Isles, 1927. paper. Universal Religion: Bahaism, The. Hippolyte Dreyfus. London: Cope & Fenwick, 1909. Chicago: BPS, 1909. cloth. Views ofAcca, Haifa, Mount Carmel and Other Holy Places. Chicago: Behais Supply and Publishing Board, n.d. Chicago: BPS, 1918. paper, cloth and leather. What is a Bahai? J. E. Esslemont. Burnside Ltd., n.d. Chicago: Louis Bourgeois, 1921. paper.
What Went Ye Out For to See? Thornton Chase. n.p. n.d. paper. Whence Comes the
278.
279.
280.
281.
282.
283.
284.
285.
286. Light? Loulie
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Mathews. New York: BPC, 1929. paper. Whettce? Why? Whither? Man! Things! Other Things! Arthur Pillsbury Dodge. Westwood, Mass.: The Arie] Press, G. E. Littlefield, 1907. cloth.
Whoso Readeth Let Him Understand. David. New York: n.d. paper.
Wine of Astonishmettt, The. William Sears. London: George Ronald, 1963, 1970 and 1974. paper.
Wise Man From the East, A. Felicia R. Scratchard. The Unity Press, 1912. paper.
World Faith, A. New York: BPC, 1936. paper.
World ofAbdu’l-Bahá, The. Mary Hanford. New York: Reality Publishing Corporation, 1921. New York: J. J. Little & Ives, 1935 and n.d. also up. n.d.
Year With the Bahais oflndia and Burma, A. Sidney Sprague. London: The Priory Press, 1908 and 1908. paper and cloth.
Za-Ti-Et Al-Lah; The Identity and the Personality of God. Ibrahim George Kheiralla. Chicago: Grant’s Printery, 1896. paper.
287.
288.
289.
290.
291.
292.
293.
294.
B. AN ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AUTHORS, COMPILERS AND TRANSLATORS OF Bahá’í BOOKS AND BOOKLETS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader
Abbreviations
A —‘Abdu’l-Bahá B —Bahá’u’lláh
C —Compilations of the Writings of the Central Figures of the Faith
S —Shoghi Effendi
W—Writings on the Bahá’í Faith
Abu’l-Fadl, Abul Fazl, or Abul Faze] see Gulpéygéni, Mirzá Abu‘l—Fadl
Abu’l Hussein, Mfrzé— W—159
Afnán, Ruhi—W—45, 184
Afrukhtih, Dr. Youness Khan (Dr. Yl’mis 131m Afrfik_htih)—W—36, 254
Agnew, Arthur S.—W—146, 147, 250
Alexander, Agnes—A—62; W—144, 205
Alkany, Muhammed Ali Muhammad-‘Ali Alkany— W— 1 5 9
Ameen’Ullah (Aminu’lláh Fan’d) see Fareed, Mirzá Ameen’Ullah
Assad’Ullah, Mirza (Asadu’lláh)—W—121, 150, 231
Austin, Elsie—W—248
Backwell, Richard— W—90
Badi‘Ullah, Mirzá (Badf‘u’lláh)—W—1 18
Bagdadi, Zia (Diyé Baghdádl’)—W—175, 267
Balyuzi, Hasan M.—wT4, 14, 72, 73, 116
Barney, Laura Clifford— A—45, 66; W—137
[Page 573]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bedikian, Victoria— C—33
Blomfield, Mary Esther—A—35, 63, 73
Blomfield, Rose Ellinor Cecilia—A—35, 63, 73
Blomfield, Lady Sara Louisa—A—35, 63, 73; S—43; W—88
Bourgeois, Louis— W—53
Bowes, Eric—W—138
Braun, Eunice—W—132
Brittingham, Isabella D.—W—149, 228
Brittingham, James F.—W—177
Browne, Edward Granville— A—64; W—258
Campbell, Helen W.— W—41, 50
Campbell, Myrtle W.—W—95
Carden, Hugh— W—70
Chamberlain, Isabel Fraser or Soraya— A—5, 6; C—41
Chanler, Julie—B—4
Chase, Thornton—W—46, 77, 143, 146, 285
Cheyne, Thomas Kelly— W—221
Christophil see Townshend, George
Claus, Ted— W—194
Cobb, Stanwood—W—87, 119, 165, 174, 219, 233, 264, 269
Collins, Amelia—C—22; W—268
Conrader, Jay and C0nstance—B—37
Cooper, Ella Goodall—W—97
Cox, Alice Simmons—C—22; W—218
David—W—288
Dawud, J0hanna—A—33; C—53
Dealy, Paul Kingston— W—99
Dean, S. I.—W—123
Dodge, Arthur Pillsbury—W—192, 272, 287
Dreyfus, Hippolyte—W—282
Dunlop, Evangeline Elizabeth Crowell —W—79
Edge, Clara A.—W—255
Esphahani, Mirzá Ahméd see Sohréb, Ahmad
Esslemont, John Ebenezer—W—74, 75, 284
Esslemont, Peter— W—164
Esty, Frances—A—Zl
Faily, Dr. Jane et al—C—45, 46, 47
Faizi, Abu’l-Qasim—W—127, 179, 185, 262
Faizi, Gloria— W—22, 124
Fareed, Ameen’UIlah—B—8, 14; A—26; W—118,121, 162, 231, 252 Fathea’zam, Hooshmand (Hushmand
Fatheazam)— W—191 Ferraby, John— W—8, 203 Finch, Ida A.—W—129, 220 Fitzgerald, C01. Nathan Ward— W—195 Ford, Mary Hanford— W~202, 232, 292 Fozdar, Jamshid—W—85, 122, 151
573
Fozdar, Shirin— W—84
Gail, Marzieh—B—26; A—31, 42, 44; W—27, 100, 236
Garrida, Gertrude—S—18
Gaver, Jessyca Russell—W—ZS, 113
Giachery, Ugo—W—237
Gift, Maye Harvey— C—36; W—218
Goodall, Helen S.—W—97
Gregory Louis—W—142, 200, 225
Grundy, Julia M.——W—259
Gulpéygém’) Mirzá Abu’l—Fadl— W—44, 78, 83, 153
Haddad, Anton F. (Antl’m Haddéd)—B—15; W—103, 172,176
Hadi, Mirzá—W—252
Hall, Mrs. Basil—W—111
Hall, E. T.—W—173, 281
Hamadém’, Mirzá Husayn-i-—W—258
Hammond, Eric—A—3; C—59
Haney, Mariam—C—Sl; W—141, 200
Hannen, Mr. & Mrs. Joseph H.—W—7
Harris, W. Hooper— W—160, 277
Haydar Ali, Haji Mirza (Héjl’ Mirzá Haydar ‘Ah’)— W—36
Herrick, Elizabeth— W—278
Hoagg, H. Emogene—W—226
Hofman, David—C—54; W—93, 225
Holley, H0race—A—17;C—20;W—37, 45, 49, 54, 207, 223, 239
Huddleston, John— W—1 15
Irwin, Beatrice— W—140
Ishteal Ibn Kalantar see Quin, ‘Ali Quli
Ives, Howard Colby—W—208, 241
Jaxon, Honore J.—W—168
Jenabe Fazel (Jináb-i-Fáḍil-Mirzá Asadu’lláh Fáḍil) see Mazindarani, Mirza Jenabe Fazel
Johnson, L.—W—182, 216, 256
Kelsey, Olivia—C—Z; W—275
K_hén, ‘Ah’ Quh’ or Ali Kuli—B—Z, 3, 14, 24, 25, 26, 30, 31, 33, 26; A—47, 52; W—44, 78, 150
Kheiralla, Ibrahim George (Ibréhim George K_hayru’lláh)—W—15, 294
Knobloch, Alma S.—W—129
Knobloch, Fanny A.—W—129
Latimer, George Orr—W—86, 226
Lucas, Mary L.—W—81
McDaniel, Allen Boyer— W—243
McKay, Doris—W—135
MacNutt, H0ward—A—37, 38, 39; W—277
Marsella, Elena Maria— W—217
Mason, Barbara— C—39
Masson, Jean— W—171
[Page 574]
574
Mathews, Loulie Albee—W—198, 249, 286
Maxwell, May— W—l 14
Mézindaréni) Mirzá Jenabe Fazel—W—154, 155, 156, 157, 158
Meyer, Ray— W—26
Mills, Mountfort—C—Sl; W—133, 152
Moffett, Ruth Ellis—W—108, 109, 193
Momen, Moojan—W—l 10
Moneereh Khánum (Munirih Khánum) ——W—1 17
Monever Khánum (Munavvar —A—19
Movius, Mary Rumsey—A—3O
Muhajer, Mrs. Iran F.—A—34
Mflhlschlcgel, Peter— W—13
Mutlagh, Hushidar—C—24
Nabil-i—A‘zam (Mullá Zarandi)—W~98, 187
Nafljavém’) Violette— W—9
Norder, Cornelia A.—W—120
Paine, Mabel Hyde—C—32
Peeke, Margaret B100dgood—W—«186
Perigord, Emily McBride— W-—266
Phelps, Myron H.— W—163
Pinchon, Florence E.—W—92
Platt, Beatrice Marion—A—35, 63, 73
Quigley, Robert—W—128
Rabb, Mary M.—A~13, 14
Rabbani, Rúḥíyyih Khánum— W—203, 209, 210, 244, 250, 273
Rabbani, Shoghi Effendi—see Shoghi Effendi
Rastogi, Arjun—S—28
Remey, Charles Mason—W—ll, 19, 29, 32, 33, 34, 35, 38, 39, 48, 52, 94, 96,125,126, 145,148,161,169,173,178,190,196,l99, 201, 204, 214, 215, 224, 226, 227, 234, 263, 276, 279
Reynolds, Audrie—C—40
Root, Martha— W—257
Rosenberg, Ethel J.—W—80, 82
Rfihl’yyih Khánum see Rabbani, Rfihfyyih 1(_l_1énum
Sabet, Huschmand— W—143
Sala, Emeric— W—261
Sanderson, Edith Roohie—W—159
Sassi, Gabriel— W—168
Khánum)
Mubammad-i THE Bahá’í WORLD
Scaramucci, Mrs.—W—47
Schaefer, Udo— W—167
Schopflocher, Lorol—W—251
Scratchard, Felicia R.— W—290
Sears, William—W—128, 136, 211, 222, 260, 289
Shoghi Effendi—B—S, 6, 7, 10, 17, 20, 35; Bab-l; S—passim; C—48, 49; W—98, 187
Shook, Glenn A.— W—185
Simpson, G. Palgrave——W—21, 80
Singh, Pritam— W—135
Skrine, Francis Henry— W~51
Sohréb, Ahmad—A—7, 48, 51,52, 58, 60, 68; W—2,102,117,154,155,156,157,158
Sorabjee, Zena—W—187
Sprague, Sidney—B—12; W—247, 293
Stephens, Kenneth D.—W—238
Storey, Josephine D.—W—104, 105
Taherzadeh, Adib—W—229, 230, 270
Taherzadeh, Habib—B—34; Báb—Z
Teherani, Abdel Karim Effendi (Abdu’lKarim-i-Tihrzini)— W—6
Thompson, Juliet— W—3, 5
Townshend, George—C—35;W—89, 139,180, 212, 213
True, Corinne— W—197, 252
Truesdell, A. J.—W—23
Vail, Albert R.— W—42
Vail, Virgie V.— W—l 34
Waite, Louise R.—W—30, 31, 242
Ward, Allan L.— W—274
Watson, Albert Durant—W—l 12
Watson, Marie A.—— W—183
Wegener, Daniel Nelson— W—106
Wei], Henry A.—W—-91
Whitehead, O. Z.—W-240
Wilhelm, Roy—W—133, 152
Windust, Albert R.——A—54, 55, 56
Winterburn, Mr. & Mrs. George T.— W—254
Woolson, Gayle— W—107
Youness Khan see Afrukhtih, Dr. Youness Khan (Dr. Yl’mis flmén Afrfiflltih)
Zarandi, Muhammad-i- see Nabil-i—Azam (Nabfl-i-A‘zam; Mullá Muhammad-iZarandx’)
[Page 575]
BAHA't BIBLIOGRAPHY
575
C. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF Bahá’í CHILDREN’S LITERATURE IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE—1917—1979
10.
11.
12.
13.
Compiled by Robert E. Cadwalader
. Badz". Kama] Ma’ani. NSA of Thailand,
1977. paper and boards.
. Bahá’í Child’sABC, A. Roberta K. Chris tian. il. Rochelle Boonshaft. Wilmette: BPC, 1944. 6th ptg. Wilmette: BPT, 1965.
paper.
. Bahá’í Child’s Song Book, A. verses
Roberta K. Christian. music Eugene Babcock. i1. E. Butler McHenry.
. Bahá’í’ Founders. Child Education Com mittee. New York: BPC, 1939. paper. (based on Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era).
. Bahá’íHoly Days, Grades 1—9. ed. Advis ory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
. Bahá’z’Lesson Outline for Children. comp.
Committee on Training and Teaching Children. 4 parts. New York: BPC, 1935.
paper.
. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade K: History,
Progressive Revelation etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
. Bahá’í’ Lesson Plans Grade I: History,
Bahá’í’ Heroes etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
. Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 2: History, the
Báb etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’í’ Lesson Plans Grade 3: History, Bahá’u’lláh etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 4: History, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’ etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’í Lesson Plans Grade 5: History, Shoghi Effendi etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’í’ Lesson Plans Grade 6: History, Hands of the Cause etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Bahá’z’ Lesson Plans Grade 7: History, Religions etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education: Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’z’ Lesson Plans Grade 8: History, Heroic Age Ofthe Faith, etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper.
Bahá’z’ Lesson Plans Grade 9: History, Formative Age Ofthe Bahá’í Faith, etc. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1968 and 1976. paper. Bahai Prayers for Children. n.p. n.d. (prayers from the 1929 USA prayer book). paper.
Bahá’í’ Prayers for Children. il. Hutchinson.
Bahá’í’ Principles. comp. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1946. paper. Bahá’í Puzzle Book for Young People from 8 to 80. National Child Education Committee of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands, 1974. paper.
Bahá’í’ Quotations on Education. National Child Education Committee of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands.
Bahá’ís Around the World Grade K, Social Teachings, Bahtf’z’ School Lessons Plans. Katherine Patton et a1. Advisory Committee on Education. n.p. n.d. paper.
Bahá’í Teacher’s Handbook, Bahá’í’ School Lesson Plans Grade K. ed. Advisory Committee on Education. Wilmette: BPT, 1963. paper.
Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. i1. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.
Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Pre-Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.
Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Intermediate. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. il. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.
Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children,
Jean
[Page 576]
576
28.
29.
30.
31.
32. 33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Teacher’s Manual, Pre—Primary and Primary. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. i]. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper.
Bahá’í Teaching Guide for Children, Teacher’s Manual, Intermediate. comp. Alice Cox and Evelyn Musacchia. i1. Lynn Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1966. paper. Blessed is the Spot. Bahá’u’lláh. il. Anna Stevenson. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. hardcover.
Children’s Course in Bahá’í’ Principles with Pictures to Color. Child Education
Committee. New York: BPC, 1939. paper. Children’s Stories from the Dawn Breakers. Zoe Meyer. i]: Carl Scheffler. Wilmette: BPT, 1955 and 1964. cloth. Child’s Prayer Book, A. Wilmette: BPC, 1942 and 1943. paper.
Child’s Way. Child Education Committee. quarterly and bi-monthly. 1949 to date. Coloring Book, Bahá’í Places Around the World. comp. Evelyn Musacchia. i1. Dorrine Sadilek. National Child Education Committee of NSA of Hawaii, 1975. paper.
Comprehensive Study Outline for Children. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1940. Wilmette: BPC. paper. Creation. illustrated. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1940. paper.
Creative Plan of God, The. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1940. Wilmette: BPT, 1958. paper.
Gift, The. Cynthia K. Walcott. i1. Lynn Hutchinson Reynolds. Wilmette: BPT, 1976. cloth.
God and His Messengers. David Hofman. i1. Geoffrey Rideout. Oxford: George Ronald, 1953, 1958 and 1967. i1. Zohreh Zahra’i. Wilmette: BPT, 1973. cloth and paper.
Heroic Lives. McClellan Vail. Press, 1917. cloth.
Heroic Lives in Universal Religion, Teacher’s Manual. Albert R. and Emily McClellan Vail. Boston: The Beacon Press, 1917 and 1928. cloth.
Junior’s Book of Religion, A. Marguerite True. Wilmette: BPC, 1945. paper.
Albert R. Boston:
and Emily The Beacon
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Kingdoms of God, The. Janet Lindstrom. i1. Anna Stevenson. Wilmette: BPT, 1961. cloth.
Lessons in Religion. Mohammad Ali Alkany. trans. Edith Roohie Sanderson. Boston: The Tudor Press, 1923. paper. Let Thy Breeze Refresh Them, Bahá’í’ Prayers and Tablets for Children. London: BPT, 1976. cloth.
Living Today for Tomorrow’s World. Marguerite True. il. Jean Hutchinson. Wilmette: BPT, 1956.
Magazine Ofthe Children Ofthe Kingdom, The. quarterly. Dec. 1919 through the mid 1920’s.
Magnified Be Thy Name. London: BPT, 1963. cloth.
Manual of Suggestions for Organizing a Bahá’í Children’s Hour. Child Education Committee. ca. 1945.
Manual of Suggestions for Organizing a Children’s Class. American Indian Service Committee. (1964). (Beatrice Bechtold). O God Guide Me (A selection of Bahá’í Prayers). Wilmette: BPT, 1974. hardcover.
Principles 0 f Child Education in the Bahá’í Faith, The. Wilmette: BPT.
Reading Supplement to a Bahá’í PictureColoring Book. NCEC of the NSA of the Hawaiian Islands, 1971. by Evelyn Musacchia. paper.
Sing a New Song. i1. Anna Stevenson. comp. Bahá’í’ Committee on Music. Stories for Children. Jacqueline Mehrabi. London: BPT, 1970. paper.
Stories from the Dawn-Breakers. Zoe Meyer. i1. Carl Scheffler. Wilmette: BPT. cloth.
Stories of Bahá’u’lláh as Told by Pokka. Betty Reed. i1. John Hollins. London: BPT, paper.
Stories of the Master. National Child Education Committee of Alaska. Eileen Litterel & Katy Main. i1. Katy Main. ed. Eugene B. Van Zanten. n.d. paper. Study Course for Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era. Child Education Committee. Wilmette: BPC, 1942. paper.
Suggested Materials for Teaching Children’s Classes. comp. (Beatrice Bechtold). American Indian Service Committee, 1964. paper.
[Page 577]
61.
62.
63.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Teacher’s Handbook Volumes V and VI, Children’s Classes; Crafls and Games, combined. ed. Advisory Committee on Education.
To Live the Life. Child Education Committee. New York: BPC, 1938. paper. Wonder Lamp, The. A. Q. Faizi. New Delhi: BPT, 1972. paper.
64.
65.
577
World Fellowship, A Universal Bahai News Letter of Consultation —Service for Orphans—Education Of Destitute and Helpless Children. Montclair, N. J. Vol. I, 1923—.
Nine Holy Days. Jackie Mehrabi. London: BPT, 1975. paper.
D. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH-LANGUAGE BOOKS BY NON-BAHA’iS IN WHICH MENTION IS MADE OF THE Bahá’í FAITH
Compiled by Maureen Thur
. Abbott, Evlyn and Campbell, Lewis.
Life of Benjamin Jowett. London: Murray, 1897. Vol. 2: p. 466.
. Adams, Rev. Isaac. Persia By a Persian.
n.p., 1900. pp. 453—490.
. Addison, James Thayer. The Christian
Approach to the Moslem. New York: Columbia University Press, 1942.
. Algar, Hamid. Mirzfi Malkum Khan: a
study in the history oflram'an modernism. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973. pp. 11, 46, 58—68, 213—16, 221—5, 227, 306.
.—. Religion and state in Iran,
1 785—1906: the role of the Ulama in the Qajar period. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1969. pp. 136, 138—44, 146—51.
. Allen, Cady H. The Message of the Book
of Revelation. Nashville: Press, 1939. p. 188m.
Cokesbury
. Allen, Devere. The Fightfor Peace. New
York: Macmillan Co., 1930. pp. 619, 628.
. Ali, Ameer. The Spirit ofIslam. London:
Christophers, 1922. pp. 357—359, 482.
. Alter, S. Neale. Studies in Bahaism.
Beirut: American Press, 1923. Anderson, Norman. Christianity and comparative religion. Leicester: Intervarsity, 1970. pp. 9, 14, 48—9.
. The World’s religions. Leicester: Intervarsity, 1950. Anderson, Wing. 1 947—1 953. Los Press, 1946. p. 103. . Prophetic Years 1948—1954. Los Angeles: Kosmon Press, 1947.
Years Kosmon
Prophetic Angeles:
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
. Seven Years That Changed the World, 1941—1948. Los Angeles: Kosmon Press, 1940. p. 15.
Andrews, Fannie Fern. The Holy Land Under Mandate. 2 vols. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1931. Vol I: pp. 200—201.
Anthony, A. P., ed. Year Book and Almanac of the Holy Land. Chicago: Holy Land Almanac, 1936.
Arberry, Arthur John. Oriental Essays: Portraits of Seven Scholars. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1960. pp. 168—171.
. Shiraz, Persian City OfSaints and Poets. Centers of Civilization Series, Book 2. Norman, Okla.: University of Oklahoma Press, 1960. pp. xii, 25—28. Arguments with a Non-Catholic. Pulaski, Wis.: Franciscan Printer, 1959. Armajani, Yaḥyá. Iran. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1972. pp. 115—117.
. Middle East Past and Present. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1970. pp. 10, 42, 224, 252—254.
Armisadeghi, Hossein, ed. Twentieth Century Iran. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1977. pp. 2, 5, 80,186,187. Arnold, Arthur. Through Persia by Caravan. New York: Harper & Bros., 1877. pp. 278—280.
Arnold, Matthew. Essays in Criticism. Chap. 7: A Persian Passion Play. London: Macmillan & Co., 1893. pp. 226—227; New York: A. L. Burt Co., n.d. pp. 166—167.
Aschner, Ernest and Server, Zachery.
[Page 578]
578
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41. Bakhash,
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Journal to Israel, a Pictorial Guide. New York: Monde, 1956.
Ashbee, Charles Robert. A Palestine Notebook [918—1923. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1923. pp. 116—120.
Chap. 10: ‘Abbas, the Bahai’ Atherton, Gertrude. Julia France and Her Times. New York: Macmillan Co., 1912. pp. 277—278, 280, 298. 331. Atkins, Gaius Glenn. Modern Religious Cults and Movements. New York: Fleming Revel], 1923. pp. 328—335.
Atkins, Gaius Glenn and Braden, C. S. Procession of the Gods. New York: Richard R. Smith, 1930. p. 451; London: Constable, 1931. New York: Harper & Bros., 1936.
Avery, Peter. Modern Iran. London: Ernest Benn, 1965 & 1967. pp. 44, 52—67, 76, 80, 81, 91, 97,110,114—115, 121, 132, 276, 277, 279, 469.
Ayres, Lew. Altars Of the East. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., 1956. pp. 258—259.
Bach, Marcus. The Circle ofFaith. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1957. pp. 47—83, 186, mention on dust cover.
. Let Life Be Like This! New Jersey: Prentice—Hall, 1963. p. 195. Report to the Protestants. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1948. pp. 180,181,184—185,187, 191—192, 193, 199-200, 205, 212, 217, 218, 219, 231.
Shoghi Effendi, An Appreciation. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1958. Reprint of chap. 3, The Circle ofFaith. . Strangers at the Door. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1971. pp. 74—95. They Have Found (1 Faith. Indianapolis: Bobbs—Merrill Co., 1948. pp.189-221, 229, mention on dustcover. Baedekar, Karl. Baedekar’s Palestine and Syria. London: Unwin, 1912. Bahá’ísm. St. Louis, Mo.: Concordia Tract Mission, n.d. Pamphlet, 16 pp. Bahm, Archie J. The World’s Living Religions. New York: Dell Publishing Co., 1964. pp. 333—334, 356, 368. Shaul. Iran: monarchy, bureaucracy and reform under the
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
Qajars, 1858—1896. London: Press, 1978. pp. 24, 324. Ballou, Robert O. The Viking Portable Library World Bible. New York: 1944. pp. 448—449.
Barrows, John Henry. Christianity the World Religion. Chicago: A. C. McClurg & Co., 1897. pp. 38—39.
Barrows, Rev. John Henry, ed. The World's Parliament of Religions. 2 vols. Chicago: Parliament Publishing Co., 1893. Vol. 2: pp. 1125—1126.
Barton, George A. The Religions of the World. 4th ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937. p. 111.
Barton, James L. The Christian Approach to Islam. Boston: Pilgrim Press, 1918, pp. 197—200.
Baudouin, Charles. Contemporary Studies. Trans. E. and C. Paul. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1925. pp. 131—146.
Chap.: ‘Bahaism. A Movement
Toward the Community of Mankind’. Bayne, E. A. Persian Kingship in Transition. New York: American Universities Field Staff, 1968. pp. 45—46, 247.
Bell, Archie. The Spell Ofthe Holy Land. Boston: Page Co., 1915. pp. 258. 304—321.
Full page photo: Abbas Effendi, p. 304
facing page.
Bell, Lady, ed. The Letters of Gertrude Bell. London: Ernest Benn, 1927: New York: Boni & Liveright, 1927. Vol I: pp. 131—132.
Bell, Gertrude Lowthian. Syria the Desert and the Sown. London: W. Heinemann, 1907; New York: E. P. Dutton, 1907. pp. 148, 150, 193.
Picture of Mighkin-Qalam, p. 149. Ben-Horen, Eliahu. The Middle East: Crossroads to History. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 1943.
Benjamin, S. G. W. Persia and the Persians. Boston: Ticknor & Co., 1887. p. 353—355.
Bentwich, Norman. The Religious Foundations of Internationalism. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1933. pp. 178, 179.
Ithaca
. A Wanderer in the Promised Land. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1933. p. 78—80.
[Page 579]
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bercorize, Zion. For Immediate Release. Sheridan House, 1936.
Berry, G. L. Religions of the World. New York: Harper & Row, Barnes & Noble Books, 1947 and 1956; reprinted, 1968. p. 126.
Bethmann, Erich W. Bridge to Islam. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1953. p. 162.
Bevington, Colin. New light from the East. London: Falcon Booklets, 1974. pp. 19—23.
Bibesco, Princess George V. (Marthe). The Eight Paradises. Trans. from French. New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1923. pp. 31~36.
Binder, Leonard.1ran. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1962. pp. 74, 161—163, 243, 296.
Binning, Robert B. M. A Journal of Two Years’ Travel in Persia, Ceylon, etc. 2 vols. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1857. Vol. I: pp. 403—408.
Bishop, Mrs. (Isabella L. Bird)../0urneys in Persia and Kurdistan. 2 vols. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1891. Vol. I: p. 273.
Bishop, Peter D. Words in world religions. London: SCM Press, 1949. p. 120. Bliss, Frederick Jones. Religions ofMod em Syria and Palestine. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1912. pp. 19—20.
Blunt, Wilfred. A Persian Spring. London: James Barrie Brooks, 1957. Boeckel, Florence Brewer. Between War and Peace. New York: Macmillan Co., 1928. pp. 102—103. Bolitho, Hector. A Biographer’s Notebook. New York: Macmillan Co., 1950. p. 22. Boulton, Marjorie. Zamenhof, Creator of Esperanto. London: Routledge and Paul Kegan. pp. 211—212. Bouquet, Alan Coates. Comparative Religion. Middlesex, England: A Harmondsworth. Penguin Books, 1941. p. 283. —. Sacred Books of the World. Middlesex, England: Harmondsworth, 1941. Penguin Books, 1954. pp. 310—312. Companion source-book to Comparative Religion.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
579
Bowen, William C. The Church at Work in the Moslem World. University of Chicago Press. 1936.
Braden, Charles Samuel. Jesus Compared. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1957. p. 86.
Scriptures of Mankind. New
York: Macmillan Co., 1952. pp. 472—473.
. These Also Believe. New York:
Macmillan Co., 1949. p. 464.
. The World's Religions. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1939. p. 232. Bradshaw, Jane. Eighr major religions in Britain. London: Edward Arnold, 1979.
pp. 155—70.
Brandow, S. G. F., ed. Dictionary of Comparative Religion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1970. pp. 124—126.
Brick, Daniel and Riwkin-Brick, Anna. Palestine. Cleveland: World Publishing Co., 1949. Reference: photo Shrine of Greatest Holy Leaf, Haifa; pages not numbered. Brockelmann, Car]. History of the Islamic Peoples. Trans. Joel Carmichael and Moshe Perlmann. New York: Putman’s, 1947. pp. 326, 424—427. Broderick, Robert C. Historic Churches of the United States. New York: Wilfred Funk, 1958. pp. 186—190. Photos Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, pp. 187, 189, 190. Browne, Edward Granville. ‘Bahaism’ in Religious Systems of the World. London: Swan, Sonnerschein & Co., 1905. pp. 333—355. —. A History of Persian Literature 1500—1924. Cambridge University Press, 1924. This is Vol. 4 ofA Literary History of Persia, same author. . A History of Persian Literature Under Tartar Dominion (AD. 1265 —I 502). Cambridge University Press, 1920. pp. 432, 452, 470. This is Vol 3. ofA Literary History of Persia, same author. . A Literary History of Persia. 4 vols. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1924. passim.
[Page 580]
580
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
. Materials forthe Study Ofthe Bábt’ Religion. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1918. passim.
. A Persian Anthology. London: Methuen & C0., 1927. pp. 26, 38—40.
59—60, 68—73. — The Persian Revolution of 1905—1909. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1910. pp. xvi—xvii, xxii, 45, 60—62, 106—107, 148, 424—429.
. Press and Poetry in Modern Persia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914. pp. 18, 59, 235—236, 294, 310.
. A Year Amongst the Persians. London: A. & C. Black, 1893. passim. Butler, Donald G. Many lightS. London: Geoffrey Chapman, 1975. pp. 157—161. Byng, Edward J. The World oftheArabs. Boston: Little, Brown & C0., 1944. pp. 270, 307.
Canney, Maurice. An Encyclopedia of Religions. London: Routledge, 1921. pp. 48—50.
Canney, J. E. Comparative Religions. London: Routledge, 1921.
Carpenter, Edward. Pagan and Christian Creeds: Their Origin and Meaning. New York: Blue Ribbon Books, 1920. pp. 153. 214—217; New York: Harcourt, Brace & C0., 1920.
.Carpenter, Joseph Estlin. Comparative Religion. New York: Henry Holt & C0., (1913). pp. 70—71, 188.
Carty, James W., Jr. Nashville as a World Religious Center.
Carus, Paul. Philosophy as a Science. Chicago: Open Court Publishing C0., 1909. p 98.
Cash, W. Wilson. Christiandom and Islam. New York: Harper & Bros., 1937. pp. 68. 133.
. The Expansion oflslam. London: Church Missionary Society, 1928. pp. 8,‘ 117—121.
Cave, Sydney. An Introduction to the Study of Some Living Religions Of the East. London: Duckworth & C0., 1921; New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1923. pp. 234—235.
Cavendish, Richard, ed. Man, Myth, & Magic. New York: Marshall Cavendish, 1970. V01. 2: pp. 208—209.
103
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
. Cheyne, Thomas Kelly. The Reconciliation of races and religions. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1941. Chirol, Sir Valentine. The Middle Eastern Question. London: .1. Murray, 1903. Christofferson, Gerda. From the Dusty Haunts of Man. Christofferson Enterprises. chap. 7.
Christopher, John B. The Islamic Tradition. New York: Harper & Rowe, 1972. pp. 83—85.
Clark, Elmer T. The Small Seats in America. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1937.pp.29, 183.
Clawson, Mary. Letters from Jerusalem. London: Abelard-Schuman, 1957. p. 95. Clemen, Prof. Car]. Religions of the World. Trans. Rev. A. K. Dallas. New York: Harcourt, Brace & C0., 1931. pp. 469—470.
Coke, Richard. The Heart of the Middle East. London: Thornton Butterworth, 1925. p. 211.
Comay, John. Israel: An Uncommon Guide. New York: Random H0use,1969. pp. 257~258, 270—271.
Cottam, Richard W. Nationalism in Iran. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1979. pp. 87—89, 342, 357. Cousins, Norman. Who Speaks for Man? New York: Macmillan C0., 1953. pp. 232, 234, 236—237, 239, 241.
Cowles, Alton House. The Conquering Horseman. Boston: Christopher Publishing House, 1923.
Cragg, Kenneth. The Call of the Minaret. New York: Oxford University Press, 1956. p. 133.
. The House of Islam. Encino, Calif.: Dickenson Publishing C0., 1975. p. 81.
Curtis, William Eleroy. To-Day in Syria and Palestine. Fleming Revel] C0., 1903. Curzon, George N. Persia and the Persian Question. 2 vols. London: Longmans, Green & C0., 1892. V01 1: pp. 43, 269, 414, 417, 496—504: Vol. 2: pp. 43, 103.
Cannavarro, Marie De S. Insight into the Far East. Los Angeles: Wetzel Publishing Co.,1925.pp.156—157,165,168. Daniel, Rabbi Mooshie G. Modem Persia. Wheaton: Wheaton College Press,
[Page 581]
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
1897. pp. 145—152.
Chapter titled ‘BOBEISM’. Das Gupta, Kedarneth. Essence of Religions. New York: World Fellowship of Faiths, 1941. pp. 10,135—139. Davidson, Abraham A. The Story of American Paintings. New York: Harry N. Abrams Publishers, 1974. p. 140. Davis, Rev. John Tyssul. A League of Religions. London: Lindsay Press, 1926. chap. 10.
De Lorey, Eustache and Sladen, Douglas. Queer Things about Persia. Philadelphia: Lippencott, 1907. pp. 268, 307—317.
Dennis, James S. The New Horoscope of Missions. New York: Fleming H. Revel], 1908. p. 94.
Dexter, Harriet Harmon. What’s Right with Race Relations. New York: Harper Bros., 1958. pp. 195—196.
Dilling, Elizabeth. The Red Network. Kenilworth,111.: By the Author, 1934. p. 128.
Dodd, Edward M. and Fose, Wilson Dodd. Mecca and Beyond. Committee on United Study of Foreign Missions. Donaldson, Dwight M. The Shi’ite Religion. London: Luzac Co., 1933.
Dooley, Dr. Tom. Dr. Tom Dooley’s Three Great Books: Deliver Us from Evil, The Edge of Tomorrow, The Night They Burned the Mountain. New York: Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, n.d. pp. 308—309. The Night They Burned the Mountain. New York: Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1960. pp. 87—88.
Dos Passos, John. Journeys between Wars. New York: Harcourt, Brace.1939. Douglas, William 0. Strange Lands and Friendly People. New York: Harper & Bros., 1951. p. 51.
. West of the Indus. New York: Doubleday & Co., 1958. pp. 254, 272, 279—280, 417—418, 427.
Drake, Durant. Problems of Religion. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1916. pp. 211, 231.
Dubin, Joseph W. The Green Star. Philadelphia: National Institute of Esperanto, 1944.
Dunning, H. W. To-Day in Palestine. New York: James Pott & Co., 1907. pp.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
581
164—166.
Dutcher, George M. Modern Persia, Vol. 5 in The History of Nations. 25 vols. Henry Cabot Lodge, gen. ed. New York: P. F. Collier & Son Co., 1928. pp. 362—363, 401.
Eddy, (George) Sherwood. God in History. New York: Association Press, 1947. p. 169.
—. A Portrait of Jesus. New York: Harper & Bros., 1943.
Edelman, Lily. Israel. Edinburgh: Thomas Nelson & Sons, 1958. p. 42.
. New People in a New Land. New York: Thomas Nelson & Sons, n.d. p. 42. Edwards, Arthur Cecil. A Persian Caravan. New York: Harper & Bros., 1928. pp. 14—23.
Ehrenpreis, Marcus. The Soul of the East. New York: Viking Press, 1928. p. 206.
Ellis, Harry B. Heritage of the Desert. New York: Ronald Press, 1956. Ellwood, Charles A. The Reconstruction of Religion. New York: Macmillan Co., 1922.
Ellwood, Robert S. Religious and spiritual groups in modem America. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1973. pp. 275—81.
Elwell-Sutton, Laurence Paul. Modern Iran. London: George Rutledge Sons, 1941; reprint 1942.
Emanuel, W. V. The Wild Asses, a Journey Through Persia. London: Jonathan Cape, 1939. pp. 88, 109.
Emerson, Edwin, Jr. A History Ofthe Nineteenth Century Year by Year. 3 vols. New York: P. F. Collier & Son, 1900. Vol. 2: p. 1131.
Eskelund, Karl. Behind the Peacock Throne. London: Alvin Redman, 1965. pp. 75—85.
Farah, Caesar E. Islam Beliefs and Observances. Woodbury, N.Y.: Barron’s Educational Series, 1970. pp. 220, 243—248.
Ferguson, Charles W. The Confitsion Of Tongues. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran & Co., 1928. pp. 13, 231—250, 450—451.
. The New Books of Revelation. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran &
[Page 582]
582
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Co., 1929. pp. 13, 231—250, 450—451. Same as above, retitled. Ferguson, John. War and Peace in the World’s Religions. New York: Oxford University Press, 1978. pp. 149—155. Ferre, Nels Frederick Solomon. Know Your Faith. New York: Harper Bros., 1959. p. 34. Filmer, Henry (pseud. for James Rives Childs). The Pageant of Persia. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1936. pp. 28, 196—200, 202—203. Fitch, Florence Mary. Allah, the God of Islam. New York: Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., 1950. p. 136. Forbes, Murray. Hollow Triumph. Chicago: Ziff-Davis Publishing Co., 1947. pp. 215, 233—234, 267. Forlong, Major General J. G. R. Faiths of Man, A Cyclopaedia of Religions. 3 vols. London: Bernard Quaritch, 1906. Vol 1: pp. 223—224. Forman, Henry James and Gammon, Roland. Truth is One. New York: Harper & Bros., 1954. pp. 218—222. Photographs: Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, p. 218; Dr. Hushang Javid and Horace Holley, p. 218. Fradenburgh, J. N. Living Religions; or the Great Religions Of the Orient. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe, 1888. pp. 476—477. Frye, Richard N. The Heritage ofPersia. Cleveland, 0.: World Publishing Co., n.d. p. 212. . Iran. New York: Henry Holt & Co., 1953. pp. 11, 66. Gairdner, W. H. T. The Reproach of Islam. London: Student Volunteer Missionary Union, 1909. p. 351. Gartler, Marion; Laikin, Judith; and Hall, George. Understanding Israel. Sacremento, Calif.: California State Series, 1964. Colour photo, Shrine of the Báb, on cover. Geden, Alfred 8. Studies in Comparative Religion. London: Charles H. Kelly, 1898. pp. 291—300. Gellhorn, Eleanor Cowles. McKay’s Guide to the Middle East. New York: David McKay Co., 1965. pp. 160—161. Gibb, Hamilton Alexander Rosskeen.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
Mohammedanism: An Historical Survey. London: Oxford University Press, 1949. pp. 164, 186. Gibran, Kahlil and Jean. Kahlil Gibran. Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1947. pp. 273, 287—288. Pencil drawing of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá done by Kahlil Gibran in 1912, p. 288. Gibbons, Herbert Adams. et al. Great Religions Of the World. New York: Harper & Bros., 1901. pp. 187—215;rev. ed., 1912. pp. 187—215. Pages cited: BABISM by E. Dennison Ross. New preface in 1912, revised edition. Gordon, General Sir Thomas Edward. Persia Revisited. London: E. Arnold, 1896. pp. 81—91. Grabbe, Paul. The Story of Orchestral Music and Its Times. New York: Grosset & Dunlop, 1942. p. 68. Gratus, Jack. The False Messiahs. New York: Tarplinger Publishing Co., 1976. pp. 209—21 1. Green, Gerald. The Stones onion. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1971. pp. 305—307, 318. Green, Phillip Leonard. Pan—American Progress. New York: Hastings House, 1942. Groseclose, Elgin. Introduction to Iran. New York: Oxford University Press, 1947. p. 14. Gruber, Ruth. Israel Today, Land of Many Nations. New York: Hill & Wang, 1958. p. 17. Guérard, Dr. Albert Léon. Education of a Humanist. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1949. p. 250. Haas, William 8. Iran. New York: Columbia University Press, 1946. pp. 90—91. Hadley, Earl J. Magic Powder. New York: Putnam, 1945. pp. 200—201. Frontis: Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette; facing page 197, photo House of Worship detail. Haines, Charles Reginald. Islam as a Missionary Religion. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1889. Hall, William H. The Near East: Crossroads of the World. New York: Interchurch Press, 1920. p. 66.
[Page 583]
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190.
191.
192.
193.
194.
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Hamilton, Elizabeth. Put Off Thy Shoes. New York: Scribner’s, 1957. p. 86. Handley—Taylor, Geoffrey, comp. Bibliography of Iran. Chicago: St. James Press, 1969. pp. 107, 108, 109.
Harris, Warren G. Gable and Lombard. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1974. pp. 137, 153.
Harrison, Marguerite Elton (Baker). There’s Always Tomorrow. New York: Farrar & Rhinehart, 1935. p. 644. Harry, Myriam. A Springtide in Palestine. Boston: Houghton Miffln, 1924. pp. 25—26.
Hart, Walter C. First Course in Algebra. Boston: D. C. Heath, 1947. p. 76. Hartman, William C., comp. and ed. Hartman’s Who’s Who in Occult, Psychic and Spiritual Realms. New York: Occult Press, 1925. pp. 17, 33, 85—87, 165, 187. . Who’s Who in Occultism, New Thought, Psychism and Spiritualism. Jamaica, N.Y.: Occult Press, 1927. pp. iv, vi—viii, 1—2, 7, 11, 13, 16, 18, 39, 51—52, 58, 60, 77, 177, 226, 230, 235, 241, 251—253.
Hasan-E-Fasa-i. History of Persia under Qajar Rule—Farsnama- Ye Naseri. Trans. Heribert Busse. New York: Columbia University Press, 1972. pp. 277, 290294, 302—304.
Hayes, Carlton Joseph Huntley. A Political and Cultural History of Modern Europe. 2 vols. New York: Macmillan Co., 1939. Vol. 2: p. 450.
Hertz, Rabbi Richard C. Jewish Life Today. Detroit: Temple Beth El, 1962. Higgins, Harold H. Shadows t0 the Unseen. Montpelier, Vt.: Driftwood Press, 1937.
Hilu, Virginia. Beloved Prophet—The Love Letters of Kahlil Gibran and Mary Haskell and Her Private Journal. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1972. pp. 74, 77. Hitti, Phillip K. The Near East in History. Princeton, N.J.: D. Van Nostrand Co., 1961. pp. 391, 403—407.
Hocking, William Ernest. Living Religions and a World Faith. New York: Macmillan Co., 1940. pp. 180, 212. Hocking, William Ernest; Blanshard, Brand; Hendel, Charles W.; and Randall, John H., Jr. Preface to Philosophy
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
583 Textbook. New York: Macmillan Co.,
1947. p. 399. Hodgson, Marshall G. The Order thhe Assassins. The Hague, Netherlands:
Mouton & Co., 1955. pp. 276, 291. Hoffman, Daniel P. India’s Social Miracle. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Co.,1961.pp.39, 68, 95. Holiday Magazine Travel Guide, Israel. New York: Random House, 1973. pp. 91, 94. Photo of Shrine of the Báb and International Archives Building, page, 91. Holisher, Dersider. The House of God. New York: Crown Publishers, 1946. p. 171. Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, page 171. Holmes, John Haynes. Palestine To-Day and To-Morrow. New York: Macmillan Co., 1929. pp. 33—36. Hoople, Ross E. et al. Preface to Philosophy: Book of Readings. New York: Macmillan Co., 1946. pp. 308, 312, 379—384. Hoover, W. I. T. Religionisms and Christianity. Boston: Stratford Co., 1924. pp. v, 165—178. Hopkins, E. Washburn. The History of Religions. New York: Macmillan Co., 1918. pp. 479, 482. Houghton, Walter R. ed. Neely’s History Ofthe Parliament ofReligions and Religious Congresses at the World’s Columbian Exposition. Chicago: F. T. Neely, 1893. pp. 640—641. Howe, Mark Anthony De Wolfe, comp. Holmes-Pollack Letters, 1874—1932. 2 vols. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1941. Vol. 1: p. 206. . John Jay Chapman and His Letters.. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1937. p. 260. Howells, Rulon S. D0 Men Believe What Their Church Prescribes. Salt Lake City, Utah: Desert Book Co., 1932. p. 160. Howen, Herbert H. Asia, a Short History from Earliest Times to the Present. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1936. Huart, Clement. A History ofArabic Literature. London: W. Heinemann, 1903; New York: D. Appleton & Co., 1903. p. 212.
[Page 584]
584
214.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Hubbard, Elbert. Hollyhocks and Golden Glow. East Aurora, N.Y.: Roycrofters, 1912. pp. 21—40.
Selected Writings. Vol. 10: Hundred—Point Men. East Aurora, N.Y.: Roycrofters, 1922. pp. 320—332.
Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 320. Hughes, Thomas Patrick. Dictionary of Islam. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1865.
Hume, Robert Ernest. The World’s Living Religions. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1924. p. 212. Hume—Griffith, M. E. Behind the Veil in Persia and Turkish Arabia. London: Seeley & Co., 1909.
Hunter, Stanley Armstrong. Temple of Religion and Tower of Peace. San Francisco: Temple of Religion and Tower of Peace, 1940. pp. 10, 54,85.
Hurgronje, C. Snouck. Mohammedanism. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons. Iqbal, Sir Mohammad. The Reconstruction ofReligious Thought in Islam. Lahore: Muhammad Ashraf, 1958. p. 152. Israel Ministry for Foreign Affairs, Information Department. The Arabs in Israel. Jerusalem, April 1961.
Jackson, A. V. Williams. Persia, Past and Present. London: Macmillan & Co., 1906. pp. 28, 48—50, 119, 273, 328, 376. Jackson, Stanley. pseud. (Samuel). The Sassoons. London: William Heinemann, 1968.
Jacobsen, Ernst Ludwig Harthern. Going Home. London: Jarrolds, 1938. Jacoby, F. J., ed. The Anglo-Palestine Year Book 1947—1948. London: Anglo-Palestine Publications.
Jessup, Henry Harris. Fifi‘y-three Years in Syria. 2 vols. New York: Fleming Revel], 1910. V01. 1: p. 329; Vol. 2: pp. 605, 636—638.
Jewett, Mary. Reminiscences of My Life in Persia. Cedar Rapids, Ia.: Torch Press, 1909.
Jiggetts, J. Ida. Israel to Me, a Negro Social Worker, Inside Israel. New York: Bloch Publishing Co., 1957. pp. 90, 92. Jones, L. Bevan. The People of the Mosque. Calcutta, India: Association Press, Y.M.C.A., 1932. pp. 141—146. Jordan, Rev. F. M. The Muhammadan
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
247.
248.
World of Today. 1929.
Kahn, E. J., Jr. Who, Me? New York: Harper, 1949. p. 179.
Kamshad, Hassan. Modern Persian Prose Literature. Cambridge: University Press, 1966. pp.48,51, 194.
Keddie, Nikki R. Art Islamic Response to Imperialism. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1968. pp. 10—11, 30, 43, 158.
—. Religion and Rebellion in Iran. London: Frank Cass & Co., 1966. pp. 56, 71, 72, 102, 107—109, 113, 132, 136, 143, 144.
Sayyia' Jamal Ad—Din ‘AlAfghani’. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1972. pp. 19—22.
Kellett, E. E. A Short History of Religions. London: Victor Gollancz, 1948. Kennedy, J. M. The Religions and Philosophies Of the East. London: Werner Laurie, 1911.
Keyserling, Hermann. The Travel Diary of a Philosopher. 2 vols. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co.,1925.Vol. 1: pp. 160, 178; Vol. 2: p. 273.
Kohn, Hans. A History ofNationalism in the East. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1929. pp. 31—36, 430.
Kolarz, Walter. Religion in the Soviet Union. London: Macmillan & Co., 1966. pp. 470—473, 497; New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1961.
Mention on dust cover, back. Kirkland, Winifred. As Far as I Can See. New York: Scribner’s, 1936. Kirkpatrick, Clifford. Religion in Human Affairs. London: John Wiley & Sons, 1929. pp. 212, 291, 307, 487.
Kisch. Col. Frederick Hermann. Palestine Diary. London: V. Gollancz, 1938. Kohn, Hans. A History Ofnationalism in the east. Grosse Point, Mich.: Scholarly Press, 1969. pp. 15, 20, 31—34, 320, 328. Kuwaldo, Boris and Fyuel, T. R. This is Israel. North Dakota: Bruno Cassirer.
Lammens, Henri. Islam Beliefx and Institutions. Trans. E. Dennison Ross fr. the French. London: Methuen & Co., 1929; New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1929. pp. 189—196; New York: Stokes, 1930.
Landor,
A. Henry Savage. Across
[Page 585]
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
259.
260.
261.
262.
263.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Coveted Lands. 2 vols. New York:
Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1903. Vol. 1: p.
391.
Landis, Benson Y. Religion in the United
States. New York: Barnes & Noble,
1965. pp. 3—4, 104.
. World Religions. New York: E. P.
Dutton & Co., 1957. pp. 24—25.
Lavan, Spencer. The Ahmadiyah Move ment. New Delhi: Manonar Book Ser vice.
Lenczowski, George. The Middle East in
World Affairs. New York: Cornell Uni versity Press, 1956. pp. 205, 374.
Levi, Avraham. Bazak Guide to Israel,
[977—1978. New York: Harper & Row,
1977. pp. 285, 299, 307, 311, 322, 327. ColourphotoofShrineofthe Báb,page 314; colour photo of Shrine, pages 296—297; drawing of Shrine of the Báb, page 302.
Levy, Reuben. The Social Structure of
Islam. London: Cambridge University
Press, 1957. p. 39.
Lewis, John. The Religions of the World
Made Simple. New York: Doubleday &
Co., 1958. p. 90.
Ling, Trevor. A History ofReligion East
and West. London: Macmillan & Co.,
1968. pp. 388—389.
Linklater, Eric. The Man on My Back.
London: Macmillan & Co., 1941. pp.
137—138.
Linton, Bishop J. H. Persian Sketches.
London: Church Missionary Society,
1923.
Longrigg, Stephen H. The Middle East.
London: G. Duckworth, 1963; Chicago:
Aldine Publishing Co., 1963; rev. ed.,
1970. p. 95.
Lorimer, John Gordon. Gazetteer of the
Persian Gulf, ‘Omdn, and Central
Arabia. 6 vols. Vol. 1 Historical, part 2:
pp. 2350, 2356, 2384—2385.
Lukach, Harry Charles. The Fringe of the
East. London: Macmillan & Co., 1913. See: Luke, Harry Charles Joseph.
Luke, Sir Harry (Charles Joseph).A Por trait and an Appreciation, Cyprus. Lon don: George G. Harrap & Co., 1957. pp.
122—123.
Luke, Harry Charles (Joseph) and
Keith-Roach, Edward. The Handbook of
264.
265.
266.
267.
268.
269.
270.
271.
272.
273.
274.
275.
276.
277.
278.
279.
585
Palestine. London: Macmillan & Co., 1922. pp. 33, 58—59, 105,107.
Lumby, Christopher. Cook’s Traveller’s Handbook to Palestine, Syria and Iráq. London: Simpkin Marshall, 1934. pp. 248, 254.
Lytton, Noel Anthony Scawen Wilfred. Seawen Blunt, a Memoir. London: Macdonald & Co., 1961.
McDaniel, Robert A. The Shuster Mission and the Persian Constitutional Revolution. Minneapolis, Minn.: Bibliotheca Islamica, 1974. p. 54. Maclntosh, Douglas Clyde. The Pilgrimage of Faith. Calcutta, India: University of Calcutta, 1931. p. 33. McKibben-Harper, Mary, MD. The Doctor Takes a Holiday. Cedar Rapids, 1a.: Torch Press, 1941.
MacMunn, Lt. Gen. Sir George. The Religions and Hidden Cults oflndia. New York: Macmillan Co., 1932. p. 200. Mahmud, Sayyid Fayyaz. The Story of Islam. London: Oxford University Press, 1959. p. 290.
Malcolm, Napier. Five Years in a Persian Town. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1907. Markham, Clements Robert. A General Sketch of the History ofPersia. London: Longmans, Green & Co., 1874. Marlowe, John. Iran a Short Political Guide. New York: Praeger, 1963. pp. 9, 104.
Martin, Alfred (Wilhelm). Comparative Religion and the Religion of the Future. New York: Appleton & Co., 1926. pp. 81—91.
Martin, Walter R. The Kingdom of the Cults. Minneapolis: Bethany Fellowship, 1965; rev. ed., July 1968. pp. 252—258, 351, 438.
Mason, Myra. Where Do You Belong? Philadelphia: Fellowship of Divine Truth, 1939.
Massé, Henri. Islam. Trans. Halide Edib fr. the French. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1938. pp. 217, 248, 255—259. Mathews, Shailer and Smith, Gerald Birney.A Dictionary ofReligion and Ethics. Chicago: Christian Century Press, 1922. p. 46.
Mathison, Richard R. Faiths, Cults and
Sects in America. New York: Bobbs
[Page 586]
586
280.
281.
282.
283.
284.
285.
286.
287.
288.
289.
290.
291.
292.
293.
294.
295.
THE BAHA'I’ WORLD
Merrill, 1960. pp. 104—106. Matthews, Joseph Brown and Duvall, Sylvanus M. Conflict 0r Cooperation. New York; American Committee, World Youth Congress, 1928. Maud, Constance E. Sparks among the Stubble. London: P. Allen & Co., 1924. pp. 26—27, 81—112.
Portrait of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá facing page
83. Mead, Frank S. Handbook ofDertominations in the United States. New York: Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1951. pp. 24—25, 185; 5th ed.: Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1970. pp. 29—31, 221, 237. Means, I. and L. E. Creative Energy. London: John Murray, 1931. Melton, J. Gordon. The Encyclopedia of American religions. Wilmington, N.C.: McGrath, 1978. vol. 2: pp. 351—354. Miller, Herbert A. The Beginning of Tomorrow. New York: F. A. Stokes, 1932. Miller, Janet. Camel Bells of Baghdad. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1934. pp. 218, 220, 264. Miller, Milton G. and Schwartzman, Sylvan D. Our Religion and Our Neighbors. New York: Union of American Hebrew Congregations, 1963. pp. 6, 209—210, 273. Miller, William McElwee. The Bahá’í’ Faith: its history and teachings. South Pasadena: William Carey Library, 1974. . Bahaism: Its Origin, History and Teachings. New York: Fleming Revell Co., 1931. . What is the Bahá’í Faith? Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1977. Mills, Lady Dorothy. Beyond the Bosphorus. Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1926. pp. 97—100. Modern Art in the USA. New York: Knopf, 1956. p. 263. Montagu, Edwin Samuel. An Indian Diary. Edited By V. Montagu. London: Heinemann, 1930. Moore, George Foot. History of Religions. 2 vols. New York: Scribner’s Sons, 1919. Vol. 2: pp. 509—519. Mott, Francis John. Christ the Seed. Boston: A. A. Beauchamp, 1939; London: Gate Publishing Co., 1939.
296.
297.
298.
299.
300.
301.
302.
303.
304.
305.
306.
307.
308.
309.
310.
Mounsey, Augustus H. A Journey through the Caucasus and the Interior of Persia. London: Smith, Elder & Co., 1872. pp. 103—107. Mumford, Lewis. The Conduct of Life. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co., 1951. p. 117. Nakosteen, Mehdi and Kragh, Agnes. In the Land of the Lion and the Sun. The Country, Customs and Cultures of My People. Denver: World Press, 1937. pp. 79—80. Nariman, G. K. Persia and Parsis. Bombay, 1925. Nasr, Seyyed Hossein. Iran (Persia). Tehran: Offset Press, 1973. . Islam and the Plight of Modern Man. London: Longman, 1975. pp. 118, 119. Newman, Edward M. Seeing Egypt and the Holy Land. New York: Funk & Wagnalls Co., 1928. pp. 164—165, 204. Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 204. Nicholson, Reynold A. The Mystics of Islam. Beirut, Lebanon: Khayats, 1966. p. 89. Norden, Herman. Under Persian Skies. Philadelphia: Macrae, Smith Co., n.d. pp. 51—52, 127, 208, 226—227, 243. Noss, John B. Man’s religions. New York: Macmillan, 1949. p. 556. Nweeya, Samuel Kasha. Persia and the Moslems. St. Louis: Press of Von Hoffmann, 1924. pp. 148—170. Pages cited, ‘BABISM’. . Persia the Land of the Magi. Indianapolis: S. K. Nweeya, 1904. pp. 81—96 (chap. 11: ‘The Kurds and Bobs’); Philadelphia: S. K. Nweeya, 1907. pp. 110—115 (chap. 11: ‘The Kurds and Bobs’); Philadelphia: S. K, Nweeya, 1916. pp. 226—248 (chap. 12: ‘Babism, Its Relation to Mohammedism and Christianity’). Official Guide (Panama-Pacific International Exposition, San Francisco, 1915). Wahlgreen Co., 1915. p. 61. O’Leary, DeLacy Evans. Islam at the Crossroads. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1923; New York: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1923. Oliphant, Laurence. Haifa, 0r Life in Modern Palestine. Edinburgh: William
[Page 587]
311.
312.
313.
314.
315.
316.
317.
318.
319.
320.
321.
322.
323.
324.
325.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
Blackwood, 1887; New York: Harper & Bros., 1887. pp. 103—107.
Pages cited titled: ‘The Babs and Their
Prophet’.
Orizu, Akweke Abyssinia Nwafor. Without Bitterness. New York: Creative Age Press, 1944.
Orni, Ephraim and Efrat, Elisha. Geography of Israel. Jerusalem: Israel Program for Scientific Translations, 1966. pp. 217—218.
Photo of Shrine of the Báb, page 218. Ovington, Mary White. The Walls Came Tumbling Down. New York: Harcourt, Brace & C0., 1947. pp. 125—127. Palestine. London: Ernest Benn, 1934. Palmer, Edward Henry. Oriental Mysticism. London: Luzac& C0., 1938. p. 44. Parrinder, E. Geoffrey. A Book ofWorld Religions. Amersham: Hulton Educational, 1965.
Comparative Religion. New York: Macmillan C0., 1962. pp. 23, 82, 108.
. A Dictionary of non-Christian religions. Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1971. pp. 7, 38—39. . What World Religions Teach. London: George G. Harrap, 1968. pp. 107—109,140,190. Parrish, Maude. Nine Pounds of Luggage. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott C0., 1939. pp. 368—373. Pemberton, Lovell Bearse. A Modern Pilgrimage to Palestine. Philadelphia: Dorrance & C0., 1925. pp. 67, 73, chaps, 9,10 & 11(pp.74—104),149,156,189 chap. 26 (pp. 190—197), 263—264. Illustrations: drawing of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, Louis Bourgeois’ model, dust cover and frontispiece; Garden of ‘Rizwan, Near Haifa’, p. 92; ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, p. 100. Petersen, William J. Those Curious Cults. New Canaan, Conn.: Keats Publishing, pp. 181—190, 213. Phelps, Vivian. Concerning Progressive Revelation. London: Watts & C0., 1936. p. 105. Piggot, John. Persia—Ancient and Modem. London, 1874. Pike, E. Royston. Encyclopaedia of Religion and Religions. New York:
326.
327.
328.
329.
330.
331.
332.
333.
334.
335.
336.
337.
338.
339.
340.
341.
342.
587
Meridian Books, 1958. pp. 42—43. . Ethics of the Great Religions. London: Watts & C0., 1948. pp. 212—213. Pole, Wellesey Tudor. Private Dowding. New York: Dodd, Mead & C0., 1919. pp. 74—75. . The Silem Road. London: Neville Spearman, 1960. pp. 24—26, 75—80, 90. . Some Deeper Aspects Ofthe War. Bristol, England: Taylor Bros., 1914. . Writing on the Ground. London: Neville Spearman, 1968. pp. 135—165, 172, mention on flap of dust cover. Photo ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, facing page 135. Pole, Wellesey Tudor and Lehmann, Rosamond.A Man Seen from Afar. London: Neville Spearman, 1965. pp. 53, 77. Port, Weimer. Chicago the Pagan. Chicago: Judy Publishing C0., 1953. pp. 167—168. Potter, Charles Francis. The Faiths Men Live By. New York: Prentice—Hall, 1954. pp. 307—308. Prather, Nelson, ed. Who’s Who in Hawaii. Honolulu, T.H.: Midpac Publishers, 1947. p. 10. Price, Willard. Adventures in Paradise. New York: John Day, 1955. pp. 180—181. Radford, Ruby L. Many Paths to God. Wheaten, 111.: Theosophical Publishing House, 1970. pp. 2, 122—125, 127,. Photo of Bahá’í House of Worship, Wilmette, page 23. Radhakrishnan, Sir Sarvepalli. Eastern Religions and Western Thought. New York: Oxford University Press, 1959. p. 340. Rand. Abby. The American Traveller’s Guide lo Israel. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1972. pp. 13, 74, 199. Photo of Shrine of the Báb, page 196. Rasooli, Jay M. and Allen, Cady H. The Life Story of Dr. Sa’eed of Iran. Grand Rapids: Grand Rapids International Publications, 1958. pp. 90. 92, 103, 115. Reeder, Paul A. Introduction to Philosophy. Lucas Bros., 1960. Reinach, Salomon. A History of Religions. Trans, fr. the French, London: G. P. Putnam Sons, 1909. Religious Bodies 1916. 2 vols. Washing
[Page 588]
588
343.
344.
345.
346.
347.
348.
349.
350.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
ton, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1919. Vol. 1: pp. 36, 74, 78, 142, 154—155, 164—165, 182—183, 184—185, 198—199, 202—203, 208—209, 214—215,228—229, 232—233, 358—359, 378—379, 380—381,430—431, 448—449, 478—479, 490—491,494—495, 512—513, 526—527; Vol, 2: pp. 43—45. Religious Bodies 1926. 2 vols, Washington, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1930. V01. 1: pp. 10, 82—83, 92, 97, 102, 112, 117, 122—123, 148—149,166—167,192—193,194—195, 216—217, 220—221, 230—231,270—271, 276—277, 296—297, 360, 369, 374, 378, 381, 389, 392, 394, 406, 408, 446, 451, 457, 468, 470, 472, 475, 477, 482, 486, 490, 496, 502, 507, 510, 515, 521, 536, 540,548,563,572,573;Vol.2: pp.70—76. Religious Bodies 1936. 3 vols. Washington, D.C.: Department of Commerce Bureau of Census, 1941. Vol. 1: pp. 12, 86—87, 98,104, 110,116,126,136—137, 146—147,176—177,190—191,198—199, 224—225, 226—227, 232—233, 248—249, 254—255, 264—265, 300—301, 306—307, 314—315, 316—317, 350—351, 440, 442, 448, 455, 461, 464, 466, 470, 472, 480, 483, 485, 488, 490, 497, 499, 502, 505, 515, 520, 528, 542, 546, 553, 555, 560, 564, 565, 566, 568 574, 581, 584, 585, 589, 592, 594, 595, 600, 605, 610, 617, 621, 623, 626, 630, 632, 634, 635, 640, 646, 652, 653, 655, 659, 666, 669, 673, 678, 679, 681, 686, 691, 692, 700, 713, 715; Vol. 2, pt. 1: pp. 76—82.
Rice, C. Colliver. Persian Women and Their Ways. London: Seeley Service, 1923. pp. 21, 24,155—156, 275—276. Rice, Clara C. Mary Bird in Persia. London: Church Missionary Society, 1916. pp. 37—40, 71,102,107,143,191. Rice, Edward. Eastern definitions: a short encyclopedia of religions of the Orient. Garden City: Doubleday, 1978. pp. 45—46.
. Ten Religions of the East. New York: Four Winds Press, 1978. pp. 2—3, 127,133—141.
Richards, Fred. A Persian Journey. New York: Jonathon Cape & Harrison Smith, 1932.
Richards, J . R. The Religion 0 fthe Bahá’ís.
351.
352.
353.
354.
355.
356.
357.
358.
359.
360.
361.
362.
363.
364.
365.
366.
367.
368.
London: Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge, 1932.
Robertson, John M. Pagan Christs. London: Watt & Co., 1911. pp. xvi—xviii. Redford, Ruby L. Many Paths to God. Wheaten: Theosophical Publishing House, 1970. pp. 122—125.
Ross, Sir Edward Dennison. Both Ends of the Candle. London: Faber & Faber, 1943.
—. The Persians. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1931. pp. 67—69, 75, 76.
Ross, Emory and Myrta. Africa Disturbed. New York: Friendship Press, 1959.
Rowley, Peter. New Gods in America. New York: David McKay Co., 1971. pp. 3, 8,12—17, 205.
Rudhyar, Dane. Astrological Timing. New York: Harper & Row, Harpe Calophon Books, 1972, pp. 42, 53, 63—64, 109, 114, 139—140, 141, 142—143, 151.
. The Astrology of Personality. New York: Lucis Publishing Co., 1936; reprint ed., Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., 1970. pp. 209—210, 233, 238, 246, 272, 322, 421.
. Birth patterns fora new humanity: a study of astrological cycles structuring the present world crisis. The Netherlands: Servire-Wassenar, 1969. pp. 42, 53, 102, 114,139,142—4,151,191, 211.
. Cycle of Culture and Sacrifice. Carmel, Calif: Hamsa Publications, 1929. . Gifis Of the Spirit. Los Angeles: New Age Publishing Co., 1946. p. 128. . New Mansions for New Men. New York: Lucis Publishing Co., 1938. p. 236. .Rania, an Epic Narrative. San Francisco: Unity Press, 1973. pp. 176—178.
. The Sun Is Also a Star. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1975. p. 97.
. The Sun Is Also Astral. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1975. p. 97.
. Synthetic Drama As a Seed of Civilization. Oceano, Calif.: Harbinson & Harbinson.
Rumble, Rev. Dr. Leslie and Carty, Rev. Charles Mortimer. Radio Replies. 3 vols. St. Paul, Minn.: Radio Replies Press, 1942. Vol. 3: p. 42.
Rutland, Jonathan. Looking at Israel.
[Page 589]
369.
370.
371.
372.
373.
374.
375.
376.
377.
378.
379.
380.
381.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
London: Adam & Charles Black; Philadelphia: J. B. Lippencott Co., 1970. Rypka, J . History of Iranian Literature. Dordrecht, Holland: D. Reidel Publishing Co., 1968. p. 374. Saghaphi, Mirza Mahmoud Khan. In the Imperial Shadow. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran & Co., 1926. p. 400. St. John, Robert and editors of Life. Israel. New York: Time, 1962. pp. 129—130, 131. Samuel, Viscount Herbert Louis. Belief (mdAction. London: Casse] & Co., 1937. Sasek, Miroslav. This is Israel. Italy: Printed by Fratelli Fabbri editori, 1962; reprint ed., 1966. 27, 33. Children’s book of drawings with captions: Shrine of the Báb, page 27; view of Bay of Haifa from Mt. Carmel showing Shrine of the Báb and Bahá’í Archivesbuildingwhichare not identified. Savage, Minot J. The Passing and the Permanent in Religion. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1901. p. 147. Schnapper, Edith B., comp. One in All. Wisdom of the East series. London: John Murray, 1952. pp. xv, 15—16, 30—31, 45—46, 62—63, 78, 92—93, 109—110, 126—127, 142—143,149. Searight, Sarah. The British in the Middle East. London: Wiedenfeld & Nicholson, 1969; New York: Athenum, 1969. pp. 81—82, 142. Sedych, Andrei. This Land is Israel. New York: Macmillan Co., 1967. pp. 68—71. Photo of Shrine of the Báb, pages 69 and 86. Seitz, William C. Mark Tobey. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1962. pp. 10,12—15, 44, 45, 47, 50, 90, 91. Sell, Edward. Bahaism. Islam series. London: Madras & Colombo: Christian Literature Society for India, 1912. . The Faith oflslam. London: Society forthe Promotion ofChristian Knowledge, 1920. pp. 184—209. Shabaz, Absalom D. Lahd Of the Lion and the Sun. Madison, Wis.: by the author, 1901 and n.d. pp. 49—51. 1901 edition has photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, page 51. Undated edition has an illustration of ‘Mohammed and the Koran’ on page 51 in its place.
382.
383.
384.
385.
386.
387.
388.
389.
390.
391.
392.
393.
394.
395.
396.
589
Sharma, Roshan Lal. Holy Men and Holy Cows. New York: Exposition Press, 1968.pp.163—164.
Shedd, W. A. ‘Second Study’. The Vital Forces of Christianity and Islam. J. H. Golden, ed. London: Humphrey Milford, 1915. pp. 51—52, 57, 62, 63, 74. Shephard, Judy and Rosenfeld, Alvin. Ticket to Israel. New York: Rhinehart & Co., 1952. pp. 202, 218, 230.
Sheil, Lady. Glimpses of Life and Manners in Persia. London: John Murray, ’ 1856. pp. 176—181, 272—282.
Shimoni, Yaacov and Levine, Evyatar. Political Dictionary Ofthe Middle East in the 20th Century. Jerusalem: Jerusalem Publishing House, 1972. p. 63.
Photo of Shrine of the Báb, page 63. Shuster, W. Morgan. The Strangling of Persia. New York: Century Co., 1912. pp. 21—22.
Siddiqi, Aslam. Modernization Menaces Muslims. Lahore: E. Muhammad Ashraf, 1974. pp. 63, 277. Sinclair, Upton. The Profits ofReligion. Pasadena, Calif.: Upton Sinclair, 1918; New York: Vanguard Press, 1927. p. 254. Singer, Caroline and Baldridge, Cyrus LeRoy. Half the World is Iṣfahán. New York: Oxford University Press, 1936. p. 36. Skinner, Clarence R. A Religion for Greatness. Boston: Murray Press, 1945. Smart, Ninian. The Religious Experience. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1976. pp. 22, 435—436. The Religious Experience of Mankind. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1969. pp. 417—418. Smith, R. Bosworth. Mohammed and Mohammedanism. London: Smith Elder & Co., 1874; New York: Harper & Bros., 1875. Smith, Wilfred Cantwell. Islam in Madern History. Princeton University Press, 1957.pp. 135,153. Solomon, Victor. A Handbook of Conversions to the Religions Of the World. New York: Stravon Educational Press, 1965. pp. 362—367. Photo of Bahá’í International Archives and Shrine of the Báb, page 364
[Page 590]
590
397.
398.
399.
400.
401.
402.
403.
404.
405.
406.
407.
408.
409.
410.
411.
412.
THE BAHA’I WORLD
and House of Worship, Wilmette, page 366. Soper, Edmund Davison. The Religions of Mankind. New York: AbingdonCokesbury, 1938. pp. 311—312; 3d rev. ed., 1951. p. 223. Speer, Robert Elliott. The Finality of Jesus Christ. Westwood, N. J.: Fleming H. Revel] Co., 1933. . The Light of the World. West Medford, Mass: Central Committee on the United Study of Missions, 1911. pp. 214—216. . Missionary Principles and Practices. New York: Fleming H. Revel] Co., 1902.
. Missions and Modern History. New York:F1eming H. Revel] Co., 1904. Vol.1:pp.121—182. . The Unfinished Task of Foreign Missions. New York: Fleming H. Revel] Co., 1926. Spengler, Oswald. The Decline of the West—Perspectives of World History. 2 vols. New York: Alfred Knopf, 1928. p. 228.
The abridged edtion has no Bahá’í
mention. Spiegelberg, Frederic. Living Religions of the World. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentioe-Hall, 1956. pp. 419—421. Stark, Freya. Baghdad Sketches. London: E. P. Dutton & Co., 1938 and J. Murray, 1939. Steiner, M. J. Inside Pan—Arabia. Chicago: Packart, 1947. p. 211. Stevenson, Dwight Eshelman. Faiths That Compete for My Loyalty. St. Louis, Mo.: Christian Board of Publication, 1948. pp. 71—72. Stewart, George Rippey. American Way of Life. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1954. pp. 67, 69. Stoddard, Lothrop. The New World of Islam. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1922. p. 324. Storer, Rev. J. Thoughts That Build. New York: Macmillan Co., 1924. Storrs, Sir Ronald. Orientations. London: Nicholson & Watson, 1939. pp. 67, 322, 332. . The Memories of Sir Ronald Storrs. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons,
413.
414.
415.
416.
417.
418.
419.
420.
421.
422.
423.
424.
425.
426.
427.
428.
429.
1937. pp. 67, 322,332.
American title of above ‘Orientations’. Strachan, Francoise, ed. The Aquarian Guide to Occult, M ystical, Religious. Magical London and Around. London: Aquarian Press, 1970. pp. 5—6.
Sweet, William Warren. The Story of Religion in America. New York: Harper & Bros.. 1930, 1939. p. 626.
Swift. A. C. Religion Today. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1933.
Sykes, Percy Molsworth. A History of Persia. 2 vols. London: Macmillan & Co., 1915. Vol. 2: pp. 443—447; rev. ed., 1930. Vol. 2: pp. 341—345.
—. Persia. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1922.pp.127—129.
. Ten Thousand Miles in Persia or Eight Years in Iran. London: John Murray, 1902.
Thielman, Baron Max von. Journey in the Caucasus, Persia and Turkey in Asia. 2 vols. London: n.p., 1875. Vol. 1: p. 262; Vol. 2: pp. 52, 90—91.
Thompson, Ernest. Spiritualism and the Evolution of Religion. London: Psychic Book Club, 1953.
Tillyard. Aelfrida. Spiritual Exercises and Their Results. New York: Macmillan Co., 1927; London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1927.
Titus, Murray T. The Young Moslem Looks at Life. New York: Friendship Press, 1937. pp. 61—62.
Todd, A. J . Theories of Social Progress. New York: Macmillan Co., 1924. Tolstoi, Leo Nikolaevich.-Kingdom of God, What is Art? What is Religion? New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1899. p. 353. . What is Religion? And Other New Articles and Letters. Trans. V. Tchertkoff and A. C. Fifield. London: Free Age Press, 1902. p. 174.
Toynbee, Arnold J. Christianity among the Religions of the World. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1957. p. 104.
. Civilization on Trial. New York: Oxford University Press, 1948. p. 204.
. A Study of History. London: Oxford University Press, 1939. Vol. 5: p. 174.
Tritton, Arthur Stanley. Islam; Beliefs and Practices. London: Hutchinson Uni
[Page 591]
430.
431.
432.
433.
434.
435.
436.
437.
438.
439.
440.
441.
442.
443.
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
versity Library, 1954. pp. 157—158. Trout, David M. Religious Behavior. New York: Macmillan Co., 1931. pp. 281—282.
Tweedie, Ethel Brilliana (‘Mrs. AlecTweedie’). Mainly East. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1922. pp. 252—253; London: Hutchinson & Co., 1922.
Underhill, Evelyn. The Life of the Spirit and the Life Today. London: Wetheren & Co., 1925.
Upton, Joseph M. The History of Madern Iran, an Interpretation. Cambridge,
Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1965. pp. 10—11. Uris, Leon. Exodus Revisited. New
York: Doubleday, 1960. Photo of Bahá’í International Archives building, page 32. Ussher, John. Journey fi‘om London to Persepolis. London: n.p., 1865. pp. 120, 627——629. Van Baalen, Jan Karl. The Chaos of cults: a study in present—day isms. 4th rev. & enl. ed. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1973. pp. 146—61. Vanderbilt, Cornelius, Jr. Man of the World, My Life on Five Continents. New York: Crown Publishers, 1959. pp. 311—312, 317—318, 320—321. Van Passen, Pierre. Days of Our Years. New York: Hillman-Curl, 1939. p. 30. Van Sommers, Tess. Religions in Australia. PIX Series Extended to 41 Beliefs. Adelaide, Australia: Rigby, 1966. pp. 17—23. Photo of interior of Bahá’í House of Worship, Sydney, Australia, page 17. Vaughan, George. Temple and Towers (A Survey of the World’s Moral Outlook). Boston: Meador Publishing Co., 1941. pp. 429—431, 551—552. Photo of Horace Holley facing page 336. Vaughan, John Gaines. Religion, (1 Comparatiye Study. Cincinnati, 0.: Abingdon Press, 1919. Vilnay, Zev. The Guide to Israel. Jerusalem: By the author, 3d rev. ed., 1958; 3d rev. ed., 1960. pp. 28, 346—347, 359. Vines, Ernest M. Gems Of the East, or God in every nation. Sydney: West Pub 444.
445.
446.
447.
448.
449.
450.
451.
452.
453.
454.
455.
456.
457.
458.
459.
460.
591
lishing Corp., 1970. pp. 79—90. Vitzetelly, Frank H. Who? When? Where? What? New York: Funk & Wagnalls Co., 1920 and 1925.
Dictionary: ‘Bahá’í’, page 8. Voss, Carl Hermann. In Search ofMeaning. Cleveland, 0.: World Publishing Co., 1968. pp. 158—159. . The Universal God. Cleveland, 0.: World Publishing Co., 1953. p. 269. Vreeland, Herbert H.1ran. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1957. pp. 101, 254, 296, 297. Waamani, Israel T. Israel: A Profile. New York: Praeger, 1972. pp. 9, 78. Wadia, Ardaser Sorabjee N. The Message ofMohammed. London: J. M. Dent & Sons, 1923. p. 141. Wagar, W. Warren. The City of Man: Prophecies of a World Civilization in Twentieth-Century Thought. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1963. pp. 7, 117—120, 300. . Building the City of Man. New York: Grossman Publishers, 1971. p. 56. Wallis, Wilson D. Messiahs: Christian and Pagan. Boston: Richard G. Badger, 1918. pp. 111—116, 228—229. Walstrum, Mary Price. The Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: Reminiscences. Philadelphia: Dorrance & Co., 1935; Warren, Edith, comp. Important American Poets and Songwriters. 1947. p. 141. Watson, Robert Grant. A History of Persia. London: Smith Elder& Co., 1866. pp. 347—352, 360—362, 385—395, 407410. Watt, W. Montgomery. Islamic Surveys. Vol. 1:Islamic Philosophy and Theology. Edinburgh: University Press, 1962. pp. 171, 188. Watts, Harold H. The Modern Reader’s Guide to Religion. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1964. pp. 501, 584. Welch, Anthony. Calligraphy in the arts of the Muslim world. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. pp. 168—9. Whalen, William J. Faiths for the Few. Milwaukee, Wis.: Bruce Publishing Co., 1963. pp. v, vii, 36—41; mention on dust cover. White, Lyman Cromwell. International Non-Govemmental Organizations. New
[Page 592]
592
461.
462.
463.
464.
465.
466.
467.
468.
469.
470.
471.
472.
473.
474.
475.
476.
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Brunswick, N.J.: Press, 1951. Whittingham, George Napier. The Home of Fadeless Splendour. New York: E.P. Dutton & Co., (1921). pp. 234—236. Photo of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá being knighted, facing page 234. Widgery, Alban G. Living Religions and Modern Thought. London: Williams & Norgate, 1936. pp. 212—200. Wiedyke, Robert G. and Hurd, Mary K., comps. American Concrete Institute 55 Year Index [905—1959. Detroit, Mich.: American Concrete Institute, 1960. pp. 15, 234, 236. Wilber, Donald N. lran—Past and Present. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1948. pp. 79—80. Williams, David Rhys. World Religions and the Hope for Peace. Boston: Beacon Press, 1951. pp. 142—151, 203, 218, mention on dust cover. Williams, Henry Smith, ed. The Historianx’ History of the World. 25 vols. London: Hooper & Jackson, 1904. Vol. 24: pp. 493—494, 499. Williams, John Alden, ed. Themes of Islamic Civilization. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California, 1974. pp. 242—243. Williamson, George Hunt. Road in the Sky. London: Neville Spearman, 1959. The Saucers Speak. London: Neville Spearman, 1963. p. 110. Wills, C. J. In the Land Ofthe Lion and the Sun, or Modern Persia. London: Ward Lock & Co., 1891. pp. 144, 153—156, 164, 201, 272, 317, 339. . Persia as It Is. London: Sampson, Low, Marston, Searle & Rivington, 1887. pp. 7—8. Wilson, Sir Arnold Talbot. The Modern World. London: Ernest Benn, 1932. . Persia. London: Ernest Benn,
Rutgers University
1932.
Wilson, Rev. Samuel Graham. Bahaism and Its Claims. New York: Fleming Revell Co., 1915.
. Persian Life and Customs. New York: Fleming H. Revel] Co., 1895. pp. 12, 62,146,185—186, 221.
Winwar, Frances. American Giant: Walt
477.
478.
479.
480.
481.
482.
483.
484.
485.
486.
487.
488.
489.
490.
491.
492.
Whitman and His Times. New York: Harper, 1941.
Wismer, Don. The Islamic Jesus. New York: Garland Publishing Co., 1977. p. 254.
Wolcott, Leonard and Carolyn. Reli gions around the World. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1967. pp. 171, 174—175, 182.
Children’s book illustrated by Gordon
Laite. Wollaston, Arthur N. The Sword of Islam. London: John Murray, 1905. Wons, Anthony. Tony's Scrap Book. Chicago: Reilly & Lee, 1932. p. 41. Wood, Clement. The Outline of Man’s Knowledge. New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1927. p. 517. Wright, Denis. The English amongst the Persians. London: Heinemann, 1977. pp.44,120,164. Wysner, Gloria M. Near East Panorama. New York: Friendship Press, 1950. pp. 59—60. Young, Barbara. This Man from Lebanon. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1945; 1961, pp. 68—69. Younghusband, Sir Francis. The Gleam. London: John Murray, 1923. pp. 182—214. . Modern Mystics. London: John Murray, 1935; New Hyde Park, N.Y.: E. P. Dutton& Co., 1935. pp. 97—142, 252, 253.
. A Venture of Faith Being a Description of the World Congress of Faiths Held in London, 1936. London: Michael Joseph, 1937. pp. 50, 152—156. Yonan, Isaac Malek. The Beloved Physician of Teheran. Nashville: Cokesbury Press, 1934. pp. 88—90.
Zwemer, Samuel M. Heirs of the Prophets. Chicago: Moody Press, 1946. p. 118.
. Islam, a Challenge to Faith. New York: Student Volunteer Movement for Foreign Missions, 1907. pp. 147—149, 248.
—. The Moslem World. Cleveland, 0.: J. H. Lamb, 1908. p. 200; Boston: United Society of Christian Endeavor, 1908. p. 200.
Zwemer, Samuel M. and Brown, Arthur
[Page 593]
Bahá’í BIBLIOGRAPHY
J. The Nearer am! Farther East. New York: Macmillan Co., 1908. p. 98.
493. Zwemer, Samuel M. et al, ed. The Mohammedan World of To-Day being
Papers Read at the First Missionary Can 593
ference on Behalf of the Mohammedan World Held at Cairo, April 4th—9th, 1906. New York: Young People’s Missionary Movement, 1906. pp. 17, 115, 116,117—118,121,129—130.
E. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH-LANGUAGE ITEMS BY BAHA’iS IN WHICH MENTION IS MADE OF THE BAHA’I FAITH
(published under non-Bahá’í auspices)
Baker, Richard St. Barbe. I Planted Trees. London: Lutterworth, 1944.
. My Life My Trees. London: Lutterworth, 1970.
Banani, Amin. The Modernization of Iran, 1921—1 941. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1961.
Bausani, Alessandro. The Persians from the Earliest Days to the Twentieth Century. London: Elek, 1971.
Cobb, Stanwood. The Real Turk. Boston: Pilgrim Press, 1914.
Cole, W. Owen, ed. World Religions: a Handbook for Teachers. London: Commission for Racial Equality, 1977. Article by Philip Hainsworth.
Danner, Margaret Esse. The Down ofa Thistle. Waukesha: Country Beautiful, 1976.
Dunne, Finley P., ed. World Religions Speak on the ‘Relevance ofReligion to the Modern World.’ The Hague: Dr. W. Junk, 1970. Article by Dr. H. M. Munje.
Fozdar, Jamshed. The God of Buddha. New York: Asia Publishing House, 1973.
Gillespie, Dizzy. To Be or Not . . . Garden City: Doubleday, 1979. Hayden, Robert. Angle ofAscent. New York:
Liveright, 1975.
. The Night-Blooming Cereus. London: Paul Breman, 1973.
Kazemzadeh, Firuz. Russia and Britain in Persia, 1864—1914. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1968.
Leach, Bernard. Beyond East and West. London: Faber and Faber, 1978.
. Drawings, Verse and Belief. London: Jupiter Books, 1973.
Murchie, Guy. The Seven Mysteries of Life. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1978.
. Song Ofthe Sky. Cambridge: Riverside Press, 1954.
Prickett, John, ed. Initiation Rites. London: Lutterworth Educational, 1978. Article by Philip Hainsworth.
Scrutton, Robert. The Other Atlantis. Jersey: Neville Spearman, 1977.
Vail, Albert R. and Vail, Emily McClellan. Heroic Lives. Boston: Beacon Press, 1917.
to Bop.
F. A PARTIAL BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THESES RELATING TO THE BAHA’I FAITH
Asander, Margit. (1974) Bahá’z’Jsmen. Stockholms Universitet, Religionshistoriska Institutionen.
Baghdadi, Guita. (1977) Religiim, Santé et Medecine: Place de [a Foi Bahá’í. M.D., Université de Grenoble.
Behroozi, Shahla B. (1971) The Role of Bahá’í Faith in the Social Development of Bahá’í Youth in Los Bafios Laguna. Masters of Social Work, University of the Philippines.
Berger, Peter L. (1954) From Sect [0 Church: A Sociological Interpretation of the Bahá’í Movement. Ph.D., New York: New School of Social Research.
Beveridge, Kent. (1977) Die gesellschafispolitische Rolle der Bahá’í—Verwaltungsordnung innerhalb der Gemeinschafi der Bahá’í’, unter besondere Betrachtung der zwei leitenden Institutionen (The sociopolitical
role of the Bahá’í administrative order inside
[Page 594]
594
the Bahá’í community, with special reference to its two leading institutions). Doctorate, Vienna.
Garrigues, Steve L. (1976) The Bahá’ís Of Malwa: Identity and change among the Urban Bahá’í’s Of Malwa. Ph.D., Lucknow University.
Ḥakím, Christine. (1971) Naissance de [a Foi Bahti’z’e, et Son Processus Social. M.A., Université de Nanterre.
Ḥakím-Samandari, Christine. (1979) Etude d’une Institution Religieuse: ‘l’Ordre Administralif Bahá’í e! la communauté des fidéles. Ph.D., Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales.
Ízadínia, Foad. (1977) Centro de Estudios de Post Grado para Panamd. M.A., Universidad de Panamé, Facultad de Arquitectura.
Jockel, Rudolf. (1951) Die Glaubenslehrerz der Bahá’í-Religion. Ph.D., University of Tfibingen.
Johnson, Vernon Elvin. (1974) An Historical Analysis of Critical Transformations in the Evolution Ofthe Bahá’í World Faith. Ph.D., Baylor University, Texas.
Kahn, Sandra Santolucito. (1977) Encounter of Two Myths: Bahá’í and Christian in the Rural American South—A Study in Transmythicization. Ph.D., University of California at Santa Barbara.
Khazei, S. (1963) Finanzpolitische‘Probleme in der ‘Neuen Weltordnung’ auf Grand der Bahá’í’-Lehre (Finance—political problems in the ‘New World Order’ based on the Bahá’í teachings). Doctorate, Innsbruck.
Loi, Luciano. (1974) Alcum' Aspetti della Fede di Bahá’u’lláh (Some aspects of the faith of Bahá’u’lláh). Université degli Studi di Cagliari Facolté di Scienze Politiche.
Mahmoudi, Jalil. (1966) A Sociological Analysis of the Bahá’í’ Movement. Ph.D., University of Utah.
Martin, James Douglas. (1967) The Life and Work of Sarah Jane Farmer, 1847—1916. MA. University of Waterloo, Ontario.
Mchin, Denis. (1977)A Revised Survey Ofthe Sources for Early Bdbz’ Doctrine and History. Fellowship Dissertation, King’s College, Cambridge.
Mchin, Denis. (1979) From Shaykhism t0 Babism: a Study in Charismatic Renewal in
THE Bahá’í WORLD
Shi’i Islam. Ph.D., Cambridge University.
Murthi, R. Ganesa. (1969) The Growth Ofthe Bahá’í Faith in Malaysia. University of Malaya.
Ong, Henry. (1978) Yan Kee Leong: a Biography ofa Malaysian Cartoonist. M.S., Iowa State University.
Parnian, Shahnaz. (1974) A Study of the Methods ofCommunication Used by Bahá’ís in Educating Persons to Adopt Bahá’í Faith. BA. University of Rajasthan.
Philipp, Mangol Bayat. (1971) Mirza Aqa Khdn Kirmdm': I 9thC Persian Revolutionary Thinker. Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles.
Rafati, Vahid. (1979) The Development of Shayfln’ Thought in flzfl’ Islam. Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles.
Ross, Margaret J. (1979) Some Aspects of the Bahá’íFaith in New Zealand. M.A., University of Auckland.
Rost, Harry. (1969) The Possible Nature and Establishmento f Bahá’í’ Universities and C01leges Based Upon a Study of Bahá’í Literature. D.Ed., University of South Dakota.
Schaefer, Udo. (1957) Die Grundlagen der Verwaltungsordnung der Bahá’í’ (The foundations of the Bahá’í administrative order). Doctorate, Heidelberg.
Schmitz, Anke. (1973) Das Prophetenverstdndnis der Bahá’í—Religion aus der Sicht ihrer Grfinder. M.A., Mfilheim-Ruhr.
Scholl, Steven D. (1980) Imam? Shi’ism and the Bahá’í Faith: a Preliminary Study. B.A., University of Oregon.
Szepesi, Angela. (1968) A Proposed World Order: Bahá’í Teachings and Institutions. M.A., Laval University, Quebec.
Ward, Allan Lucius. (1960) An Historical Study Ofthe North American Speaking Tour of‘Abdu’l-Bahá and a Rhetorical Analysis of His Addresses. Ph.D., Ohio University.
Yazdani, Farhan. (1976) Les Deux Ailes d’un Oiseau, ou: une introduction (i la Conception Bahá’íe de la Santé. M.D., Université de Lyon.
Zabih, M. (1949) Die Ldsung der sozialen Frage auf Grund der Bahá’í—Lehren (The solution to the social question according to the Bahá’í teachings). Doctorate, Stuttgart.
